User:Claus chr/DPL: Difference between revisions

From KDE UserBase Wiki
No edit summary
Line 199: Line 199:
</nowiki>}}
</nowiki>}}


<!--
< !--
<DPL>
<DPL>
   namespace = Main
   namespace =  
   nottitleregexp = .*((/[a-z][a-z](.|-..)?)|([ _][(][a-z][a-z](...)?[)]))$
   nottitleregexp = .*((/[a-z][a-z](.|-..)?)|([ _][(][a-z][a-z](...)?[)]))$
   titleregexp = ^[A-J]
   titleregexp = ^[A-J]

Revision as of 16:32, 7 August 2018


Reference: DPL Manual
See also Pipesmoker's notes and this page of examples
Example UI on this Template:Catlist page

All the examples on this page have been commented out to prevent the page from being very slow to load. If you want to see the outcome of a search example, just edit the page and remove the comment tags around the desired example. You don't need to save the page, a preview will give you the search results; that way you can experiment with the examples and easily restore the page to its original state when you are done.

Searching for pages containing a certain text string

Text without wiki markup

Enter {{Search|text}} anywhere to get the search results in the form of links. Here text can be plain text or a perl like regexp. Be careful to escape regexp meta characters. If the searched text contain wiki markup this template may nor give the desired results; see the next section.

The Search template searches only the main namespace, and only original English pages.

Example: To find all English pages containing the word 'application' - possibly capitalized enter this:

{{Search|[Aa]pplication}}

Information

The results should just be a link to each page containing the searched text. For some reason, however, some pages include the content at the beginning of the page, typically an info box, an image or tabular material. This can be avoided by ensuring that the pages searched start by <languages />. If the page doesn't have translate tags this directive have no effect, but it prevents the unwanted inclusion of content from the page in the search result.


Translated text

Enter {{SearchLang|text|lang}} anywhere to get the search results in the form of links. Here text can be plain text or a perl like regexp and lang is a language code. Be careful to escape regexp meta characters. If the searched text contain wiki markup this template may nor give the desired results; see the next section.

Example: To find all Danish pages containing the word 'program' - possibly capitalized enter this:

{{SearchLang|[Pp]rogram|da}}

Pages linking to a given page

Use {{LinksTo|full page name}}. The full page name must be the entire wiki link up to (but not including) one of the characters '|', ']' or '#' and excluding Special:myLanguage. Note, that space characters in names are sometimes entered as '_', so in searches you should enter [ _] for spaces.

Example: To find all pages linking to Getting Help enter

{{LinksTo|Getting[ _]Help}}

Text containing wiki markup

In case the Search template does not work for you use code like this to accomplish your desired result:

<DPL>
  namespace = Main
  nottitleregexp = .*((/[a-z][a-z](.|-..)?)|([ _][(][a-z][a-z](...)?[)]))$
  titleregexp = ^[A-J]
  include = *
  includematch = @\{\{Remember\|3=@
  includemaxlength = 0
  format = ,\n* [[%PAGE%|%TITLE%]],,
  resultsheader = There are %TOTALPAGES% pages beginning with A-J\n
</DPL>
<DPL>
  namespace = Main
  nottitleregexp = .*((/[a-z][a-z](.|-..)?)|([ _][(][a-z][a-z](...)?[)]))$
  titleregexp = ^K[A-Z]
  include = *
  includematch = @\{\{Remember\|3=@
  includemaxlength = 0
  format = ,\n* [[%PAGE%|%TITLE%]],,
  resultsheader = There are %TOTALPAGES% pages beginning with KA-KZ\n
</DPL>
<DPL>
  namespace = Main
  nottitleregexp = .*((/[a-z][a-z](.|-..)?)|([ _][(][a-z][a-z](...)?[)]))$
  titleregexp = ^K[a-z]
  include = *
  includematch = @\{\{Remember\|3=@
  includemaxlength = 0
  format = ,\n* [[%PAGE%|%TITLE%]],,
  resultsheader = There are %TOTALPAGES% pages beginning with Ka-Kz\n
</DPL>
<DPL>
  namespace = Main
  nottitleregexp = .*((/[a-z][a-z](.|-..)?)|([ _][(][a-z][a-z](...)?[)]))$
  titleregexp = ^[L-Z]
  include = *
  includematch = @\{\{Remember\|3=@
  includemaxlength = 0
  format = ,\n* [[%PAGE%|%TITLE%]],,
  resultsheader = There are %TOTALPAGES% pages beginning with L-Z\n
</DPL>

Normally, you'd want to copy all of this into your page and modify the includematch lines to the pattern you want to search for. Note the two @-characters; they mark the beginning and end of the actual search pattern. You can use any character instead of @ as long as it does not appear in the actual pattern.

Note

Some characters such as ¤ do not work as pattern delimiters; perhaps only ASCII characters can be used?


Be aware!

The page count reported by each query is not the number of matching pages found, but the total number of pages searched in that group. That number should always be less than 500! If it is not then some of the pages will not have been searched.


If you want to search other namespaces than Main, just change that line. The nottitleregexp lines filters out all translated pages including lingering old style translations and should not be touched. The titlematch lines are needed to split up the search into manageable chunks. There is a maximum of pages that can be handled by the includematch search; if too many pages pass through the title filters the first ones up to the maximum number will be searched; the rest will be silently ignored! Currently, the maximum seems to be 1000. The include and includemaxlength should never be modified.


Finding all pages not yet marked for translation

<DPL>
  namespace = Main
  nottitleregexp = .*((/[a-z][a-z](.|-..)?)|([ _][(][a-z][a-z](...)?[)]))$
  titleregexp = ^[A-J]
  include = *
  includenotmatch = #<languages[ ]?/>#
  includemaxlength = 0
  format = ,\n* [[%PAGE%|%TITLE%]],,
  resultsheader = There are %TOTALPAGES% pages beginning with A-J\n
</DPL>
...

< !-- There are 2019 pages beginning with A-J

Information

This page no longer exists on UserBase. The contents have been moved to docs.kde.org. Sorry for the inconvenience.

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

Empty page.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Information

This page no longer exists on UserBase. The contents have been moved to community.kde.org/KDE_PIM. Sorry for the inconvenience.

Information

This page no longer exists on UserBase. The contents have been moved to docs.kde.org/index.php?package=artikulate. Sorry for the inconvenience.

Information

Please refer to community.kde.org/KPhotoAlbum/build_instructions. Sorry for the inconvenience.

Information

This page no longer exists on UserBase. The contents have been moved to invent.kde.org/sdk/heaptrack/-/blob/master/README.md?ref_type=heads. Sorry for the inconvenience.

Current Category Translation rule is listed in Translation Help Needed.

  • Artikulate/ScenarioTrainingUnits
  • ElisaElisa is a music player developed by the KDE community that strives to be simple and nice to use. Elisa is focused on a very good integration with the Plasma desktop of the KDE community without compromising the support for other platforms (other Linux desktop environments, Windows and Android).
Elisa's main window.

Elisa's changelog is accessible on the community page.

Currently the following pages are in Draft:

Die Abfrage des Status ergibt '70'; gibt es dafür eine Erklärung?:

muelux@muelux-LT70B-T61:~$ qdbus --system org.freedesktop.NetworkManager /org/freedesktop/NetworkManager org.freedesktop.NetworkManager.state
70
muelux@muelux-LT70B-T61:~$

Gruß

mue.de

Ways to get KDE software
A catalog of KDE software

KDE Manuals

https://docs.kde.org/stable5/en/applications/konqueror/index.htmlThe Konqueror Manual

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

This page is about Kubuntu from the year 2013.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

For the best result, ensure that:

  • Your computer has enough room for Kubuntu and your data - your songs, pictures, videos, and documents.
  • Your computer is connected to the Internet so that you can download updates and third-party software as Kubuntu is installing.

"Third-party software" includes software that either does not follow the Open Source model or the Ubuntu Philosophy, but is safe for use on your system.

Downloading the updates while installing will ensure that you have the latest bug and security fixes included and applied once the installation is complete.

To avoid edit conflicts, please also use {{Being_Edited}} (then save before continuing) while you work, and remove it when you have finished.


Category Translations, Language1 to Language4
English Language1 Language2 Language3 Language4
Accessibility
Admin
Advanced Users
Applications
Desktop
Development
Education
File Management
Games
Getting Started
Graphics
Hidden Categories
Home and Hobby
Internet
KDE3
Multimedia
Office
Plasma
Security
System
Template
Tutorials
Utilities

My computer boots to a Black screen

Please keep in mind that this page is just an experiment to collect the working solutions to common problems from hundreds of forum posts to a wiki-like troubleshooting page. It assumes you are running KDE Neon or another Debian based distribution. It needs to be checked by experienced users.

Has something crashed when you turned off your PC?

Have you recently updated?

Blumen wrote on Reddit: If you can see your cursor, but there is no wallpaper and panel, this means the process plasmashell crashed. Try running:

   plasmashell --replace ; kwin_x11 --replace  

tinny123 wrote:

Do you have offline updates turned off?

Then it's possible you didn't let discover finish installing updates so you have now broken packages. When you get to the black screen hit ctrl+alt+f1 and log in into terminal with your username and password. It would be good if you can connect your pc to the internet.

In terminal run these commands:

   sudo apt update  
   sudo apt dist-upgrade  
   sudo apt install -f   
Do you have python modules installed?

You can try fixing update errors with already existing python modules: remove the old version from the system installation with

   sudo pip uninstall python-<the module to uninstall>
Have you installed kernel updates lately?

You can try booting with a different kernel from the GRUB menu (Advanced options for GNU/Linux).

If you can't see your mouse:

You can try hitting ctrl+alt+f2 to a terminal then running:

   startx

It's possible that your home directory is so full it stops the GUI from loading. You can try booting from a live-USB and cleaning up some space. If you can't boot from a live-USB it's likely you have a hardware problem with your PC.

To avoid edit conflicts, please also use {{Being_Edited}} (then save before continuing) while you work, and remove it when you have finished.

Category Translations, Amharic, Arabic, Asturianu
English Amharic عربية Asturianu
Accessibility سهولة/ar
Admin مشرف/ar
Advanced Users مستخدم خبير/ar
Applications برامج/ar
Contributing مساهمة/ar
Configuration الضبط/ar
Desktop سطح المكتب/ar
Development تطوير/ar
Education تعليم/ar/
File Management إدارة الملفات/ar
Games العاب/ar
Getting Started البداية/ar
Graphics رسوم/ar
Help
Home and Hobby المنزل و الهواية/ar
Internet الشبكة العالمية/ar
KDE3 كي دي إي 3/ar KDE3/ast
KDE on Windows كي دي اي على النوافذ/ar
Mobile
Multimedia متعدد الوسائط/ar
New Users مستخدم جديد/ar
Office مكتب/ar)
Photography التصوير/ar
Plasma بلازما/ar
Privacy
Science علم/ar
Security أمن/ar
System نظام/ar
Template نموذج/ar
Terminology
Tutorials تدريب/ar
Utilities خدمات/ar
Widgets
Pages in (your_language)
(e.g.sider på dansk)

To avoid edit conflicts, please also use {{Being_Edited}} (then save before continuing) while you work, and remove it when you have finished.


Category Translations, Galego, Hebrew, Hindi
English Galego Hebrew Hindi
Accessibility Accesibilidade/gl נְגִישׁוּת
Admin Administración/gl
Advanced Users Usuarios avanzados/gl
Applications Aplicativos/gl יִשּׂוּמִים
Configuration Configuración/gl
Contributing Contribuír/gl
Desktop Escritorio/gl שולחן העבודה
Development Desenvolvemento/gl פִּתּוּחַ
Education Ensino/gl חִנּוּךְ
File Management Xestión de ficheiros/gl נִהוּל קבצים
Games Xogos/gl מִשְׂחָקים
Getting Started Primeiros pasos/gl
Graphics Imaxe/gl גְּרָפִיקָה
Help
Home & Hobby Lecer/gl
Internet Internet/gl אִינְטֶרְנֶט
KDE3 KDE 3/gl
KDE on Windows
Mobile
Multimedia Son e vídeo/gl מוּלְטִימֶדְיָה
New Users
Office Oficina/gl
Photography
Plasma Plasma/gl
Privacy
Science
Security Seguridade/gl אַבְטָחָה
System Sistema/gl מַעֲרֶכֶת
Template Modelo/gl
Terminology
Tutorials Aprendizaxes/gl
Utilities Utilidades/gl
Widgets
Pages in (your_language)
(e.g. sider på dansk)

There are 22533 pages beginning with KA-KZ

This is a template which adds a KDE 3 button and puts the article in the "KDE3" category. To use, just put {{KDE3}} where you'd like the button to appear.

This is how it will look:

This is a template which adds a KDE 4 button and puts the article in the "KDE 4" category. To use, just put {{KDE4}} where you'd like the button to appear.

This is how it will look:

  • KDE4== How to use it ==

Can you give an example. I just start using mediawiki. --Mark Ziegler 13:20, 22 September 2008 (UTC)

Sorry, forgot to put the instructions. I added it now. I'm new to it too. Just had one full week to work with it :) --Jucato
You can see an example at http://userbase.kde.org/KNewsTicker --annew 17:40, 22 September 2008 (UTC)

Please do not use this page for feature requests. Please file that at [1]. As for a directory filter for Konqueror KDE 4, that already exists. Please ask your distribution about a package for konq-plugins.

include the kword logo. http://www.koffice.org/artwork/logos

Replacing old screenshots with KWord 2.1 Beta screenshots. Can't replace the RTL screenshot, though... The madman 01:48, 26 September 2009 (UTC)

Why? Unavailability of suitable screenshot? If so, I'll ask someone to provide one for us.--annew 09:04, 26 September 2009 (UTC)
Mainly because I haven't got left-to-right languages installed on my system, and even if I did I wouldn't be able to make sense of them.The madman 15:36, 4 October 2009 (UTC)

Wiki Wednesday - This page to be moved to a historical apps section as it's now dead. Needs a banner to tell someone it's no longer active. Should be prominently linked to calligra as the replacement. Needs the links checking before this is carried out. Tutorials can be archived --Nvrwhere (talk) 16:46, 11 October 2023 (UTC)

Check image {img src="img/wiki_up/general.jpg" } (Still doesn't play videos?) Mark - is this a file you forgot to upload? --annew 08:49, 3 October 2008 (UTC)

No, yesterday I added three links. Text was added from you on 5th september. Cheers. --Mark Ziegler 11:43, 3 October 2008 (UTC)
Ah - yes from wiki.kde.org. Fortunately the page is still available, so I've grabbed the missing image and corrected it. Thanks for the pointer --annew 13:44, 3 October 2008 (UTC)
Done --ThorstenStaerk 21:37, 25 January 2009 (UTC)

By package from your distro supplier - in whatever way you usually install packages.--annew 22:00, 15 February 2009 (UTC)

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

Empty page.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.


Warning

Much of this is very old, though the principles are still relevant. Additionally, the subject here is KMail 1 - some of these answers may not be correct for KMail 2. If you are able to update these entries, please do so


KMail: Security

Daniel Naber ([email protected]), 2002-11-14

"Security is not a state, it's a process."

This information gives an overview of (possible) security issues in a certain KDE software and how these issues are addressed by the developers. The aim should be to keep this list complete (as far as it's possible) and up to date. It can also be used as a checklist when preparing releases.

  • This information is intended for all the people who are in any way involved with this software: developers, developers of libraries and components, people making packages, distributors, interested users.
  • Every issue consists of a question, an explanation and an answer which is specific to KMail.
  • Every claim about the code of the program should contain a reference in the form class::function() so it can easily be verified by others.
  • If there are known problems/bugs that haven't been solved, yes, they do belong on the list.
  • You are encouraged to expand this list. You are encouraged to define ways which help to find potential problems in large amounts of code.
  • The word BUG in an entry says that this issue really needs to be fixed.
  • Every answer needs a date saying when it has been verified the last time and by whom.
  • This is not a TODO list where items eventually disappear once they are resolved.

External links:

  • There's a program called ITS4 at http://www.cigital.com/its4/ that can be used to scan code for possible security problems. It's probably more powerful and yet easier to use than the suggested grep commands in this document. (The authors of ITS4 ask for your name and email address if you want to download the software. If you don't like that, get it at http://www.danielnaber.de/its4/).

General issues for all programs

Q How do you protect against buffer overflows?

The common buffer overflow may occur with the use of char for strings. Using QString is safe. You can check where char is used with this command:

char " *.c *.C *.cpp *.cc *.h 

With char, the use of strcpy() is often problematic. Find it with this command:

grep "strcpy" *.c *.C *.cpp *.cc *.h
grep shows there are still several (~90) occurences of char. Many of these can probably be replaced by QString. However, a test with several manipulated mails where all the common header fields had a length > 10000 showed no problems. Everything was okay with an HTML attachment that had extremely long tags and tag properties, too. (dnaber, 2002-11-13)
Q What about buffer overflows in the libraries you use?

If a library has a potential buffer overflow, an exploit would have the same impact as an exploit in the program itself.

Besides the common libraries (kde, qt, X11, ...) we use mimelib, which uses char at many places and strcpy() at two places (not counting the several strcpy() where the second argument is a constant) which seem to be okay (protocol.cpp and msgid.cpp). We also use libkdenetwork (which is also in kdenetwork). There are three occurences of strcpy(), two of which are inside comments, and the last one looks safe (in kmime_headers.cpp) (dnaber, 2002-11-14)
Q Can the program be run as root?
KMail is not supposed to be run as root. (dnaber, 2002-11-13)

Many systems prohibit the access to the root mail account via pop3 protocol.

Tip

If you want or have to read the mail of root let the mailsystem forward the mail to your user account by adding the file ~/.forward to root's home directory. The content of this file should be your email address. (Ferdinand Gassauer, 2001-03-20)


Q Do you use system() calls in a safe way?

The only vulnerability is if the string passed to system() is generated using data that comes from an email etc. OR if there is a buffer overflow or severe logic bug that allows an email to modify global variables over several passes through the execution path which eventually effects the system() call (or in the buffer overflow case, overflows a local variable and overwrites the next local variable which is used for the system() call.) Find the use of system() with this command:

egrep "system *?\(" *.c *.C *.cpp *.cc *.h
I'm planning to go through and change most of these if I can (where possible). The most dangerous system call is yet to be implemented, but it's a great feature as well and the people who will typically use such a thing will probably be someone who is at least fairly aware of the implications. I will probably put some documentation in place as a warning as well. Essentially I want to implement something like Pine's | command, where you can pipe an email to a shell command. Obviously if it does a system() call based on what's in the email it could be a problem. (George Staikos, [email protected], 2000-02-07)
The only system() calls left are the ones for file locking in kmfoldermbox.cpp (dnaber, 2002-11-14)
Q What external programs do you use?

Using external programs might become a problem if:

  • they are called with system() and user-supplied input (see above)
  • if we rely on their function without being able to check it
  • if these programs have been compromised
  • if these programs are setuid/setgid
KMail uses PGP/GnuPG to encrypt, decrypt and sign messages (code in libkdenetwork in kpgp.cpp and kpgpbase.cpp). These functions are only offered if PGP/GnuPG can be found on the system. The user can see if his message got encrypted by enabling "Show signed/encrypted text after composing". This is enabled by default. We call PGP/GnuPG with LANGUAGE=C so the output is always English. If it's not clear to PGP/GnuPG what key to use for encryption the user is offered a choice of all keys. If he doesn't choose one there's a dialog asking him whether to cancel or send the mail unencrypted. Important: Attachments are not encrypted, even if the mail is, unless crypto plugins are used.
GnuPG might be setuid in order to enable it to lock memory (in order to prevent your passphrase from being swapped out of memory).
KMail cannot check the integrity of external programs, that's beyond its scope. (dnaber, Ingo Kloecker, 2002-11-14)
Q How are saved passwords protected?

Passwords should be saved on disk only when the user explicitly says so. If the user later deactivates the function to save the password, an already saved password should disappear from the configuration files.

Passwords are saved in the KMail config file, i.e. ~/.kde/share/config/kmailrc, which has permissions 0600 when it is created, thanks to KConfig. Existing (old) configuration files get secure permissions when they are changed.
The passwords are not saved as plain text but "encrypted" with a simple scrambling algorithm - encrypting these passwords in a really secure way is impossible. Anyway, people really concerned about this should just not save their passwords on disk.
Saving passwords is off by default(kmacctexppop.cpp: mStorePasswd = FALSE and config.readNumEntry("store-passwd", FALSE)).
If you deselect the store password option, the password to that account is deleted as soon as you close the Configure Account dialog (KMAcctExpPop::writeConfig() resp. KMAcctImap::writeConfig()).
If you delete an account, the information stays in the configuration file, but the password gets removed by a hack in NetworkPage::ReceivingTab::apply().
BTW, if you want to encrypt your POP3 connection to the remote server: that's possible with ssh, the remote server just needs to run sshd, see the KMail FAQ for more information. (dnaber, 2002-11-14) (Note: this does not appear to be referring to the UserBase KMail FAQ - at this moment I can not link to the reference. Anne Wilson 2011-17-16)
Q Are temporary files used in a safe way?

One can make temporary files using KTempFile (in kdecore), which uses the secure mkstemp(). The use of mktemp() is deprecated, it's highly insecure. One should never make temp files by just open()ing them, since they could already exist and they could even be a link to something completely different. You can find some possibly incorrect uses of temp files with these commands:

grep "/tmp" *.c *.C *.cpp *.h
grep "mkstemp" *.c *.C *.cpp *.h
grep "mktmp" *.c *.C *.cpp *.h
I changed all occurences of tmp files that I found to use KTempFile. (George Staikos, [email protected]; dnaber, 2002-11-14)

Issues that are more or less KMail specific

Q What major security related features does KMail offer?
  • SSL, TLS for both POP3 and IMAP
  • Authentication: SMTP Auth, PLAIN, LOGIN, CRAM-MD5, DIGEST-MD5, APOP
  • Integration of PGP/GnuPG
  • Crypto plugins

(dnaber, 2002-11-14)

Q Can anybody view my private mail once it's on the local disk?
KMail stores all mails as plain text by default in ~/Mail. The permissions of this directory should be set to drwx------ so only you can view the contents. PGP/GnuPG encrypted mail gets decrypted every time you view it and is saved on disk as an encrypted mail again (as you got it).
If ~/Mail doesn't exist, KMail will create it with the correct permissions (KMFolderMgr::setBasePath()).
The file ~/dead.letter, which is created if KMail crashes, has correct permissions (KMComposeWin::deadLetter()). ### what about attachments, saved to disk temporary? (dnaber, 2002-11-14)
Q How do you ensure Java/Javascript and other dynamic content doesn't get executed if I don't want it?

Dynamic content should be off by default.

It's disabled in KMReaderWin::initHtmlWidget(). This is true for Java, Javascript, Plugins and the "refresh" meta tag. It's currently not even possible to turn on these features. (dnaber, 2002-11-14)
Q Is it possible to disable access to remote sites completely when (html) emails are viewed?

(i.e. for people with auto-dialin)

Yes. In the security settings you can disable loading of any external references. The default is to not load external references (see SecurityPage::GeneralTab::setup()), and to not display HTML (all places where the config key "htmlMail" is loaded) (Ingo Kloecker; dnaber 2002-11-14)
Q Can somebody set a cookie on my system by sending me an HTML mail?
Default behaviour is not to load external stuff at all (see above), so we don't need to care anymore about this. (dnaber, 2002-11-14)
Q What kind of referer and user agent information does the html widget send if remote imag(etc) are in a page?

Anybody sending you an email with remote components (images etc.) that are located on his own server can check his httpd access logs to see the date and time you read the mail. The referer (it's optional for the client to transmit it) says "where you came from".

Default behaviour is not to load external stuff at all, so we don't care anymore about a possible referer if you activate it. (dnaber, 2002-11-14)
Q How do you make sure evil attachments are not executed, except I explicitly say so?

This also includes not executing a "viewer" for some content unless the user explicitly wants it. For every attachment there should be a way to call it with a text editor to check it - even if it is associated to some viewer.

The user is asked if he wants to open the attachment. He's notified that this may be a security problem. If there's a default application for that kind of file, that application is offered. If there's none, an "Open with..." dialog is offered. The dialog also has a "Save to disk" button, which is the default one (see KMReaderWin::slotAtmOpen()) (dnaber, 2002-11-14)
Q What about the automatic return receipt?

This should be off by default, i.e. the client should not by default reply to those. If it demands return receipts in its own mails by default is not a privacy/security issue (well, at least not for the sender...).

It is off by default. Check with grep "send-receipt" *.cpp *.h, all the defaults are false. (dnaber, 2002-11-14)

Home » Applications » Education » KTurtle » DPL

Under Construction

This is a new page, currently under construction!


Some screenshots taken from KTurtle, scroll down for screenshots of older versions of KTurtle. You may also want to search for KTurtle images with google.

0.8

A fresh start of KTurtle
After a little drawing

0.7

nothing yet...

0.3

nothing yet...

  • KMess
  • KOrganizerI don't have much to say other than the fact that this is an excellent program, and that the developers' efforts are much appreciated. Thanks.
  • KNotesCtrl+c is not adding an entry to Klipper. Any resolution?
(Not sure why this is under KNotes?) You haven't said which distro or given any package version numbers, which might have helped. Could be related to https://bugs.kde.org/show_bug.cgi?id=166606 - and it applied to both Ctrl-c and mouse selection. It was a qt bug that was resolved in qt-4.5, I believe.--annew 18:14, 13 August 2009 (UTC)

Information

It has been given a temporary category of Admin, which makes it available for edit, but hidden to ordinary users, to avoid confusion


This page provides access to a number of KDE web pages in different languages, countries or regional areas.

These pages also are not necessarily involved in the KDE translation or localization efforts. Please see the l10n.kde.org website for more information on this topic.

Europe & Middle East

  • [Czech Republic Flag] Czech Republic (outdated)
  • [France Flag] France
  • [Germany Flag] Germany
  • [Great Britain Flag] Great Britain (outdated)
  • [Iceland Flag] Iceland (outdated - site seems to have been taken over by someone else)
  • [Iran Flag] Iran (does this page still exist?)
  • [Ireland Flag] Ireland (outdated)
  • [Israel Flag] Israel (outdated)
  • [Italy Flag] Italy
  • [Netherlands Flag] Netherlands (outdated)
  • [Poland Flag] Poland (blank page just linking to a blog)
  • [Romania Flag] Romania (looking for help)
  • [Russia Flag] Russia
  • [Spain Flag] Spain kdehispano.org
  • [Turkey Flag] Turkey (outdated - doesn't seem to have any KDE related content)
  • [Ukraine Flag] Ukraine (outdated)
  • [Yugoslavia Flag] Yugoslavia (outdated)

Asia

  • [China Flag] China
  • [Japan Flag] Japan (outdated)
  • [Korea Flag] Korea (outdated)
  • [Taiwan Flag] Taiwan (outdated)

America

  • [Argentina Flag] Argentina
  • [Brasil Flag] Brasil
  • [Chile Flag] Chile (as good as nothing)
  • kdehispano.org (has been taken over by a commercial site)
  • KTouch
  • KOffice/Tutorials/Artistic Text ShapeThis page mentions a Freehand Path Drawing Tool. However, KWord does not seem to have such a tool (as of version 2.0.2). Is it a feature of a previous version, that has yet to be implemented for KDE 4? Users are bound to be confused and frustrated if they try to follow this tutorial. Unless someone modifies it I think it is best to discard it, or at least alert users that this tutorial is relevant for older versions of KOffice only. --Claus chr October 12 2009
I just discovered that my remarks above are unfounded. The tutorial can be followed in Karbon14, and when I copied the combined path and artistic test shape and then pasted it into KWord, the freehand tool magically appeared in the tool box. It seem, that it remains availlable the next time KWord is started. I have not been able to find a way to activate the freehand tool from within KWord, though. I feel that we need an explanation in the tutorial. Does anyone know of a simple way to activate the freehand tool? --Claus chr October 12 2009
  • KMLDonkeyWhy was the language template moved to the bottom of the page? All other userbase pages has it at the top. From an aesthetic point of view I can see why you would want to move it out of the way, but it is not practical: Unless you have a fairly tall screen, a navigation bar at the bottom of the page is likely to be out of sight when you enter the page, so readers would think that no translations exist. --Claus chr October 14 2009
Gmazzurco: Please try to keep the default layout. We are trying to migrate pages that use other layouts to the default one, for consistency. I'm going to keep your content, but change the layout backto default. --annew 12:12, 14 October 2009 (UTC)
It's now 72 hours since I mailed Petter E. Stokke, and it's still not delivered. I'm going to remove the link--annew 16:59, 17 October 2009 (UTC)

This page lists all the pages that are concerned with KDE3 applications

I have removed mention of KDE3 from some pages:

  • Dolphin - refered to an unmaintained fork for KDE3
  • KCron - no KDE3 specific info other than how to start it
  • Kcontrol, Kerry and Kugar have been moved to Archive
  • KDirStatAccording to [2], it is planned to create a version of this tool which does not depend on KDE.
Moved from main page. Such a tool would obviously not be KDirStat, so is out of place in a page dedicated to the application. --annew 11:23, 11 December 2009 (UTC)

+1 to archive Claus chr (talk) 09:53, 26 February 2024 (UTC)


Many KOffice applications support the filter architecture (i.e.: they are able to use filters for file conversion.) The filters are not perfect and some not even done. The status of the current filters is listed below, sorted per application.

Note: this document is about the KOffice 1.6 branch.

Generic (for all KOffice applications)

From/To Notes Import Export
XSLT * **

KWord

From/To Notes Import Export
AbiWord *** ***
AmiPro Lotus word processor *** ***
Applix Word ** -
DocBook SGML DocBook only -  ?
HTML HTML 4.01 / XHTML 1.0 * ***
LaTeX * **
MS Write *** ***
OpenOffice.org Writer *** **
PDF Portable Document Format *** Yes PDF export (see below)
Palmdoc Palm documents ***** *****
Plain text ***** *****
RTF Rich Text Format *** ***
StarWriter

Contacts: Ariya Hidayat,

Marco Zanon
* -
WML Wireless markup language *** ***
WordPerfect WP 5.x and WP 6/7/8 documents, text only *** **

KSpread

From/To Notes Import Export
Applix Spreadsheet ** -
CSV Comma Separated Values ***** *****
Gnumeric Part of GNOME Office *** **
HTML - **
LaTeX - *
OpenOffice.org Calc Contact: nandres ** *
Quattro Pro ** -
dBase dBase 3 only ** -

KPresenter

From/To Notes Import Export
KWord - *****
Magicpoint Contact: Lukas Tinkl **** -
OpenOffice.org Impress **** **

Karbon 14

From/To Notes Import Export
Adobe Illustrator * -
Applix Graphics + -
EPS Encapsulated PostScript * *
Kontour * -
LaTeX - +
MSOD Microsoft Office Drawing * -
OpenOffice.org Draw * -
PNG - *
SVG Scalable Vector Graphics (W3C) *** **
WMF Windows MetaFile * *
Xfig + -

Krita

Krita can use ImageMagick for importing and exporting images. This means that, in addition to the file formats listed below, Krita can work with all images that your installation of ImageMagick supports. This includes all common image file formats, including the native formats of Photoshop and the Gimp.

More information on file formats supported by ImageMagick.

From/To Notes Import Export
Gimp (XCF) Native file format of the Gimp + +
JPEG **** ****
OpenEXR OpenEXR is a high dynamic-range (HDR) format developed by Industrial Light & Magic **** ****
PDF Portable Document Format *** Yes (see below)
PNG Portable Network Graphics **** ****
RAW * -
TIFF *****


KChart

From/To Notes Import Export
PNG Portable Network Graphics (most graphics programs) - ****
SVG Scalable Vector Graphics (W3C) - ****
Text Text file (e.g. CSV or tab-delimited) **** -


Kexi

From/To Notes Import Export
Microsoft Access (MDB) Available as a separate plugin *** -
Text Text file (e.g. CSV or tab-delimited) *** ****


Key

***** -- The filter is stable and works well.
**** -- The filter generally works well.
*** -- The filter generally works well, however some features might be missing or might not work correctly yet.
** -- The filter generally works although it is not finished, and it may suffer from some instability.
* -- Work has begun on the filter although the code is still at an early stage of development, and does not work properly.
-- An author has volunteered to work on the filter, although the code does not actually exist yet, or is at a very early stage of development.
? -- The status of this filter is unknown, as its development has been abandoned.


PDF Export

All KOffice applications can export (create) PDF files. The process for exporting to PDF is the same as in most other KDE applications:

  • Select File->Print from the menu;
  • In the Printer Name box, choose the Print to File (PDF) option (illustrated below);
  • Enter a file name in the Output File box (or use the button on the right of the Output File field for a standard file window;
  • Click Print.

Joining the developers

There are many filters that we would like and many filters that need improvement, although sadly we do not have enough developers working on KOffice.

Would you like to join the development team and help us?

Please contact us if you are interested in helping.

  • KNewsTickerThis page is a bit confusing. I first thought that a KNewsTicker Plasmoid is indeed available for SC 4, and that some other version has been abandoned. After careful rereading combined with the fact that I can't find the Plasmoid in my distro (openSUSE 11.2), I now believe that the plasmoid has been dropped.

If KNewsTicker has been dropped altogether, I think we should state this very clearly in the opening sentence and probably drop the mention of the aborted porting effort, as this is only going to confuse.

Alternatively, we could make this page about the version for KDE3 if it makes sense to still use that. Or we could consider removing the page completely. Claus chr 09:50, 31 December 2009 (UTC)

The confusion arose because, at the time that the page was started, a KDE SC4 port had been started. Then, some time later, I spoke to the developer, who confirmed that he was no longer working on it, and there would be no release. The problem is that the only image I have clearly shows that it is a SC 4 desktop, so I can't just drop all mention of 4 without causing even more confusion. I've done an edit that I hope will be a bit clearer, but, as always, feel free to edit again if you can think of a better way of making the situation clear. --annew 13:35, 31 December 2009 (UTC)

+1 delete/archive. It seems unlikely that the translations would be useful. Claus chr (talk) 10:06, 14 September 2023 (UTC)

Wiki Wednesday - agree delete --Nvrwhere (talk) 16:33, 11 October 2023 (UTC)
It's still in several current distros, so for the moment I think we keep it. I think when this happens we must make sure that we use the work 'deprecated' in the Talk page, to give us something we can search on from time to time. --annew 14:17, 22 January 2010 (UTC)

+1 to archive Claus chr (talk) 09:44, 26 February 2024 (UTC)

Probably. I'll put it on my to-do list, thanks. --annew 14:31, 21 February 2010 (UTC)

Please see entry on bullet-pointed lists in Talk:Dolphin (last two paragraphs). --Claus chr 15:01, 28 June 2010 (CEST)

Wiki Wednesday - leave for now the whole sub-tree needs to be checked before any further action --Nvrwhere (talk) 16:32, 11 October 2023 (UTC)

  • KTTSIn kde-4.4, kttsd does not work. When I open system settings, it shows only 3 tabs and the line that says that kttsd is not running.

I tick the box to start it, but the apply button never alights to accept the change. I run it from the command line instead, but nothing happens.

I have also run kttsmngr and it docks into the system tray, but since kttsd is not running/never runs, it cannot do anything, which can be seen when one clicks configure here.

When I open system settings and try to select a talker, none are shown, although I have festival and a number of voices installed. Both festival and espeak work fine from the command line, but in kdeaccessibility, nothing works.

I should say that a number of other users have also reported this problem and the identical symptoms. We are all using fedora kde-4.4.

KTTS and KDE SC 4.4

Just posted a message on fedora's maillist, but it seems that you already have voices installed which I thought was the issue for you. I reinstalled KTTS on KDE SC 4.4 (I'm using Chakra kdemod 4.4) and it worked as it had before in KDE SC 4.3. All of the tabs are still there and it is the same as in the screenshots with KDE SC 4.3. I'm not sure what is wrong for you, but it is most likely a fedora related issue. Have you attempted to build it from source?

..

No, of course I haven't attempted to build it from source. I use the rpms provided by fedora.

You mention that it had worked in 4.3, but it hadn't been working in fedora since about 2 years ago. I have filed a number of bug reports, including one on bugs.kde.org (then, it was crashing when one tried to start it; now, it no longer crashes, but kttsd cannot be started and no voices can ever be selected, as the installed voices do not appear in the list), but it still doesn't work.

The last time kttsd worked was in kde-3.5. It has never worked in any version of kde-4.

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.


Revision 1.5 (2006-04-23)

Copyright © 2000-2006 Michael McBride

Copyright © 2006 Gary Cramblitt

Legal Notice

KWord is a complete word-processing and simple desktop publishing program. It is part of the KOffice suite of utilities.

This manual describes KWord 1.5.

Introduction

Introducing KWord
What parts of this guide should I read?

Fundamentals

Starting KWord
Introduction to Templates
The difference between Text Oriented and Page Layout templates

Step by Step Tutorial

Choosing the initial template
Selecting a frame and entering text into that frame
Changing the size of a frame
Moving a frame on the page and layering frames
Adding a new frame and Making text flow between two frames
Deleting a frame
Tutorial Summary

The KWord Window

Overview
Using Rulers

Detailed Guides

Beginning a New Document
Saving a Document
Retrieving a Saved Document
Printing A Document
Editing your Document
Using Multiple Views
Undo and Redo
Cut, Copy, Paste and the Clipboard
Finding and Replacing Text
Spellchecking
Finding a related word (Thesaurus)
Autocorrection
Autocompletion

Document Layout Guides

Formatting the Page
Working with Frames
Setting the Properties for a Frame
Formatting Paragraphs
Using Tab Stops
Formatting Characters
Text styles
Columns
Lists
Headers and Footers
Creating Templates, Saving a document as a template and Deleting Templates

More than Just Text

Entering Document information
Handling Graphics
Table of Contents
Document Variables
Expressions
Document Links
Document Comments
Footnotes and Endnotes
KOffice Data Integration
Inserting files
Document bookmarks
Formulae

For Users with Disabilities

Installing the kdeaccessibility Module
Visual Impairments
Motor Impairments and Mouseless Operation

Advanced Topics

Document Structure
Mail Merge

How do I...]

How do I get the pages numbers on the outsides of the pages and the title in the middle of the header (like a novel)?
How do I create a .pdf file?
How do I remove template categories from the startup dialog

The Menu Items/Toolbars

Introduction to the Menubar and Toolbars
Hiding, Changing, and Moving Toolbars
The Menubar
The File Toolbar
The Format ToolBar
The Insert Toolbar
The Edit Toolbar
The Paragraph Toolbar
The Border Toolbar

Working with Color

Selecting Colors from a Select Color dialog

Working with Files

Selecting files using the file dialog

Set up KWord Options

Configure Key Bindings (keyboard shortcuts)
Configure Toolbars
Configure KWord User Interface
Questions and Answers

Legal

Credits and Licenses

Appendix A

How to obtain KWord
Requirements
Compile and Install from Source

Appendix B

Command Line Options
Import and Export Filters
Filters included in KWord

Appendix D

Key Bindings Summary
Kword MIME types
Glossary
Next
Introducing KWord

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Introduction

KWord, is a full featured WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) Word-processor/Desktop Publishing Program.

KWord is part of the KOffice productivity suite for the K Desktop Environment. Other applications in KOffice include:

KSpread (A spreadsheet application.)
KPresenter (A presentation creator.)
Karbon14 (A vector drawing program.)
Kivio (A flowchart creator)
Krita (A pixel based drawing program.)
Kugar (A report generation tool.)
Kexi (An integrated environment for databases.)
KChart (A chart and graph creator.)
KPlato (An integrated project management and planning tool.)
and a simple integrated office desktop, to help organize your work.

All KOffice applications were designed from the beginning to take advantage of the features of KDE. Because of this, KWord (like all of KOffice), supports many advanced features you expect from todays desktop environment.

KWord is a word-processor which can work either as a traditional word processor, or as a simple but powerful desktop publishing application. This is possible because KWord is a frame oriented word processor, not a page oriented word processor (Microsoft® Word,WordPerfect® and Applixware are all page oriented word processors).

Frame oriented word processors work by creating one or more frames per page. Each frame acts as a boundary (like a frame which surrounds a photograph), which limits the text to the boundaries of the frame. You can move and re-size boundaries to define exactly where on the page the text will be placed. As you re-size frames, the text is reworked to fit within these frames.

You can easily connect one frame to the next. When you connect two frames, any text which does not fit within the first frame, flows easily and automatically into the next.

In addition to text, you can include virtually anything inside a frame. A frame can contain a spreadsheet, pictures, a database form, or nearly any piece of data. Since each page can have any number of frames, documents can appear quite sophisticated while still remaining easy to edit.

KWord users also benefit from the auto wrap features of KWord. When you place one frame on top of part of another frame, the text from the lowest frame can be automatically wrapped around the newly created frame. This reformatting occurs in a WYSIWYG Graphical User Interface, and happens automatically while you edit.

As a word-processor, KWord includes the most used options of many other word processors, while maintaining a simple interface. In addition to the features you expect from a modern word-processing package (text entry, bold face, italics, text alignment, text printing, etc.), KWord can:

  • Use predefined templates, to generate complex document layout with one click of the mouse. As a user, you can build your own templates, download templates from the web, or use the current document to create a new template.
  • KWord provides automatic numbering of lists and automatic bulleting of lists with any character or shape you want.
  • Define paragraph layout styles, frame layout styles and table layout styles, to shorten the editing time of your document, and ensure consistency throughout a long document.
  • Edit headers and footers for your documents. You can have different headers for even and odd pages, or the same headers throughout.
  • Search through your document for text. You can further refine your search by specifying font, format, font size and many other features of the text. By adding wild-cards to your search, the search and replace functions can become very powerful.
  • Footnotes and Endnotes. KWord has all the tools necessary to manage footnotes or endnotes.
  • KWord has built in support for KParts. KParts allows you to insert any spreadsheet, picture, chart, graph, document, or any other data type from any KOffice application. You are free to edit that KPart using the tools designed for that task, without needing to start the application at all.
  • KWord can zoom in or out to make the editing of your documents easier on any computer, and with any font size.
  • KWord supports customizable toolbars and menus.
  • KWord has extensive internationalization support including right-to-left and left-to-right text flow.
  • You can embed formulas directly into KWord using the integrated formula editor.
  • You can have KWord auto-correct many of the most common spelling and punctuation mistakes.
  • KWord can check the spelling of your document. KWord can automatically mark misspelled words as you type.
  • You can access an on-line thesaurus (English only) to find the exact word you are looking for.
  • KWord can automatically create a table of contents, and keep it up to date.
  • KWord has optional autocompletion for commonly used words.
  • KWord has support for document bookmarks, to easily navigate large documents..
  • KWord has support for Internet hyperlinks and email addresses.
  • KWord has the ability for proofreaders to make comments about portions of the text. These comments are stored in the KWord file, and can be changed or deleted easily.
  • KWord can merge data from an outside database, spreadsheet, document or text file to create mailinglists, form letters, invoices, etc.
  • KWord can load and save documents from other wordprocessing programs with an extensive list of filters.
  • KWord can create PDF files.
  • You can edit one document from multiple views. This allows you to have several windows open on one document. Edits in one window are immediately updated in the other window.
  • KWord can surround your frames with borders and you can set the background color of each frame separately if you want.
  • KWord has several accessibility features, including the ability to speak all or part of a document using Text-to-Speech (KTTS) and manipulate documents using the keyboard only.
  • The best part about KWord, is the effort that has been placed to make KWord a productive tool for all your needs from the simplest letter, to the most complex document you might need to work on.
Prev Next
What parts of this guide should I read?

Anyone who has looked at the table of contents has surely come to the conclusion that reading this manual from cover to cover, is an unreasonable (and fortunately unnecessary) task.

This user guide is designed to be helpful to a wide variety of users, from the very experienced, to the novice user. Since different users will have different needs, each section of this manual is self-contained. The user is not expected to have read all of the previous sections of the manual to find the instructions useful.

To help determine what should be read before starting to work with KWord, a suggested reading list for three levels of users is given below.

If each of these sections is read before starting to use KWord, using KWord will be easier.

Experience Level Previous Experience What you should read
Novice No previous computer experience Fundamentals

Step by Step Tutorial

The KWord Screen

Document Storage and Printing

Editing Your Document

Introduction to Menu Bars and Toolbars

The difference between Text Oriented and Page Layout templates

Intermediate Comfortable with other page based word processors (Microsoft® Word, Word Perfect or Applixware.) Fundamentals

Step by Step Tutorial

The difference between Text Oriented and Page Layout templates

Advanced User Comfortable with other frames based word processors (Frame Maker, etc.). The difference between Text Oriented and Page Layout templates

These sections will help with the basic information. As other specific questions or situations arise, the other sections of this manual can be used as a reference.

Obviously this will not cover everyone's needs. Please use it as a guide to help determine which parts of the manual will be helpful to read before you begin using KWord.

Prev Contents Next
Introducing KWord Starting KWord

Mike McBride

KWord can be started one of four ways:

1. You can select KWord through the system menus, under: K-Button->Office->KWord.
2. If you are in a terminal program (Konsole, Xterm, etc.), you can type:
$ kword &

Or

$ kword filename &


3. Using Konqueror, you can click on your data file (KWord documents end in .kwd). This will automatically start KWord and begin editing the file.
4. Using the KOffice Workspace.
Prev Contents Next
What parts of this guide should I read? Introduction to Templates

OK, so the first question a new user may have is:

Why do I need to use a frames based word processor, when I am perfectly happy writing my letters on my current (page layout) word processor?

Well the good news is, adjusting to a frames based word processor is easy and once a template is selected, KWord can act just like a page layout word processor. There are templates available for simple correspondence and day to day use.

When a more complex document (newsletters, posters, etc.) needs to be created, you will not need to switch to a different application to generate these special documents. There are templates in KWord which will help generate newsletters or other more complicated documents.

What are templates and what can they do for the user?

A template can be thought of as an initial mold for a document.

When a user sits down to write a document, they already have an idea of what the final product will look like. If they are writing a letter to a business, a document with only one column, which goes all the way across the page, and from top to bottom of the page is appropriate. When a user sits down to author a newsletter for a local organization, however, they may want a large title across the top, and several columns for quick news articles.

With KWord, this predetermined notion of how the document should look is used to select a template. By using a template, a set of frames is created to approximate this final layout. For a business letter, a document with one large frame that covers the page from top to bottom and side to side would be selected. For a newsletter, however, a two or three column document is more appropriate. Once this template is selected, KWord will create the frames automatically.

What if the user decides to change the layout after a template is selected?

This is not a problem. If a document begins as a single column document and it is decided later that two columns is better, another column can be added. The purpose of templates is not to limit the ability to change the layout of a document, but rather to take some of the work load off the user whenever possible. Choosing the correct template when beginning a document will simplify the formatting (as opposed to always selecting the default template and making changes later). Choosing the wrong template will not limit the flexibility of the document later on.

The next section, consists of one more important topic which you should understand before we begin using KWord.

Prev Contents Next
Starting KWord The difference between Text Oriented and Page Layout templates

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

The difference between Text Oriented and Page Layout templates

It is vital that the difference between Text Oriented and Page Layout templates is clear in your mind.

Text Oriented

The Text Oriented templates are designed to act like page-oriented word processors. When you select a Text Oriented template, you will create a template with one or more frames. The first frame is distinctly tied to the paper size of your document. When you increase or decrease the paper size or change the margins, the frame size is automatically adjusted. You are not able to move this frame around on the page and you cannot delete this frame. If you need to adjust the size or position of this frame, you must adjust the margins. On top of the first frame, you can, of course, add additional frames. These frames can contain pictures, text or whatever you want. These new frames can be moved, re-sized and deleted to suit your needs. If you want it, KWord will even wrap the text from the first frame around any information in any subsequent frames.

Page Layout

These templates are designed for desktop publishing. When you select a template from this class, all of the frames are created equal. This is where the difference between Page Layout and Text Oriented template lies. None of the frames in a Page Layout template are tied to the page as tightly as the main frame in a Text Oriented template is. Each of the frames is independent of the page size, and can be moved or re-sized without changing margins, etc. Of course this also means that altering the margins or paper size of your document requires that you individually move/resize each frame.
Note
In addition to not having a main text frame, Page Layout documents cannot use the automatic headers or footers (though these can be added in as frames). Additionally, footnotes must be managed by hand while in Page Layout Mode.

As you can see, the choice between Page Layout and Text Oriented templates is a choice between flexibility (Page Layout) and convenience (Text Oriented). You can create any document you like with either type of template.

If the concept of templates is still unclear, please follow along with the following tutorial. The first document you create will use a Page Layout template. This should help clarify exactly how templates function.

Prev Contents Next
Introduction to Templates Choosing an Initial Template

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Tutorial: Choosing the initial template

This section is a step by step walk through of the most important functions needed to understand how to create and manipulate a complex document. This tutorial will generate the start of a newsletter as an example document.

It is recommend that you go through the tutorial in order at least once if you are new to frame based word processors.

Note
The steps to this tutorial are numbered from 1 to 23. Beneath each step, is text in italics which further elaborates or explains the changes.

When you first start KWord (or start a new document after KWord is running), KWord asks for a document template.

Here you can either:

  • Select the initial template for your new document.
  • Open a KWord document saved to your hard drive or network.

Step 1: Click on Page Layout.

This will list the Page Layout templates available on your system. For information on the differences between Page Layout and Text Oriented templates, see the section entitled The difference between Text Oriented and Page Layout templates.

This is the template we will use for the tutorial.

Step 2: Now select the Simple Layout icon by clicking once with the left button of your mouse.


Step 3: Now confirm your selection by clicking on Use This Template.


To complete your selection.

KWord will open a new document with three frames. The frames are outlined on the white background, as gray boxes. Each box is a separate frame.

Prev Contents Next
The difference between Text Oriented and Page Layout templates Selecting a frame and entering text into that frame

To begin entering text (or adding any sort of data for that matter) into a document, its important to let KWord know which frame to put the data in.

Note


In order to keep both editing and formatting of your document efficient and simple, the command executed with a mouse click changes depending on where in the KWord window the pointer is located.
When the pointer is located over toolbars, scrollbars, menu buttons or other areas outside the document, the pointer is an arrow. You should already be familiar with this type of pointer when using other KDE programs.
When inside the document, there are two separate pointers which alternate automatically based on how close to a frame edge the pointer is currently located.
When the mouse pointer is near the edge of a frame, the pointer will change into two intersecting lines with arrows on all four points. Clicking the left mouse button now will select the nearest frame.
As you move the pointer away from the edge of the frame, the pointer will change into the text entry pointer. Clicking the left mouse button at this time will tell KWord to insert text into this frame.

Step 4: Place the mouse pointer over the upper-left frame. Make sure you do not see the frame select pointer

Step 5: Click once with the left mouse button.

This tells KWord to insert text into this frame. Click in the upper left corner of the frame to position the cursor in the upper left corner of the frame.

Step 6: Enter the following text using the keyboard: KWord Press Release.

This is some sample text for our newsletter.

Step 7: Select KWord Press Release by placing the mouse cursor on the right end of the text. Click once with the left mouse button and drag the mouse cursor to the left. Selected text will be white text on a colored background. When all the text has been selected, release the left mouse button.

This defines what text is going to be altered with Step 8.

Step 8: Click inside the Text Size combo box. Change this number to 26.

This changes the size of the selected text to one more appropriate for a title.

Prev Contents Next
Selecting a frame and entering text into that frame Changing the size of a frame

Now that we have entered some text, we can see that the frame should extend across the entire width of the page for a title. We need to change the size and shape of the frame.

Step 9: Place the mouse pointer over the frame border (you will notice the cursor changes to two intersecting lines with arrows), and click once with the left mouse button.

This will select this frame, so it can be re-shaped.

You will now notice the frame is outlined in black, with 8 squares on the outline. These squares are used for re-sizing the frame.

Step 10: Place the mouse pointer over the square in the lower right corner of the frame. Click with the left mouse button and hold it down. Drag the mouse up and to the right.

Notice how the frame changes shape. Adjust the size and shape of the frame until it looks similar to the example below:

When it does, release the mouse button.

Prev Contents Next
Selecting a frame and entering text into that frame Moving a frame on the page and layering frames

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Tutorial: Moving a frame on the page and layering frames

Now that we have created a title block, we will center it at the top of the page.

Step 11: Place the mouse pointer over the border of the frame (but not on any of the squares).

The pointer will now change to a 4 way arrow. This indicates KWord is ready to move the frame on the page.

Step 12: Click and hold with the left mouse button. Drag the mouse, and the frame will follow it. Position the frame in the center of the page near the top. When you are satisfied with its final location, release the mouse button.

Notice how the right side of the title block has slid behind the empty frame on the right. This is easily corrected.

Step 13: Select Frames->Bring to Front.

This will place the title on top of the other frame. You can raise and lower frames to give you the look you need.

Prev Contents Next
Changing the size of a frame Adding a new frame and Making text flow between two frames

Now we will add a new text frame to our document for our first article.

Step 14: Begin by selecting Insert->Text Frame from the menubar.

The pointer has changed to cross-hairs. You can draw your new text box with this cursor. Start by placing the pointer at one corner. Click and hold the left mouse button. Drag the mouse diagonally. An outline will appear which represents your new text frame. When you have a text frame of reasonable size, release the left mouse button.

It is not important if your text box does not resemble the example for the purposes of this tutorial.

When you release the left mouse button, a new dialog box appears.

This dialog box lists all the current frame sets and has a radio button to create a new frame set (default value). By selecting the default value, you will create a new frame set (text will not flow from any other frame into this frame).

Notice that the default name for this frameset is Text Frameset 3

Step 15: For the purposes of this tutorial, the default value of Create a new frameset is good. Simply select OK.

Now you can see your new frame has been created. It is called Text Frameset 3

Now we are going to create another small frame right next to this one.

Step 16: Select Insert->Text Frame.


Again using the crosshair pointer, draw another small frame near the first one.

A dialog box will appear.

Step 17: Select Text Frameset 3 by clicking with the left mouse button.

Step 18: Select OK.

What you have just done, is connect this new textframe, to the last frame you created. To test this:

Step 19: Click once inside the leftmost frame with the left mouse button.

Step 20: Begin typing. You will need to type quite a bit, but keep typing. When you run out of space in the text frame, you will see your new text is moved immediately into your new text frame.

Prev Contents Next
Moving a frame on the page and layering frames Deleting a Frame

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Tutorial: Deleting a frame

Now we will delete an unneeded frame. We will delete the long text frame on the right side of the page.

Step 21: Place the mouse pointer over the frame border of the right hand text frame (Remember: watch for the pointer to change), and click with the left mouse button.

This selects the frame.

Step 22: Select Frames->Delete Frame.

A small dialog box appears, checking that you really intended to delete this frame.

Step 23: Select Delete.

This deletes the frame.

Prev Contents Next
Adding a new frame and Making text flow between two frames Tutorial Summary

Hopefully this tutorial has introduced you to the most basic tasks in KWord.

At this point, you have :

  • Started a new document using a template
  • Added text to a frame.
  • Resized text.
  • Created, moved, resized and deleted frames.

The purpose of this tutorial was not to explore every aspect of KWord, but to introduce you to the bare essentials. Hopefully you understand the basic manipulation of frames. From this point, you can refer to the specific sections of the manual for help, tips and advanced features of KWord.

Prev Contents Next
Deleting a Frame Window Overview

The KWord Window

Mike McBride

Overview

KWord, like most GUI based programs, divides the window up into several areas. Each area of the window is used to perform a group of similar features. When you examine the KWord window, it is divided into 5 major areas:

1. The KDE Titlebar (which remains at the top of all programs run under KDE).
2. The Menubar.
3. An assortment of Toolbars.
4. The Document Structure Area.
5. The Document Area, including the rulers and scrollbars.
6. The Status bar.

The KDE Titlebar

The KDE titlebar sits on top of all applications run under KDE. For more information on the titlebar, please see the KDE User Guide.

The Menubar

The menubar provides access to all of KWord's functions and options. Each part of the KWord menubar is detailed in the section entitled: The Menubar.

The Toolbars

The toolbars provide shortcuts to commonly used functions. KWord uses 8 toolbars, with similar functions grouped together.

Document Structure Area

The Document Structure area places individual types of data into useful groups (pictures, tables, text, etc) to help you find the correct data in a complicated document. For more information, see the section on Document Structure.

The Statusbar

The status bar provides important information during the editing of your document. In the lower left corner, KWord gives you the current page number and the total number of pages. There will be helpful text shown in the status bar whenever you hold the mouse over a menu item.
The status bar can be toggled on and off. See the section on Configure KWord User Interface.

The Document Area

The document area consists of:
  • Horizontal and Vertical Rulers - The rulers can be used to help you layout your document. For more information on rulers, see Using Rulers.
  • Scrollbars - The scrollbars are used to move through a KWord document quickly. The KWord scrollbars functions similar to all scrollbars in KDE or Windows®.
The scrollbars can be toggled on and off. See the section on Configure KWord User Interface.
  • Tab Selector - This is used to select and place tab stops in your document for easy formatting. For more information on tab stops, see the section entitled Using Tab Stops.
  • Document View - This is the area of the screen which is used to enter text. It shows you the current status of your document, and allows you to adjust frames, select text, and cut and paste text.
Prev Contents Next
Tutorial Summary Using Rulers

Along the top and left edges of the document area, are a horizontal and a vertical ruler.

These rulers measure from the top left corner of the page.

Each ruler has a bright area surrounded by a dark area. The bright area shows the size and location of the currently edited frame on that page. As you change frames, the bright area changes to reflect the new frame's settings.

The ruler can measure the page in many common units of measure including:

  • Millimeters (mm)
  • Points (pt)
  • Inches (in)
  • Centimeters (cm)
  • Decimeters (dm)
  • Pica (pi)
  • Didot (dd)
  • Cicero (cc)


To change the units of the ruler, place the mouse cursor over one of the rulers (either one), and click with the right mouse button.

Select the units you want to use from the popup menu. You will notice both rulers change to the new unit of measure.

You may also notice two vertical arrows (one pointed up, the other pointed down), on the left side of the bright area of the horizontal ruler. These are used to adjust the margin of a paragraph. For more information, see the section entitled Formatting Paragraphs.

Finally, you may see some black marks, which are not part of the ruler. They may appear as L shaped, a Reverse-L, an Upside-down T, or an Upside-down T with a dot in it. These are locations of tab stops. For more information see the section entitled Using Tab Stops.

Tip
To quickly format the page layout, you can right mouse click on either ruler. A small sub menu will appear. Simply select Page Layout..., and the Page Layout Dialog box will appear.
Note


If you don't want the rulers in your document area, they can be switched off.
Simply select View->Hide Rulers from the menubar. This will remove the rulers from the document area. Simply select View->Show Rulers to display the rulers again.
Prev Contents Next
Window Overview Beginning a New Document

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.


Detailed Guides: Document Creation, Storage, and Printing

Mike McBride

This section of the documentation will cover everything you need to know about starting a new document, saving a document, retrieving a saved document and printing a document.

Beginning a New Document

Starting a new document can be done 5 ways:

  • You can start KWord from the KDE Panel.
  • You can start KWord from the command line by typing

$ kword &

  • You can begin a new document in KWord by selecting File->New from the menubar.
  • You can use the keyboard shortcut: Ctrl+N
  • or by clicking on the toolbar.

However you begin a new document, a dialog box appears:

This dialog box allows you to:

KWord remembers your previous choice. That previous choice will be the current default option.

Starting a new document from a template

In order to start a new document based on a template, you must first choose which template you want to use.

1. Use the icons located along the left edge of the dialog box to select your template group. Simply click with the left mouse button to select that group and display all the available templates of that group.
Note
Remember templates are either Text Oriented (Blank Document) or Page Layout templates. If you need to review the differences, click here.
Once you have selected the icon, you are shown all the available templates, each with a title and a small icon which shows you the general layout of the template.
Tip
KWord comes with four standard template groups. You can add new icons by installing outside templates, or creating templates of your own.
2. To select your template, click on it with the left mouse button. The selected template will be highlighted.
3. Confirm your choice by clicking the Use This Template button. This will begin a new document with that template.
Tip
For faster access to a template, simply double click on the template, and KWord will immediately load that template.

Opening an existing document

Click on the Open Existing Document... button, and an new dialog box is revealed. For more details on this dialog box refer to Using the file selection dialog.

Open a Recent Document

KWord keeps track of the most recently edited documents. You can select one of these documents by clicking on the icon labeled Recent Documents. This will list the most recently edited files on the system. Simply click on the icon of the desired file with the left mouse button and click Open This Document.

Prev Contents Next
Using Rulers Saving a Document

Saving a Document

Once you have entered text and data into a document, you will usually want to save this to a file on your hard drive.

Tip
KWord can create a .pdf file for you. For instructions see How do I create a .pdf file?

The Save Command

The Save command can be invoked 3 ways:

  • By selecting File->Save from the Menubar
  • You can use the keyboard shortcut: Ctrl+S
  • or by clicking on the toolbar.

Any of these methods results in the same action by KWord.

Important
By selecting the Save command, you are instructing KWord to save the file under the current filename. You will not be given the option to change the filename or its location. If you want to change the name of the file, or where it is saved, you must select File->Save As... from the Menubar.

If you have not saved this file before, it does not have a filename. KWord automatically executes the Save As... command so you can provide a file name.

KWord does not report a successful save. Therefore, if the file was saved without incident, KWord will return you to editing your document.

You can verify that the file was saved, by checking the titlebar. If there are unsaved changes, the titlebar will have [modified] in the titlebar.

If the save was successful, only the filename will be in the titlebar. If there is a problem with the save, an error box will appear.

The Save As... Command

General

The Save As... command can be invoked 2 ways:

  • By selecting File->Save As... from the Menubar
  • or by trying to Save a file which does not yet have a filename.
Important
The difference between the Save and the Save As... command, is the Save As... command prompts you for a filename, and lets you select a different file format or location. The Save command simply saves the file in the previous location.

Using the dialog box

When you select Save As... a dialog appears.

For more information on using this dialog, see the section entitled Using the file selection dialog.

When you are in the folder you want to save the file in, type a filename into the Location: box.

Tip
KWord can create a .pdf file for you. For instructions see [[Kword/Manual/pdf|How do I create a .pdf file?
Tip
There is no need to put a .kwd at the end of your filename, KWord will do this for you.
Note

UNIX® filenames are more flexible than many other operating systems. Filenames can:

  • be of nearly any length
  • be any combination of upper and lowercase letters
  • include spaces and punctuation

Filenames should not:

  • begin with a space or period (full stop)
  • end with a common file extension (.ps,.pdf,etc).

Once you have entered the correct information you can click on Save to complete the save.

KWord does not report a successful save. Therefore, if the file was saved without incident, KWord will return you to editing your document. If there is a problem with the save, an error box will appear.

Note
KWord will only allow you to save your file where you are allowed to by the permissions listed by the operating system. If you try to save outside that area, KWord will report an error.


Prev Contents Next
Beginning a New Document Retrieving a Document

The Open... command can be invoked 4 ways:

  • By selecting File->Open... from the menubar
  • You can use the keyboard shortcut: Ctrl-O
  • or by clicking on the toolbar.

Any of these methods results in the same action by KWord.

Using the dialog box

When trying to open a file, a dialog appears.

For more information on using this dialog, see the section entitled Using the file dialog.

Use this dialog to locate the document you want to load. Once located, click once with the left mouse button on the filename. Once the filename is selected click OK. The file will be loaded.

There is a Cancel button, if you click this button, the load will be aborted.

Prev Contents Next
Saving a Document Printing a Document

The Print... command can be invoked 3 ways:

  • By selecting File->Print... from the menubar
  • You can use the keyboard shortcut: Ctrl-P
  • or by clicking on the toolbar.

No matter how you do this, the KDE print dialog will appear.

The top combo box labeled Name: shows the currently selected printer. To configure this printer click on the Properties button.

To select a different printer, click on the combo box and select the desired printer.

If you want to print your output into a postscript file, to a PDF file, a fax modem (to send it as a fax) or email the file as a PDF file, select the appropriate option from the combo box labeled Name. Once that option has been selected, enter the filename into the text box labeled Output file:.

The line labelled State tells you if your printer is currently connected and if it is printing another page. You can not change any information on this line.

The lines labeled Type and Location tells you what type of printer is currently selected and where that printer is located. You can not change any information on these lines.

The line labeled Comment describes how KWord interacts with your computer (what driver and print system it is using). You can not change anything on this line. Complete setup of the KDE printing system is beyond the scope of this document. For more information see the KDE print web site at http://printing.kde.org

If you want to print all pages of your document and only one copy, you can click Print. If you want to change the number of copies or only print selected pages, click the Options >> button.

Note
The System Options button allows a user to change the setup of the printers and KDE print system. This is also beyond the scope of this manual. If you need to make changes please refer to the KDE print web site at http://printing.kde.org.
Note
Depending on which printing system your computer uses, you may find that you have more printing options then those described below. What is described here, is available on most systems.

Once you click Options >>, the dialog box changes to:

Under Page Selection, you can select either to print the whole document (select All), print the page the cursor is located on (simply select Current), or print a range of pages. If you select the Range option, enter your page range in the text box provided. (For example: 3-13)

In the combo box labeled Page set: you can tell KWord to print the Even Pages, the Odd Pages or All Pages.

In the box on the right labeled Copies:, you should set the number of copies you want printed. You can either enter the number directly into the box, or use the arrows to adjust the number. KWord can print a maximum of 999 copies at once.

You can have KDE collate your documents by clicking on the Collate check box. If selected, KDE will print all of the pages for copy 1, then print all the pages for copy 2, etc. If not selected, KDE will print all of the copies of the first page, then all of the copies of the second page, etc.

You can also determine if the document is printed in forward order (print first page first), or reverse order (print last page first).

If you click on Options <<, the print dialog will compress down to the previous view.

Note
Depending on your systems setup, you may have additional options available to you. These options are discussed at http://printing.kde.org.

When you are satisfied with your selections, you can click OK to print.

If you click on Cancel, the printing will be aborted.

Prev Contents Next
Retrieving a Saved Document Editing your Document

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Detailed Guides: Editing your Document

This section of the guide will cover more advanced features of data editing. This section focuses entirely on text data. For working with other types of data, please see the section entitled More than just text .

Selecting Text

For many editing and formatting functions in KWord, certain actions (bold face, underline,etc.) should be applied to a certain section of text, not the document as a whole. You specify which text should be altered by selecting (or highlighting) the text you want changed.

Selected text has a colored background to separate it from unselected text.

For example:

Select text by designating a start and an end point. All the text in between the start and end point is selected text.

Text can be selected with either the mouse or the keyboard.

Using The Mouse

To select text with the mouse, place the mouse pointer at the start point. Click and hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse pointer. This selects all text between the initial click of left mouse button and the current position of the mouse cursor. When the mouse pointer is at the desired end point, release the button. The start and endpoints will become fixed.

Using The Keyboard

To use the keyboard, KWord takes the initial position of the text cursor as the start point. Use the following key combinations to move the endpoint to the desired location.

Key Combination Function
Shift+Left Arrow Moves the endpoint one character to the left.
Ctrl+Shift+Left Arrow Moves the endpoint one word to the left.
Shift+Right Arrow Moves the endpoint one character to the Right.
Ctrl+Shift+Right Arrow Moves the endpoint one word to the Right.
Shift+Up Arrow Selects all characters from the start of the selection, to the character directly up one line.
Ctrl+Shift+Up Arrow Selects all characters from the start of the selection, to the first character of the line directly above.
Shift+Down Arrow Shift+Down Arrow Selects all characters from the start of the selection, to the character directly down one line.
Ctrl+Shift+Down Arrow Selects all characters from the start of the selection, to the last character of the line directly below.
Shift+Home Selects all characters from the start of the selection, to the beginning of the line.
Ctrl+Shift+Home Selects all characters from the start of the selection, to the beginning of the document.
Shift+End Selects all characters from the start of the selection, to the end of the line.
Ctrl+Shift+End Selects all characters from the start of the selection, to the end of the document.
Shift+Page-Up Moves the current endpoint one screen up.
Ctrl+Shift+Page-Up Moves the current endpoint one page up. The endpoint is located at the first character of this page.
Shift+Page-Down Moves the current endpoint down one screen.
Ctrl+Shift+Page-Down Moves the current endpoint down one page. The endpoint is locate at the first character of this page.
Ctrl+A Select all text in the current frameset.

Once the start and endpoints have been defined, all text between the startpoint and endpoint is selected.

Prev Contents Next
Printing a Document Using Multiple Views

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Using Multiple Views

Introduction

When editing very large documents, there will be times when it is helpful to edit two parts of the document. In a situation such as this, KWord can open additional windows to edit the same document.

These new windows are called Views, since they provide a different viewpoint of the the same document.

Views are very important tools when working with large documents. Set one view to edit one part of the document, and using the other view, freely move through the document making updates and changes. These changes are automatically revealed in all views.

Creating a new view

Creating a new view creates an entirely new window, with toolbars, menubars etc. Compare this with the Split View command.

To create a new view select View->New View from the menubar.

A new window will be created. Alterations to your document can be made in either view. Updates in one window will be immediately visible in the other.

Splitting the current view into two separate views

It is also possible to split one view into two views. Both views are contained within one window, and use the same toolbars, menubars, etc. Contrast this to the effect of the New View command.

To split the current view, select View->Split View from the menubar.

The current document area will be split into two views. Alterations to your document can be made in either view. Updates in one view will be immediately visible in the other.

Tip
The views can either be split horizontally or vertically. See the next section for instructions.

Changing the split view orientation

To change the direction that the views are split, simply select View->Splitter Orientation from the menubar. This will show a submenu. Select either Horizontal or Vertical.

All views in the current window will immediately change to the new orientation.

Changing the size of views

The relative sizes of each view can be adjusted with your mouse.

To adjust the view size, look at the border between the scrollbar of one view (the upper or right view) and the ruler of the other view (the lower or left view). There is a solid border which appears raised between the scrollbar and the ruler. As the mouse pointer passes over this bar, it changes from an arrow to double lines with double arrows.

When the mouse pointer changes, click once with the left mouse button and hold the button down. Drag that border to the new location. When the mouse button is released, the views will change to the new proportions.

Remove View

To remove a view, simply place the mouse pointer in the view to be deleted and click with the left mouse button. Then select View->Remove View from the menubar.

Close all views

To close all views, select View->Close All Views from the menubar.

Prev Contents Next
Editing your Document Undo and Redo

It happens all the time. While working on a document, a change is made. The change was wrong, now you want to back out of your changes.

Fortunately, KWord has a solution.

Each time a change is made to a document, KWord remembers what the change was. KWord can Undo each change once a time.

As an example, you are writing a business letter and type in the following sentence:

It is a pleasure for me to give you this letter of introduction to your newest employee.

But that doesn't seem right, so you change it:

It is a joy for me to give you this letter of introduction to your newest employee.

You decide it was better the first time and you want to change it back.

Simply select Edit->Undo from the menubar.

The text now reads “pleasure” again.

It is a pleasure for me to give you this letter of introduction to your newest employee.

If, after you Undo a change, and then want to reverse that decision, select Edit->Redo and the Undo is reversed.

Note
Sometimes it is not possible for KWord to undo an edit. In these instances, KWord will display the Undo function gray and the function is not accessible.
Othertimes, KWord will only perform a partial undo of the previous task. This is because KWord processes changes to documents differently then might initially be expected. Simply select Edit->Undo again, and more of the edits will be undone.

By default, KWord keeps track of the last 30 edits to the document. This number can be adjusted up or down. For details, see Configuring KWord.

The Undo and Redo commands can be accessed from the menubar (as in the examples above), by using keyboard shortcuts or from the toolbar.

Command Toolbar button Keyboard Shortcut
Undo
Ctrl+Z
Redo
Ctrl+Shift+Z
Prev Contents Next
Using Multiple Views Cut, copy, paste and the Clipboard

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Cut/Copy/Paste and the Clipboard

The “clipboard” is a concept familiar to most people who have used modern word processors. It is a piece of your computers memory which is set aside as a temporary storage space. Text can be “Cut” or “Copied” from your document into the clipboard. You can move to another part of the document or to another application entirely, and “Paste” this text at the new location.

The most common use for the clipboard is to move or copy text which has already entered into one part of the document to another part of the same document or to another document entirely.

This concept is probably best described with an example.

To do this, we begin with a test sentence

The big, red fox jumped over the lazy dog.

Using the mouse or keyboard, select the phrase “ big, red” (notice the space before “big” is selected).

Now select Edit->Copy from the menubar.

This has moved a copy of the selected text to the clipboard.

Now place the mouse cursor directly behind the word “lazy” and click once.

Now select Edit->Paste from the menubar.

The resulting sentence is:

The big, red fox jumped over the lazy big, red dog

The clipboard is not limited to text. The clipboard can contain tables, pictures, spreadsheets or any other type of information.

The Copy Command

The Copy command can be invoked 4 ways:

  • By selecting Edit->Copy from the menubar
  • By clicking on the toolbar.
  • Using the keyboard shortcut: Ctrl+C or the alternate keyboard shortcut: Ctrl+Insert
  • After the text is selected, click once with the right mouse button and hold the button down. A small popup menu will appear. Simply select Copy

The Copy command moves a copy of the selected data to the clipboard. The original data is unaffected.

The Cut Command

The Cut command can be invoked 4 ways:

  • By selecting Edit->Cut from the menubar
  • By clicking on the toolbar.
  • Using the keyboard shortcut: Ctrl+X or the alternate keyboard shortcut: Shift+Delete
  • After the text is selected, click once with the right mouse button and hold the button down. A small popup menu will appear. Simply select Cut

The Cut command moves a copy of the selected data to the clipboard. The selected data is then deleted from the document.

The Paste Command

The Paste command can be invoked 4 ways:

  • By selecting Edit->Paste from the menubar
  • By clicking on the toolbar.
  • Using the keyboard shortcut: Ctrl+V or the alternate keyboard shortcut: Shift+Insert
  • Place the cursor where the contents of the clipboard should be inserted. Click once with the right mouse button and hold the button down. A small popup menu will appear. Simply select Paste

The Paste command inserts a copy of all the data in the clipboard at the current position of the cursor. The clipboard is unaffected. (So another paste command will produce yet another copy of the data in the document.)

Note
If no text in the document is currently highlighted, the Paste command inserts the data at the current position of the cursor.
If there is selected text when the Paste command is executed, the selected text is replaced with the contents of the clipboard.
Tip


The clipboard is not limited to the bounds of the current document. If text is copied (or cut) from a document, this text can be pasted into another open document, or another application entirely.
Prev Contents Next
Undo and Redo Finding and Replacing Text

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Finding and Replacing Text

The Find Command

The Find command can be invoked 3 ways:

  • By selecting Edit->Find... from the menubar
  • You can use the keyboard shortcut: Ctrl+F
  • By clicking on the toolbar.

When the Find Command is invoked, a dialog appears.

Basic Text Search

The combo box labelled Text to find, provides a place for you to enter the text of your search command. (In the screenshot, that box is currently filled with KDE).

If you click on Find, then KWord will search the document until it finds a match to your text. If KWord cannot find a match, a dialog box will appear that says No matches found for "Text to find".

Tip
If you want to repeat a recent search, simply select the arrow in the drop-down box and a list of your most recent searches will appear. Simply select your search from the list and click Find.

Refining Your Search

KWord's find feature is much more sophisticated than we discussed above. Using the options in the dialog box, you can narrow down your search to find exactly what you want.

Regular Expressions in KWord

The default action for KWord is to search for an exact match of the text. KWord has the ability to match text that follows a pattern or a set of rules.

To enable patterns, place a mark in the box labeled Regular expression.

This will enable the Edit button. This button can be a quick way to create regular expressions for people unfamiliar with UNIX® regular expressions.

A more thourough discussion of regular expressions in KDE can be found in the help manual for KRegExpEditor, which can be found in the KHelpCenter.

Formatting options

KWord also has the ability to search your document for text that matches certain formatting options as well as the text itself.

To include formatting options in your search, click the button labeled Show Formatting Options.

Once Show Formatting Options has been clicked, a new dialog will appear.

You can use this dialog to select the options you want to include in your search.

The left column consists of 13 check boxes. If there is a mark in the check box, then KWord will evaluate any searchable text for that property. If no mark is in the check box, KWord does not consider that property when performing a search.

Family:

Use this combo box to select the font family you want to include in your search text.

Size:

Use this spin box to set the font size you want KWord to search for.

Color: and Background color:

Clicking on either of these two buttons allows you to select the font color and/or background color respectively, you want KWord to search for. For more information on selecting a color, see the section on Selecting Colors from the Color Dialog.

Bold: and Italic:

Use these Yes/No radio boxes to determine whether you want KWord to include boldface or italicized fonts in the search text.

Strikeout:

You can select None, Single, Double or Simple Bold to modify your search.

Underline:

You can select None, Single, Double, Simple Bold or Wave to modify your search.

Vertical alignment:

You can select Normal, Subscript or Superscript to determine what font alignment you want KWord to search for.

Shadow: and Word by word:

Use these Yes/No radio boxes to determine whether you want KWord to include shadow text in the search text and whether to search for word by word underlining and strikethrough text.

Capitalization:

You can select Normal, Uppercase, Lowercase, or Small Caps to determine what capitalization you want KWord to search for.

Language:

You can select the language of the text you want KWord to search for using this dropdown box.

Once you have selected your options, click OK to accept your search options.

Click Cancel to ignore all changes.

Click Reset to restore the options dialog box to the default values.

Click Clear to remove all marks from the checked options.

Other Search options

In addition to pattern matching, you can limit the search results with a few useful options.

Case sensitive

When this option is selected, KWord will not only search for the string of letters, but will verify that the case of the letters is the same. For example. Searching for: KDE
   will match: KDE and hiddenKDEinwords
   but not: Kde, kde or hiddenkdeinwords.

Find backwards

This option changes the direction of the search. This can be useful when you only want to search for a string of text before the current cursor position, not after. This option is usually used in conjunction with From cursor, but if that option is not specified, KWord will start searching from the end of the document backwards.

Whole words only

When this option is selected, KWord will only return search items that are surrounded by spaces, paragraph marks or punctuation. For example. Searching for: KDE
   will match: KDE
   but not: hiddenKDEinwords or KDElike.

Selected Text

If you want to limit your search to a specific part of the document (a few paragraphs, for example), you can select the part of the document you want to search prior to selecting the Find command. When text is selected, KWord will default to only searching the selected text. You can use this option to enable or disable this restriction.
Note
This option will not be available if you have not selected text prior to selecting the Find command.

From cursor

By default, KWord begins searching at the beginning of the document. If this option is selected, KWord begins its search from the current position of the cursor. The direction that KWord searches is, by default forward in the document, but can be changed with the Find backwards option.

The Replace Command

The Replace command is an extension of the Find command. If you are familiar with the Find command, you will see many similarities.

The Replace command can be invoked 2 ways:

  • By selecting Edit->Replace... from the menubar
  • You can use the keyboard shortcut: Ctrl+R

When the Replace command is invoked, a dialog appears.

Basic Search and Replace

The combo box labeled Text to find:, provides a place for you to enter the text of your search command. (In the screenshot, that box is currently filled with KDE)

You can enter your replacement text in the text box labeled Replacement text:. You can now click OK to replace all occurrences in the document, or you can further refine your search.

Refining Your Search

KWord's find feature is much more sophisticated than we discussed above. Using the options in the dialog box, you can narrow down your search to find exactly what you want.

Regular Expressions in KWord

The default action for KWord is to search for an exact match of the text. KWord has the ability to match text that follows a pattern or a set of rules.

To enable patterns, place a mark in the box labeled Regular expression.

This will enable the Edit button. This button can be a quick way to create regular expressions for people unfamiliar with UNIX® regular expressions.

A more thorough discussion of regular expressions in KDE can be found in the help manual for KRegExpEditor, which can be found in the KHelpCenter.

Formatting options

KWord also has the ability to search your document for text that matches certain formatting options as well as the text itself.

To include formatting options in your search, click the button labeled Show Formatting Options.

Once Show Formatting Options has been clicked, a new dialog will appear.

You can use this dialog to select the options you want to include in your search.

The left column consists of 13 check boxes. If there is a mark in the check box, then KWord will evaluate any searchable text for that property. If no mark is in the check box, KWord does not consider that property when performing a search.

Family:

Use this combo box to select the font family you want to include in your search text.

Size:

Use this spin box to set the font size you want KWord to search for.

Color: and Background color:

Clicking on either of these two buttons allows you to select the font color and/or background color respectively, you want KWord to search for. For more information on selecting a color, see the section on Selecting Colors from the Color Dialog.

Bold: and Italic:

Use these Yes/No radio boxes to determine whether you want KWord to include boldface or italicized fonts in the search text.

Strikeout:

You can select None, Single, Double or Simple Bold to modify your search.

Underline:

You can select None, Single, Double, Simple Bold or Wave to modify your search.

Vertical alignment:

You can select Normal, Subscript or Superscript to determine what font alignment you want KWord to search for.

Shadow: and Word by word:

Use these Yes/No radio boxes to determine whether you want KWord to include shadow text in the search text and whether to search for word by word underlining and strikethrough text.

Capitalization:

You can select Normal, Uppercase, Lowercase, or Small Caps to determine what capitalization you want KWord to search for.

Language:

You can select the language of the text you want KWord to search for using this dropdown box.

Once you have selected your options, click OK to accept your search options.

Click Cancel to ignore all changes.

Click Reset to restore the options dialog box to the default values.

Click Clear to remove all marks from the checked options.

Other Search options

In addition to pattern matching, you can limit the search results with a few useful options.

Case sensitive

When this option is selected, KWord will not only search for the string of letters, but will verify that the case of the letters is the same. For example. Searching for: KDE
   will match: KDE and hiddenKDEinwords
   but not: Kde, kde or hiddenkdeinwords.

Find backwards

This option changes the direction of the search. This can be useful when you only want to search for a string of text before the current cursor position, not after. This option is usually used in conjunction with From cursor, but if that option is not specified, KWord will start searching from the end of the document backwards.

Whole words only

When this option is selected, KWord will only return search items that are surrounded by spaces, paragraph marks or punctuation. For example. Searching for: KDE

will match: KDE

but not: hiddenKDEinwords or KDElike.

Selected Text

If you want to limit your search to a specific part of the document (a few paragraphs, for example), you can select the part of the document you want to search prior to selecting the Find command. When text is selected, KWord will default to only searching the selected text. You can use this option to enable or disable this restriction.
Note
This option will not be available if you have not selected text prior to selecting the Find command.

From cursor

By default, KWord begins searching at the beginning of the document. If this option is selected, KWord begins its search from the current position of the cursor. The direction that KWord searches is, by default forward in the document, but can be changed with the Find backwards option.

Once you have selected your options, click OK to accept your search options.

Click Cancel to ignore all changes.

Click Reset to restore the options dialog box to the default values.

Click Clear to remove all marks from the checked options.

Replace with formatted text

KWord also has the ability to replace the found text with formatted text.

To include formatting options in your search, click the button labeled Show Formatting Options in the Replace With section.

Once Show Formatting Options has been clicked, a new dialog will appear.


You can use this dialog to select the format of the replaced text.

The left column consists of 13 check boxes. If there is a mark in the check box, then KWord will change any replaced text to match the property selected. If no mark is in the check box, KWord does not consider that property when replacing text.

Family:

Use this combo box to select the font family you want your replacement text to use.

Size:

Use this spin box to set the font size you want KWord to use for your replaced text.

Color: and Background color:

Clicking on either of these two buttons allows you to select the font color and/or background color respectively, you want KWord to use. For more information on selecting a color, see the section on Selecting Colors from the Color Dialog.

Bold: and Italic:

Use these Yes/No radio boxes to determine whether you want KWord to change the fonts to boldface or italicized fonts.

Strikeout:

You can select None, Single, Double or Simple Bold to use for the replacement text.

Underline:

You can select None, Single, Double, Simple Bold or Wave to use for the replacement text.

Vertical alignment:

You can select Normal, Subscript or Superscript to determine what font alignment you want KWord to use.

Shadow: and Word by word:

Use these Yes/No radio boxes to determine whether you want KWord to use shadow text and/or word by word underlining and strikethrough in the replacement text.

Capitalization:

You can select Normal, Uppercase, Lowercase, or Small Caps to determine what capitalization to use for the replacement text.

Language:

You can select the language of the text you will use to replace the found text.

Once you have selected your options, click OK to accept your text options.

Click Cancel to ignore all changes.

Click Reset to restore the options dialog box to the initial values prior to making any changes.

Click Clear to remove all marks from the checked options.

Using placeholders

Placeholders are useful when you want to add text to complex search strings. Currently KWord has only one placeholder: Complete text string.

This placeholder will contain the entire text string matched by the Find command.

For example:

You create a search string, using regular expressions: Reference \d

Note

In order for this string example to work, a mark must be placed in the check box labeled Regular expression

Regular expressions are available by placing a mark in this checkbox. The use of regular expressions is beyond the scope of this manual. For more information see the KDE Regular Expression Manual (Available in the KDE help center).

Now in the Replace With section of the replace dialog, you place a mark in the check box labeled Use placeholders. Click the Insert Placeholder button and select Complete Match. KWord will insert a \0 in the Replacement text: text box.

Now surround the placeholder with parentheses, so your text string is: (\0)

When this is executed, whenever KWord encounters the find text (ie. “Reference 0”, “Reference 1”, “Reference 2”, etc) it will surround the text in parenthesis (“(Reference 0)”, “(Reference 1)”, “(Reference 2)”, respectively).

As you can see, the placeholder will maintain a copy of the search text. You can use this placeholder to add text to the ends of any search string you can imagine.

Other Replace Options

Additional options in the dialog are:

Case sensitive

When this option is selected, KWord will not only search for the string of letters, but will verify that the case of the letters is the same. For example. Searching for: KDE
will match: KDE and hiddenKDEinwords but not: Kde, kde or hiddenkdeinwords.

Find backwards

This option changes the direction of the search. This can be useful when you only want to search for a string of text before the current cursor position, not after. This option is usually used in conjunction with From cursor, but if that option is not specified, KWord will start searching from the end of the document backwards.

Whole words only

When this option is selected, KWord will only return search items that are surrounded by spaces, paragraph marks or punctuation. For example. Searching for: KDE
will match: KDE
but not: hiddenKDEinwords or KDElike.

Selected Text

If you want to limit your search to a specific part of the document (a few paragraphs, for example), you can select the part of the document you want to search prior to selecting the Find command. When text is selected, KWord will default to only searching the selected text. You can use this option to enable or disable this restriction.
Note
This option will not be available if you have not selected text prior to selecting the Find command.

From cursor

By default, KWord begins searching at the beginning of the document. If this option is selected, KWord begins its search from the current position of the cursor. The direction that KWord searches is, by default forward in the document, but can be changed with the Find backwards option.

Prompt on replace

If this option is selected, KWord will prompt the user before each replacement. This allows you to approve or disapprove each replacement.
Prev Contents Next
Cut, Copy, Paste and the Cipboard Spellchecking

Spellchecking

KWord can compare each word in your document to several commonly available dictionaries. It will offer you the opportunity to change any words it believes are misspelled.

Note
By default, if any text in the document is selected, KWord only checks the spelling of currently selected text.
If you want to check the spelling of a specific part of your document, simply select the text you want to check.
To check the entire document, leave all text in the document unselected, and KWord will check the entire document.

You can check the spelling of text 2 ways:

  • By selecting Tools->Spellcheck->Spelling... from the menubar
  • By clicking on the toolbar.

Spellchecking your document is controlled through a dialog box.

In this example, the mis-spelled word KWord found, was youv. The currently suggested replacement word is listed in the text box labeled Replace with:. In the list box labeled Suggested Words is a list of words the spelling program has determined as possible correct spellings.

From here you have eight options:

Replace

Replaces the current word with the suggested word. Only replaces this occurrence.

Replace All

Replaces all occurrences of the current word with the suggested word through the entire document.

Ignore

Do not make any changes to this occurrence. Ask again if this word appears further down in the document.

Ignore All

Do not make any changes to this or any other occurrence of this word. Do not ask about this word again.

Add

Add the current word to the dictionary.

Stop

Keep the current changes, but stop any further checking.

Cancel

Stop spellchecking and ignore any changes made so far.

Help

Loads a help file for the spellchecker.

When the entire document has been checked, KWord will return the cursor to the same spot in the document that the spellchecking was begun.

Note
If the document does not have any spelling errors, KWord does not show a dialog box informing you there were no spelling errors.
When spellchecking is started, it will proceed to check all of the document against the dictionary, and if there are no spelling errors it will close the spellcheck dialog box. With short documents, this may happen quickly. KWord has spellchecked the document!

There are several options for configuring the spelling application used. For more details, please see the section entitled Configure Spelling.

Automatically mark misspelled words

KWord can check the spelling of your document as you edit it. It will underline in red any word which it cannot find in the dictionary. This behavior can be turned on and off by the user. By selecting Tools->Spellcheck->Autospellcheck from the menubar you can toggle autospellchecking on and off.

Prev Contents Next
Finding and Replacing Text Finding a Related Word (Thesaurus)

KWord comes with a small thesaurus based on the Wordnet project. For more information on Wordnet, visit the Wordnet homepage.

You can invoke the thesaurus two ways:

  • Simply click on the desired word with the right mouse button. A popup menu will appear. Select Show Related Words from the menu and a dialog will appear.
  • By selecting Tools->Show Related Words from the menubar

Which ever method you choose, KWord opens the KThesaurus dialog box.

The word you selected from your document appears in the combo box labeled Search for:'.

There are three columns of alternate words: Synonyms, More General words (hypernyms), More Specific Words (hyponyms).

If you find an appropriate alternate word, simply click on the word in the list, and this word will now be listed in the text box labeled Replace With:.

To finalize the replacement click Replace.

To keep your original word, click Cancel.

To obtain more specific help, or for help on using the full version of Wordnet, click the Help button for help with KThesaurus (including additional thesauri for non-english languages).

Prev Contents Next
Spellchecking Autocorrection

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Autocorrection

Auto correction is a system for correcting common typing errors, converting abbreviations to their full spelling and adjusting capitalization. As you could guess from its name, this all occurs automatically, while you are editing your document.

Enabling/Disabling Autocorrection

To toggle autocorrection on, select Tools->Autocorrection->Enable Autocorrection from the menubar. When enabled, autocorrection makes changes to your document as you type. You can determine which changes to make by configuring autocorrection.

To toggle autocorrection off, select Tools->Autocorrection->Disable Autocorrection from the menubar. When disabled, autocorrection changes are not made. You can, however, apply autocorrection manually.

Configuring Autocorrection Options

To adjust the options for autocorrection, select Settings->Configure Autocorrection... from the menubar.

A dialog window appears to help you set your options.

Simple Autocorrection

Convert first letter of a sentence automatically to uppercase

When selected, KWord will automatically capitalize the first letter after a period. You can tell KWord when not to alter capitalization in certain instances (ie “Sr.” or “Jr.”. For more details, see the section entitled Autocorrection Exceptions.

Convert two uppercase letters to one uppercase and one lowercase letter

When selected, KWord will automatically convert a double capital letter (a common typographical error), into a single capital letter. You can tell KWord when not to alter capitalization in certain instances. For more details, see the section entitled Autocorrection Exceptions.

Autoformat URLs

When selected, KWord will scan text for patterns which suggest a certain section of text is a URL and automatically creates a link.
For more details on links, see the section entitled Document Links.

Suppress double spaces

When checked, KWord will ignore the second space typed. This prevents users from adding double spaces between words or sentences.

Remove spaces at the beginning and end of paragraphs

When selected, KWord will automatically remove spaces at the beginning and/or the end of a line of text.

Automatically do bold and underline formatting

When selected, KWord will look for words surrounded by asterisks ( * ). It will remove the asterisks and change the font of all words in between the two asterisks to bold face.
KWord will also look for words surrounded by underscores ( _ ). It will remove the underscores and underline all words in between the two underscores.

Replace 1/2... with ½...

When selected, KWord will automatically change 1/2, 1/3 and 3/4 to their single character equivalents.

Use autonumbering for numbered paragraphs

If you start a paragraph with a number and a symbol ( 1) for example). KWord will automatically convert that paragraph to a numbered paragraph. All future paragraphs will be consecutively numbered.

Replace 1st with 1^st

When selected, KWord will automatically change 1st to 1st.

Capitalize name of days

Automatically capitalize the days of the week (Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, etc...).

Use list-formatting for bulleted paragraphs

When selected, KWord will look for lines that begin with - , and automatically convert the paragraph style to a bulleted list. The bullet is selected with the left button below this option.

Custom Quotes

Select the tab labeled Custom Quotes

Replace double quotes with typographical quotes

When selected, this option will replace the standard keyboard double quotes, with typographical quotation marks. If you want to change the quotation character, click on one of the buttons. Clicking on Default, restores the default paragraph marks.

Replace single quotes with typographical quotes

When selected, this option will replace the standard keyboard single quotes, with typographical quotation marks. If you want to change the quotation character, click on one of the buttons. Clicking on Default, restores the default paragraph marks.

Advanced Autocorrection

To switch to the Advanced Autocorrection, click on the tab labeled Advanced Autocorrection.

This allows you to automatically have KWord replace one string of text with another. This can be useful for special symbols, commonly used abbreviations that you want spelled out, or abbreviations.

KWord uses different autocorrection strings depending on the language. Set the correct language using the combo box labeled Replacements and exceptions for language:.

The check box labeled Enable word replacement is used to toggle on and off the autoreplacement features of KWord. If there is no mark in the check box, then KWord will not perform any autoreplacements from the list in this dialog.

If there is a mark in the check box labeled Replace text with format KWord will not only change the text when it finds a match, but it will change the formatting of the new text. If there is no mark in this check box, then KWord uses the same formatting options for the replaced text as it found in the search text. For more information on setting the format options for replacement text, see the section on Changing the format of the autocorrection string.

Adding an autocorrection string

To add an autocorrection string, simply type the text you want KWord to check for in the text box labeled Find, then enter the text you want KWord to substitute in the text box labeled Replace.

Note
If you want to insert symbols or special characters not available on your keyboard, you can click the buttons with three periods on them and select a special character from the table provided.

When these are entered, click Add. Your text strings are now added to the table.

Editing an autocorrection string

Changing the text you want to find.

KWord does not allow you to change the text to search for. This is to prevent disastrous mistakes.

Instead, you must delete the current autocorrection rule and add a new text string with the corrected text to find.

Changing the text you want to replace.

Begin by clicking once on the string you want to edit. It will be highlighted and the find and replace text will be listed in the text boxes above. You can alter the replacement text. When you are done, simply select Modify.

Deleting an autocorrection string.

Simply click on the string you want to delete. Now click the Remove button. The string is removed.

Warning
Be aware that KWord does not give you a chance to back out once you have deleted a string. Be sure you have selected the correct string before you click the Remove button.

Changing the format of the autocorrection string.

Note
Currently, you must create the autocorrection string before you can format it.

Once the autocorrection string has been created, simply click on it once with the left mouse button.

Now click on the Change Format... button. A small dialog will appear:

You can use this dialog to select the format of the replaced text.

The left column consists of 13 check boxes. If there is a mark in the check box, then KWord will change any replaced text to match the property selected. If no mark is in the check box, KWord does not consider that property when replacing text.

Family:

Use this combo box to select the font family you want your replacement text to use.

Size:

Use this spin box to set the font size you want KWord to use for your replaced text.

Color: and Background Color:

Clicking on either of these two buttons allows you to select the font color and/or background color respectively, you want KWord to use. For more information on selecting a color, see the section on Selecting Colors from the Color Dialog.

Bold: and Italic:

Use these Yes/No radio boxes to determine whether you want KWord to change the fonts to boldface or italicized fonts.

Strikeout:

You can select None, Single, Double or Simple Bold to use for the replacement text.

Underline

You can select None, Single, Double, Simple Bold or Wave to use for the replacement text.

Vertical alignment:

You can select Normal, Subscript or Superscript to determine what font alignment you want KWord to use.

Shadow: and Word by word:

Use these Yes/No radio boxes to determine whether you want KWord to use shadow text and/or word by word underlining and strikethrough in the replacement text.

Capitalization:

You can select Normal, Uppercase, Lowercase, or Small Caps to determine what capitalization to use for the replacement text.

Language:

You can select the language of the text you will use to replace the found text.

Once you have selected your options, click OK to accept your text options.

Click Cancel to ignore all changes.

Click Reset to restore the options dialog box to the initial values prior to making any changes.

Click Clear to remove all marks from the checked options.

Autocorrection Exceptions

There are instances where KWord will make autocorrection changes that are inappropriate. You can use the fourth tab of this dialog to define exceptions to the rules previously discussed.

The dialog for exceptions is shown below:

To prevent KWord from deciding an abbreviation or other text is the end of a sentence, simply enter the text fragment in the text box below Do not treat as the end of a sentence:. Then click Add.

As an example: Adding “Jr.” to this dialog prevents

“Robert Jones Jr. is a friend of the family.”

from being changed to:

“Robert Jones Jr. Is a friend of the family.”

To remove an erroneous entry, simply click once on the wrong entry with the left mouse button and click on the Remove button.

The second set of boxes performs a similar function to the first except text entered in these boxes will allow two capital letters in a word if it is entered in this text box.

Simply enter the word in the text box below Accept two uppercase letters in:. Then click Add.

As an example: Adding “CD” to this dialog prevents

“CD”

from being changed to:

“Cd”

To remove an erroneous entry, simply click once on the wrong entry with the left mouse button and click on the Remove button.

Manually applying autocorrection

If autocorrection is turned off in your document, you can manually enable autocorrection.

To manually apply autocorrection, first configure your options by using the autocorrection dialogs.

Then select Tools->Autocorrection->Apply Autocorrection from the menubar.

KWord will start at the beginning of the document and apply all selected autocorrection options to the entire document.

When KWord is finished, it will return you to your document for further editing.

For more information on enabling and disabling autocorrection, see Enabling/Disabling Autocorrection.

Prev Contents Next
Finding a Related Word (Thesaurus) Autocompletion

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Autocompletion

Autocompletion allows you to type the first few letters of a commonly used word (often technical or job specific), and tell KWord to finish typing the word for you. This is often very useful when you have lengthy technical words.

Using autocompletion

Using autocompletion could not be easier. Simply type the first few letters of the word you want KWord to finish, and press Ctrl-E. KWord will look through the list of autocompletion words and if it finds a word which begins with those letters, it will finish entering the remainder of the word.

Adding words to autocompletion

KWord maintains a list of words for each user that will be used for autocompletion.

You can add words to this list one of two ways:

  • KWord can automatically add new words to the completion list for later approval. This is selected using the dialog.
  • Individual words can be added to the list by using the dialog.

Configuring autocomplete

To configure autocompletion, select Settings->Configure Completion... from the menubar. This will bring up a dialog.

Enable word completion

It is used to toggle autocompletion on and off.

Add

By clicking this button you can manually add an individual word to the completion list.

Remove

To remove words from the completion list, select the word with the left mouse button from the list, then click this button.

Automatically add new words to suggestion list

This option will add any word equal to or longer than the Characters needed: to the list of proposed autocompletion words.
The large listbox in the center of the dialog contains the current proposed list of autocompletion words.
Note
Not all words listed in the list box will be immediatly affected by autocompletion when entered into this dialog.

Show words in tooltip

If this option is enabled, a tool tip box will appear when you type the beginning of a word that exists in the completion list. To complete the word, press the key you set to accept suggestions in the Key to accept suggestion: drop-down list.

Characters needed:

Use this spinbox/slider combination to prevent KWord from automatically adding short words to the completion list. You can select any value from 5-100 and the words will need to be at least the number of characters set here to be added in the list.

Suggest words:

This spinbox/slider combination can be adjusted to allow more or less words into the autocompletion list. This option is most important when Automatically add new words to suggestion list is enabled. This option keeps the list from becoming too cumbersome. You can select any value from 1 to 500.

Append space

If checked, it adds a single space to the end of a word after autocompletion, this means it is not necessary to add the space manually for the next word.

Key to accept suggestion:

Set the key you want to use when an autocompleted word is suggested to you and you want to accept it. You can choose Enter, Tab, Space, End or Right.

Make Default

A word is not part of autocompletion until the list is saved to disk. At that moment, KWord will use that saved list for all autocompletion, until the list is replaced with another saved list.
Some of the words in the autocompletion list may not have been saved yet.
To save the current list to disk and have KWord begin using this new list for autocompletion, click this button.

Click OK to save your options. Click Cancel to abort all changes. Click Reset to reset to the state after you clicked on the Make Default button.

Prev Contents Next
Autocorrection Formatting the Page

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Detailed Guides: Document Layout

This section of the guide is designed to help the user with the format and layout of their documents. The section will begin with information on changing the size and shape of the page and the margins, and work progressively through smaller and smaller blocks of text (frames, then paragraphs, then characters). At each level, all of the format and layout options will be explained.

After discussing the formatting of individual characters, the manual will elaborate on styles (to provide consistent formatting through the document), lists, multi-column documents, tables and finally the use of headers and footers in a document.

The final part will show you how to save a document as a template for future documents.

Formatting the Page

Mike McBride

Before delving into the specifics of formatting a page in KWord, remember that KWord has two separate types of documents: Text Oriented and Page Layout. Please review The difference between Text Oriented and Page Layout Documents, if the differences are still unclear.

This section of the manual is divided into two sub-parts, one for Text Oriented, the other for Page Layout.

Formatting the Page (Text Oriented Document)

When you are working with a Text Oriented Document, you control the size and shape of the main frame by setting the paper size and the margins.

Formatting the page is usually done by selecting: Format->Page Layout... from the menubar.

Tip
You can also go straight to the Page Layout options by selecting the main frame of the document and then double clicking on either of the rulers.

A dialog box will appear with three tabs, labeled Page Size & Margins, Columns and Header & and Footer.

The Page Size & Margins tab is for altering the paper size, and changing the margins.

First you will notice, that a preview box appears on the right half of this dialog. This will approximate the final look of your document. It is updated with each change, and should be used as a guide for your changes.

On the left, the dialog displays the current unit of measurement. This unit of measurement is the same unit of measurement you use for your document rulers. (In this example, we are using inches.) To change the units, follow the instructions in the section entitled Using Rulers.

The dialog section labeled Page Size is used to specify the paper size for the document.

KWord includes many predefined paper sizes. Select the appropriate paper size with the drop down box labeled Size.

In addition to standard paper sizes, there are two selections that deserve special mention.

Screen

This format is used to generate a document where each page has an aspect ratio (shape) which matches the aspect ratios of computer monitors. This might be useful for documents which will never be printed, but will appear only on a computer screen.

Custom

You can select this option to specify a unique paper size.
Once selected, two text entry boxes (labeled Width: and Height:) become active. Enter the height and width of your desired paper size in these text boxes.

Below the page size, are two radio boxes in the section labeled Orientation you can select either Portrait or Landscape layout for your document.

Below the page orientation, is the Margins subsection, which consists of 4 spin boxes.

The Margins define the white-space surrounding the text in your main frame. You can enter any number from 0 to the maximum size of the page in these boxes. The units are the same for all four boxes, and is the same as the measurement listed at the top of the dialog.

Clicking on the Columns tab allows you to change the number of columns on each page. Details on multi-column documents can be found here.


Clicking on the Header & Footer tab allows the user to specify header and footer information.

This dialog can be broken into two major sections.

If you are not familiar with Headers and Footers yet, you should first read the section entitled Headers/Footers.

Headers

This section lets you determine the placement of headers, and which pages have which headers on them.

If you place a mark in front of Different header for the first page, you will be able to specify a different format for the header on the first page.

If you place a mark in front of Different header for even and odd pages, the even pages will use one header, the odd pages use another header.

Tip
You can use this to ensure the page numbers are always on the outside of the page, or to list the title of the document on odd pages and the chapter number on the even pages.

In the spin box labeled Spacing between header and body:, you can specify how much empty space should be placed between the bottom of the header, and the top of the main frame.

Footers

This section lets you determine the placement of footers, and which pages have which footers on them.

If you place a mark in front of Different footer for the first page, you will be able to specify a different format for the footer on the first page.

If you place a mark in front of Different footer for even and odd pages, the even pages will use one footer, the odd pages use another footer.

In the spin box labeled Spacing between footer and body:, you can specify how much empty space should be placed between the top of the footer, and the bottom of the main frame.

Footnote/Endnote

The bottom spin box is labeled Spacing between footnote and body:. As the label suggests, you can use this text box to specify the distance between the bottom edge of the main frame, and the top edge of the footnotes. For more information on footnotes, see the section entitled [[KWord/1.5/Manual/Footnotes_and_Endnotes|Footnotes and Endnotes.

When you are satisfied with the changes you are ready to make, click OK.

If you click Cancel, all your changes will be ignored.

Formatting the Page (Page Layout Document)

When you are working with a Page Layout Document, you control the size and shape of all the frames individually.

Formatting the page is usually done by selecting: Format->Page Layout... from the menubar.

Tip
You can also go straight to the Page Layout options by double clicking on either of the rulers.

A dialog box will appear.

The Page Size & Margins tab is for altering the paper size, and changing the margins.

First you will notice, that a preview box appears on the right half of this dialog. This will approximate the final look of your document. It is updated with each change, and should be used as a guide for your changes.

On the left, the dialog displays the current unit of measurement. This unit of measurement is the same unit of measurement you use for your document rulers. (In this example, we are using inches.) To change the units, follow the instructions in the section entitled Using Rulers.

The dialog section labeled Page Size is used to specify the paper size for the document.

KWord includes many predefined paper sizes. Select the appropriate paper size with the drop down box labeled Size.

In addition to standard paper sizes, there are two selections that deserve special mention.

Screen

This format is used to generate a document where each page has an aspect ratio (shape) which matches the aspect ratios of computer monitors. This might be useful for documents which will never be printed, but will appear only on a computer screen.

Custom

You can select this option to specify a unique paper size.
Once selected, two text entry boxes (labeled Width: and Height:) become active. Enter the height and width of your desired paper size in these text boxes.

Next to the paper format, in the section labeled Orientation you can select either Portrait or Landscape layout for your document.

Below the page format options, is the Margins subsection, which consists of 4 entry boxes. All options in this subsection are disabled in Page Oriented documents.

Prev Contents Next
Autocompletion Working with Frames

Mike McBride

Since KWord is a frames based word processor, an understanding of frames and framesets is necessary for all but the most simple of documents.

This section is designed to give you a firm understanding of how to create, destroy and manipulate frames so KWord can provide you with the exact document you want.

Framesets

Before we continue our discussion of Frames, its important that we define a couple terms now:

Frame

A frame is a rectangular space on the page. This space defines an area where text (or other data), can be placed.

Frameset

A frameset is a group of frames. Each frame in the frameset has a position within the frameset
The position is determined by their placement on the page. If frames extend across the entire width of the page, the frame which begins closest to the top of the page is Frame #1. The next frame that is closest to the top of the page is Frame #2, etc. If the frames do not extend across the width of the page, the frame whose left edge is closest to the left margin will be frame #1. In this case, the vertical position of the frame is ignored.
All text flows from one frame to another within a frameset, and only within a frameset. Text flows from frame to frame within the frameset according to the position of each frame on the page (and therefore the order of the frames within the frameset).
As an example: If we have a frameset that consists of three frames (#1, #2, and #3).
As we type text into Frame #1, the text is shaped to the outline of Frame #1.
When the text will no longer fit within Frame #1, it is automatically continued into Frame #2.

Text moves freely between frames within a frameset. If you insert text in the middle of a frame, all text after the inserted text is rearranged as you type.

Selecting a frame

You can select a frame within a frameset two ways:

  • By clicking on the text frame border of the frame you want to select.
  • By holding down the Ctrl key and clicking anywhere within the frame.

There should now be 8 squares around the edges of the frame.

Adding a Text Frame to a Document

Adding a text frame can be done one of three ways:

  • By selecting Insert->Text Frame from the menubar
  • You can use the keyboard shortcut: F10
  • or by clicking on the toolbar.

Whatever method you choose, KWord responds by changing the cursor to a set of cross hairs.

Using the mouse, place the crosshairs at the desired position of the upper left corner of the new text frame.

Click once with the left mouse button.

Alternative, first position the text caret at the place where you want to insert the frame. When the mouse cursor changes to crosshairs, press Enter.

A dialog box appears.

This dialog box is used to determine which frameset this new frame will belong to.

Using the screenshot as an example, a new text frame has been created in a document which currently has two framesets (called Text Frameset 1, and Text Frameset 2).

You now have the option of either:

Add the new frame to one of the previously created framesets.

To do this, simply select the frameset you want the new frame to belong to. (Either Text Frameset 1, or Text Frameset 2 in the example.)
When this text frame is created, the new text frame will become a member of the selected frameset.

Create a new frameset.

If you want this to be a new frameset, you should enter a descriptive name for your new frameset. (A name which will tell you what you might find in that frameset). This name should be entered in the text box labeled Name of frameset:.
This newly added frame will be the only frame in the frameset.

The other tabs in this dialog box, can be used to set some options for this frame. For more information on these options, see the section entitled Setting the properties for a frame.

If you click OK, the new frame will be created.

If you click Cancel, the new frame will not be created, and you will be returned to editing your document.

Tip
By default, KWord creates a small frame with the upper left corner of the frame located on the page where you clicked with the mouse cursor. After the frame is created, you are expected to reshape the frame to fit your needs.
If you would prefer to establish the shape of your frame while you are creating the frame, simply click the left mouse button where you want the upper left corner to be placed and hold the button down. Drag the mouse towards the opposite corner of the frame to establish the boundaries of the new frame. As you drag the mouse, you will see a box drawn. This box represents the boundaries of your new text frame. When you are satisfied with the size and shape of the new text frame, release the mouse button.

Deleting a Frame From a Document

You may decide you no longer need a frame in your document. You could leave it blank (so it would not be visible in the final output), but you should delete it to keep your document as simple as possible.

Begin by clicking on the text frame border of the frame you want to delete. (Or holding down the Ctrl key and clicking inside the frame with the left mouse button.)

There are now 8 squares on the edges of the frame.

If this is the frame you want to delete, you can do so by:

  • Press the Delete key.
  • Selecting Frames->Delete Frame from the menubar
  • While the cursor is on the border of the frame you want to delete, click once with the right mouse button. A small menu will appear. Select Delete Frame.

Moving a Frame

Moving a frame around on the page is easy.

Begin by clicking on the text frame border of the frame you want to move. (Or holding down the Ctrl key and clicking inside the frame with the left mouse button.)

There are now 8 squares on the edges of the frame.

Click and hold the left mouse button on the border again and drag the cursor in the direction you want to move the frame.

You will see an outline of the frame as you move it. When the outline is where you want it, release the mouse button.

Tip
A faster way to move the frame, can be done by holding down the Ctrl and Shift keys on the keyboard and click and hold with the left mouse button. Drag the mouse cursor on the page and when the frame is in the correct location, release the left mouse button.

Resizing a Frame

It is also easy to change the size or shape of a frame.

Begin by clicking on the text frame border of the frame you want to change. (Or holding down the Ctrl key and clicking inside the frame with the left mouse button.) This selects this frame as the current frame.

There are now 8 squares on the edges of the frame. By moving these squares, you will be able to drag the frame border(s) to a new location.

Each square will move a different combination of borders.

As an example: To move the bottom border of a frame, place the mouse over the box at the six o'clock position in the frame. When the mouse is over the box, it will change to a double headed arrow.

Now click with the left mouse button and hold the button down. As you move the mouse up and down on the page, you will see that the frame changes shape to match the movements of the mouse. When the bottom edge of the frame is at the new location, simply release the mouse button, and the changes will become permanent.

Note
If you are using a Text Oriented Template, you cannot change the size of the primary frame by dragging the edges of the frame. If you want to resize this frame, you must do so by Changing the margins.

Reconnecting Frames in a Frameset/Changing text flow.

Normally, each new text frame is created with a specific purpose. Sometimes, however, as the document is changed, changes to the text flow will need to be made. To accomplish this, you will need to know how to move a frame from one frameset to another.

First click on the frame border of the frame you want to move to another frameset.

You can change the frameset of the currently selected frame by selecting Frames->Frame/Frameset Properties from the menubar

Tip

You can also accomplish this by clicking on the frame border once with the right mouse button, and selecting Frame/Frameset Properties...from the popup menu.

This will bring up a dialog box with five tabs. Select the tab labeled Connect Text Frames.

You will be presented with a list of framesets. Simply select the new frameset.

When you click OK, the currently selected frame will be added to that frameset.

Raise and Lower Frames

When two frames occupy the same place on a page, they must overlap. When they overlap, one frame sits above the other frame.

You can raise and lower the frames to change which frame sits above the other frames by using four commands.

Bring to Front

To raise a frame, select the frame by clicking once on the frame border with the left mouse button.
Select Frames->Bring to Front from the menubar.
This will place the frame on top of all other frames that it overlaps.

Raise Frame

To raise a frame, select the frame by clicking once on the frame border with the left mouse button.
Select Frames->Raise Frame from the menubar.
This will move the frame up one level of any frame that it overlaps.
Tip
Pressing Ctrl+Shift+R is the same as selecting Raise Frame from the menubar.

Send to Back

To lower a frame, select the frame by clicking once on the frame border with the left mouse button.
Select Frames->Send to Back from the menubar.
This will place the frame below all other frames that it overlaps.

Lower Frame

To lower a frame, select the frame by clicking once on the frame border with the left mouse button.
Select Frames->Lower Frame from the menubar.
This will move the frame down one level of any frame that it overlaps.
Tip
Pressing Ctrl+Shift+L is the same as selecting Lower Frame from the menubar.

Hard Frame Breaks

A hard frame break is a special formatting character. It is invisible on the final printed output.

The purpose of a hard frame break, is to force all the text that follows it into the next frame in the frameset.

If we have the following sentence: “We have nothing to fear but fear itself”

and we insert a Hard Frame Break, just before the word “but”, we will end up with one frame containing “We have nothing to fear”, and the next frame in the frameset beginning with “but fear itself”.

To add a Hard Frame Break, you should first place the keyboard cursor where you want the break to be located in the document.

A Hard Frame Break can be inserted one of two ways:

  • Select Insert->Page Break from the menubar
  • You can use the keyboard shortcut: Ctrl-Return

If you want to remove a Hard Frame Break, you simply delete it like you would any other character.

Tip
Since this is not a character that you can normally see in KWord, it will be easier to delete a Hard Frame Break with the following procedure.
1. Select View->Formatting Characters from the menubar. This will make the breaks visible.
2. Find the newly revealed Page Break, labeled --- Frame Break ---. Place the mouse pointer in front of this and click once with the left mouse button. This will place the cursor directly in front of the page break.
3. Now press the Delete key.
Prev Contents Next
Formatting the Page Setting the Properties for a Frame

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Setting the Properties for a Frame

Mike McBride

For each frame in your document, you can determine:

  • how KWord handles full text frames
  • how text wraps around or through overlapping frames
  • the exact size of the frame
  • establish margins within a frame.
  • set a background color and pattern for the frame.

All of these options can be altered using a set of dialog boxes, or by using a previously defined framestyle.

A framestyle is a predefined set of frameset formatting options which is given a name. Once a frameset has been assigned a framestyle, any changes made to the framestyle will be reflected in all framesets which are assigned that framestyle.

Tip
You may be noticing that framestyles function in a way similar to text styles. The main difference, is framestyles control the look of the frame, and textstyles control the look of paragraphs within the frame.

Using the frame settings dialogs

All of these settings can be determined in the Frame Properties dialog box.

In order to adjust the properties of any frame, you must first select the frame you want to change.

Simply click once on the frame border of the frame you want to edit. (Or by holding down the Ctrl key and clicking inside the frame with the left mouse button.)

You edit the properties of a frameset using a set of dialogs which you can open one of two ways:

  • Select Frames->Frame/Frameset Properties from the menubar.
  • Place the mouse pointer on the border of the frame, and click once with the right mouse button. A small menu will appear. Select Frame/Frameset Properties....

The Properties dialog consists of one dialog box, with six index tabs labeled Options, Text Run Around, Connect Text Frames, Geometry, Background and Borders.

The tab labeled Options is used to determine how KWord behaves when there is too much text to fit within the current bounds of the frame.

KWord has three solutions to this situation:

Create a new page

When a frame becomes full, KWord automatically creates a new page. On this new page, it may create a new frame, of the same size and position, if you choose.

Resize last frame

When a frame becomes full, KWord automatically extends the bottom border of the text frame to accommodate the new text. It will continue to expand as new text is added. Conversely, it will shrink again if text is removed from the frame.

Don't show the extra text

KWord does not create a new frame or change the current frame in any way. You will need to manually resize the current frame, or add a new frame to the frame set.

Simply make your selection in the section labeled If Text is Too Long for Frame.

In the section entitled On New Page Creation, you have three options available. You must select one.

Reconnect frame to current flow

Create a new frame, the same size and shape on a new page, and make it the last frame in the frameset.

Do not create a followup frame

Creates a new page, but not a new frame.

Place a copy of this frame

Creates a new page, with a new frame the same size, shape and position on the page. Additionally, KWord copies the contents of the frame from the previous page.
Tip
This is useful for title frames, headers and footer frames. Each page will have an automatic copy of this information on any new pages.

If you place a mark in the check box labeled Changes will be applied to all frames in frameset, then any changes made in the frame properties dialog box will automatically be applied to all frames within the frameset.

If you place a mark in the check box labeled Protect content, KWord will not allow any changes to the text within the frame, or the formatting of the text within the frameset.

Note
You can still reshape or even delete the frame, but the content within the frame is locked. To lock the location and size of the frame, see the Geometry tab.

To make changes to the text, you need to remove the mark from Protect content.

Text Flow around frames

To adjust how text flows around overlapping frames, click the tab labeled Text Run Around.

When you overlay two text frames, and text from both frames is competing for the same space on the page, KWord can (at your option), make sure that text from two frames does not overlap.

As you can see from the options in the dialog box, there are three possible choices.

Text will run through this frame

By selecting this option, KWord will ignore this frame when it displays the text in overlapping frames.

Text will run around the frame

By selecting this option, KWord will wrap the text of overlapping frames around this frame.
If this option is selected, you can determine which side the text runs around in the section labeled Run Around Side. Simply choose Left, Right, or Longest side.

Text will not run around this frame

By selecting this option, KWord will not wrap any text around the edges of this frame, but instead, will skip down below this frame before continuing to display text in overlapping frames.

You can also determine how close your frames appear by setting the Distance Between Frame & Text in the spin boxes provided. If you place a mark in the checkbox labeled Synchronize changes KWord will make all distances equal. Move a frame to a new frameset

You can change which frameset the current frame belongs to by selecting the Connect Text Frames tab.

This dialog gives you the option to create a new frameset for the current frame or move the selected frame to a current frameset.

Select Select existing frameset to connect frame to:, to add the current frame to a previously created frameset. Choose one of the framesets listed in the table below to specify which frameset.

To create a new frameset, select Create a new frameset: and type the name of the new frameset in the text box labeled Name of frameset. KWord will create a new frameset with the current frame as the only frame in the frameset (for now).

Tip
It is helpful to name your framesets with descriptive names. Name the frameset with a description of the contents so that you can quickly refer to it again later.

Frame size and position

You can adjust the size and position of your frame by clicking on the tab labeled 'Geometry.

This dialog box allows you to specify exactly where the frame goes and how large it is.

If you put a mark in the check box labeled Protect size and position, the frame size and position will be fixed at their current location. You will not be able to move the frame on the page until this box is unchecked.

Determine Size and Position

You can locate your frame on the page by first entering the Left: and Top:' measurements. This determines where the top left corner of the frame will be. All measurements are from the top left corner of the page.

You can also determine the exact size of the frame by entering its Height: and Width: in the text boxes provided. These two measurements are relative to the top left corner of the frame you specified above. not to the size of the page.

Determine Margins in the Frame

Using the boxes labeled Left:, Right:, Top: and Bottom:, you can establish margins within the frame. This should not be confused with margins for the page, which are defined in the page properties dialog box.

Tip
If the Synchronize changes check box has a mark in it, KWord will take any changes you make to one margin, and automatically apply them to the other 3 margins.
In other words, if this check box is selected, and you enter a margin of 1 cm in any of the 4 margin boxes, all 4 frame margins will now become 1 cm in size.
If this option is off, each text box can be given a different value.

Frame Background

You can adjust the background color of the text frame by selecting the Background tab.

Select the color of the background by clicking on the button labeled Background color:. The color is selected using the Color selection dialog.

Frame Borders

You can change the borders of the text frame by selecting the Borders tab.

Select the Style: and Width: of the borders with the two drop down boxes on the left side of the dialog.

Select the color of the borders by clicking on the button labeled Color:. The color is selected using the Color selection dialog.

Use the four icons (Border Left, Border Right, Border Top and Border Bottom) below the Color button to determine on which side of the frame you want to have a border.

A Preview of the selected settings is shown on the right side of the dialog.

Click OK to accept all of your changes and to close the dialog box.

Click Apply to accept all of your changes without closing the dialog box.

Click Cancel to forget all of your changes.

Using frame styles

Formatting a frame with a framestyle

To format a frame using a predefined framestyle simply:

Select the frame(s) by holding down Ctrl and clicking within the frame with the left mouse button.

Select Frames->Framestyle from the menubar. A submenu will appear, listing all the currently defined framestyles. Select the name of the framestyle you want and all selected frames will automatically be formatting using the options of that framestyle.

Editing a framestyle

To change the options of a framestyle, you will need to use the framestyle manager.

Select Frames->Frame Style Manager... from the menubar. A dialog box will appear.

All of the currently defined framestyles are listed in the listbox on the left. The currently selected framestyle is highlighted, and the name of the currently selected framestyle is listed in the text box labeled Name. (In this example, the currently selected framestyle is Light Gray.)

Select the framestyle you want to change by clicking on the name of the framestyle in the listbox on the left.

There are three tabs in on the right side of the dialog box: General, Borders and Background

In the General tab, you can change the name of the liststyle by typing the new name in the text box labeled Name. You can also see a preview of what your frame will look like in the preview box.

The Borders tab works the same as the tab of the same name when formatting a paragraph. For more specific information click here.

The Background tab operates identically to the same tab when formatting a frame. Click here for more specific instructions.

Once all changes have been made, click OK to save your changes. All of the affected framesets will be changed to reflect the new options.

Creating a new framestyle

To create a new framestyle, select Frames->Frame Style Manager... from the menubar. A dialog box will appear.

Select a framestyle from the list at the left which most closely matches your new desired framestyle by clicking on the name with the left mouse button. The selected framestyle will be used as a template for the new framestyle.

Click on the New button. KWord will generate a new framestyle, which is a copy of the previously selected framestyle.

Choose a name for your new framestyle, and type it in the text box labeled Name.

You can now change your frame border and background options. For details, see Editing a framestyle.

When you are finished creating your framestyle, click OK, and your framestyle is saved.

Note
Framestyles are specific for each document. A framestyle created in one document can not be used in another document unless you import the framestyle from that document.

Deleting a framestyle

To delete frames, select Frames->Frame Style Manager... from the menubar. A dialog box will appear.

Select the framestyle you want to delete by clicking once with the left mouse button in the list on the left.

Click on the Delete button.

Note
KWord will not allow you to delete the Plain framestyle.

Changing the order of the framestyles in the list

To change the order that the framestyles are listed, select Frames->Frame Style Manager... from the menubar. A dialog box will appear.

The order the framestyles are listed in the menu is determined by the order of the framestyles in the list on the left.

Select the framestyle you want to move from the list at the left by clicking once with the left mouse button.

Now click on the up and down arrows located at the bottom of the list of framestyles. This will move the selected framestyle up or down in the list of framestyles.

When you are satisfied with the order of the list, select OK.

Importing a framestyle from another KWord file

To import a framestyle from another KWord file, select Frames->Frame Style Manager... from the menubar. A dialog box will appear.

Click the button labeled Import From File... to open the file selection dialog. Choose your file, and click OK.

A new dialog box will appear listing all available framestyles for importing.

Tip


If KWord encounters a duplicate framestyle name in the selected file, it will append a number to the end of the framestyle name to identify the imported style.
As an example, if you import the Plain framestyle from another KWord file, KWord will change the name to Plain-1.

Select all the framestyles you want to import. Then click OK.

The framestyles will now appear at the bottom of your list of framestyles. Click OK to save the framestyles to the new document.

Prev Contents Next
Working with Frames Formatting Paragraphs

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Formatting Paragraphs

Mike McBride

This section will detail all the options available to format paragraphs.

To format a paragraph, place the cursor in the paragraph. To format more than one paragraph at a time, simply select the paragraphs with the mouse or keyboard.

You can format one or more paragraphs one of three ways:

  • Select Format->Paragraph... from the menubar
  • Type Alt+Ctrl+P
  • Place the mouse pointer in the paragraph and click once with the right mouse button. A small menu will appear. Select Paragraph....

A dialog will appear.

The Paragraph Settings dialog consists of five tabbed sections labeled Indent and Spacing, General Layout, Borders, Bullets/Numbering, and Tabulators.

Indents and Spaces

With this dialog box the spacing between lines, and the spacing between paragraphs can be specified.

The first section of this dialog box is labeled Indent, and consists of three spin boxes:

Left

Enter a value in this box to indent the lines of the selected paragraphs away from the left margin. The first line is unaffected by this spin box. To alter the first line, specify that value in the spin box labeled First Line.

Right

Enter a value in this spin box to indent all lines of the selected paragraph (including the first line) away from the right margin.

First Line

Enter a number in this spin box to indent the first line of a paragraph away from the left margin.
Tip
Entering a negative value in this spin box will create a hanging indention.

The next section is labeled Line Spacing. It consists of a combo box and a spin box.

The combo box determines the method of calculating the spacing between lines. It has several choices:

Single, 1.5 Lines and Double

If any of these options are selected, the paragraph will have single, 1 and 1/2 or double spacing respectively.

Proportional

If this option is selected, the spin box is enabled. When you enter a number in the spin box, KWord uses that number as a multiplier for line spacing. To look at it another way, if you enter 1.00 in this box, KWord will use single spacing. If you enter 2.00 in this box, KWord will use double spacing. If you enter 3.00 in this box, KWord will use triple spacing, etc. You are not limited to whole numbers. You could enter 1.87 in this box and KWord would use 1.87 line spacing.

Line Distance

If this option is selected, the spin box is enabled. When you enter a number in the spin box, KWord places a measured amount of space between each line. As an example, if you enter 0.75 and the units used by KWord are inches, then KWord will place 0.75 inches between each line.

At least

This sets the minimum line spacing value. This can be useful if you have paragraphs with widely differing font sizes. Typically, KWord calculates the distance between lines by looking at the tallest character in the line. You can use this feature to overide close linespacing in small font paragraphs to make them even with large font paragraphs. KWord will not cause any fonts to overlap using this spacing technique.

Fixed

This sets the distance between the tops of each line to a specific unit of measure. If this option is set too small, KWord will overlap characters, which will obscure the bottom parts of the characters.
This should not be confused with Line Distance which inserts a specific unit of space between lines. Fixed specifies the distance between the top of one line and the top of the next line.

The last section is labeled Paragraph Space. It consists of two entries:

Before

By entering a value here, additional spacing is added before each paragraph.

After

By entering a value here, additional spacing is added after each paragraph.

On the right of the dialog box, is a preview box, which will approximate the final layout of your document.

General Layout

This section determines how the text is placed within the line. With other applications, you may have referred to this simply as alignment, or justification.

Once again, a preview pane is shown on the right side of the dialog box.

In the upper left corner of the dialog box is a section labeled Alignment.

If Left, Right or Center are selected, the text will be moved on the line so that it aligns with the left margin, aligns with the right margin, or is centered between the margins respectively.

If Justify is selected, KWord will increase the space between words, so that each line (with the exception of the last line in a paragraph), reaches both the left and right margins.

Tip
You can use toolbar buttons to quickly change the justification of one or more paragraphs
Button Command
Left Align
Center Align
Right Align
Justify Text

The lower section controls how KWord divides paragraphs when a paragraph will not fit entirely within the current frame or page.

The first option is labeled Keep lines together. If this option is selected, then all of the lines of the paragraph will remain on the same page. If this is not selected, KWord may choose to move part of a paragraph to a new page or frame. For most work, this option is usually left unchecked.

The next two options are labeled Insert Break Before Paragraph and Insert Break After Paragraph. When one of these options is checked, and the paragraph moves to the next frame in the frame set, a hard frame break will be inserted in front of the current paragraph or after the previous paragraph (depending on the option selected). This will serve to keep the paragraph in the next frame, even if text prior to that frame is deleted. This option is often used in conjunction with Keep lines together, to ensure that the paragraph does not creep back onto the page during editing.

Decorations

The next section is used to define the background color of the current paragraphs and configure graphical borders around your paragraphs.

Clicking the color button to the right of Background color: will let you select a color to serve as the background of your paragraph.

KWord can surround (on some or all sides) a paragraph with a border. This border can be solid or not, of any color and of many sizes. This dialog panel is used to adjust the borders.

Style

Use this combo box to select the overall type of the new border. The choices are previewed in each selection.

Width

This will determine how wide the resulting border will be. It is measured in points.

Color

Clicking on the color bar will allow you to select a color using the color selection dialog box.

Now that it is determined how the borders should look, specify which edges of the paragraphs need borders.

Select/Unselect Left Border. Clicking this button will apply the current options to the left paragraph border. Clicking a second time will remove the left paragraph border.
Select/Unselect Right Border. Clicking this button will apply the current options to the right paragraph border. Clicking a second time will remove the right paragraph border.
Select/Unselect Top Border. Clicking this button will apply the current options to the top paragraph border. Clicking a second time will remove the top paragraph border.
Select/Unselect Bottom Border. Clicking this button will apply the current options to the bottom paragraph border. Clicking a second time will remove the bottom paragraph border.
Tip
It is possible to mix and match border styles, widths and colors in one paragraph.
Simply determine the border style, width and color for one border edge, and select the border using the border buttons. Now alter the style width or color to create a new border look and click the new border button.
The Preview window will show you how your paragraph borders will look.

Bullets and Numbering

A very common element of a document, is a list of items. The list contains several elements which may be numbered, for easy reference. Alternatively, the list elements may be simply set off from the rest of the text with a special character preceding each element. These special characters are called bullets.

This dialog box is used to define your bullets or the numbering method of lists in the document. This dialog box can also be used to number chapters and sections.

The top section of the dialog box has three options: None, List and Chapter.

If None is selected, the text is not marked as either a list or a chapter. No other features of this dialog box will alter the text when this option is chosen.

List is used to create lists in the document. These lists are automatically numbered and formatted to appear similar. For more information on lists, see the section entitled Lists.

Chapter is used to number chapters and sections of a document.

Tabulators

This dialog is used to adjust the tab stops. For more details, see Using Tab Stops.

Prev Contents Next
Setting the Properties for a Frame Using Tab Stops

Mike McBride

Tab stops are a (very useful) holdover from the days of typewriters. They allow you to align text into columns quickly and easily.

When a tab stop is in place, you can immediately jump to a horizontal position on the page by pressing the Tab key. Tab stops are most commonly used to align columns in a table, or to automatically indent paragraphs.

Tab stops are part of the properties of a paragraph. Each paragraph keeps track of its own set of tab stops. To view the tab stops of a particular paragraph, place the mouse pointer within a paragraph, click once, and check the top ruler. The tab stops are marked as symbols in black.

KWord recognizes 4 types of tab stops. Each of these types has a corresponding symbol to help you identify the type in the ruler.

Type Example Symbol Description
Right tab stop With a right tab stop, the right edge of the next set of words is aligned at the tab stop.
Center tab stop With a center tab stop, the text is centered at the tab stop.
Left tab stop With a left tab stop, the left edge of the next set of words is aligned at the tab stop.
Decimal tab stop With a decimal tab stop, the decimal points of the text are aligned at the tab stop.

Setting Tab Stops

Tab stops can be set one of two ways:

Using the Ruler

You can use the top ruler of KWord to interactively insert tab stops.

First, you should select the type of tab stop you want to use.

Place the mouse cursor over the current tab character (located directly to the left of the top ruler). Click once with the right mouse button. A small popup menu will appear. You can select the tab stop you want from the sub menu.

Tip
You can also use the left mouse button to cycle through the different types of tab stops.
Click once on the current tab character, and the tab stop changes from left tab stop, to center tab stop. If you continue to click with the left mouse button, you will change to right tab stop, then to decimal tab stop, then back to left tab stop.

Once you have the correct type of tab stop, you can simply place the mouse pointer on the top ruler bar at the desired position, and click once with the left mouse button. This will place a tab stop at that position. Using the Dialog Box

The fastest way to get to the tab stop dialog panel, is to select Format->Paragraph... from the menubar or type Ctrl+Alt+P. This will bring up a dialog box with 5 tabs. Click on the tab labeled Tabulators.

You can now add tab stops by:

1. Click the New button at the bottom of the list of tab stops.
2. Type the horizontal location of the tab stop in the space labeled Position. The units used and the current frame width are listed below the text box.
3. Select the type of tab stop from the list of radio buttons labeled Alignment.
4. Determine what you want to fill the empty space to the tab stop with. In most cases this should be left as Blank. For information on other options in this section, see Tab filling.

You can now add another tab stop. When you are done adding tab stops, you can click OK to finish.

Moving Tab Stops

Tab stops can be moved one of two ways:

  • Using the rulers of KWord
  • Using_the_Dialog_Box|Using a specialized dialog panel.

Using the Ruler

1. To move a tab stop with the ruler, place the mouse over the desired tab stop. The mouse pointer will change to a double arrow.
2. Click and hold down the left mouse button. Drag the tab stop to its new location
3. When the tab stop is where you want it, release the mouse button.

Using the Dialog Box

Select Format->Paragraph... from the menubar or type Ctrl+Alt+P. This will bring up a dialog box with 5 tabs.

Click on the tab labeled Tabulators

A very fast way to edit existing tab stops is to simply double click on the tab stop you want to edit in the top ruler of KWord. This will also bring up the Tabulators dialog box with the desired tab stop already selected.

1. Click on the tab stop you want moved. The list of all tab stops is in the box on the left side of the dialog panel.
2. Type the horizontal location of the tab stop in the space labeled Position. The units used and the current frame width are listed below the text box.
3. If you need to make changes, select the type of tab stop from the list labeled Alignment or change the white space character under Tab Leader.
4. Click OK when you are done moving all tab stops around.

Removing Tab Stops

Tab stops can be removed one of two ways:

  • Using the rulers of KWord
  • Using a specialized dialog panel.

Using the Ruler

1. To delete a tab stop with the ruler, place the mouse over the desired tab stop. The mouse pointer will change to a double arrow.
2. Click and hold down the right mouse button on the mouse. A popup menu will appear. Select Remove Tabulator.

Using the Dialog Box

Select Format->Paragraph... from the menubar or type Ctrl+Alt+P. This will bring up a dialog box with 5 tabs.

Click on the tab labeled Tabulators

A very fast way to edit existing tab stops is to simply double click on the tab stop you want to edit in the top ruler of KWord. This will also bring up the Tabulators dialog box with the desired tab stop already selected.[

1. Click on the tab stop you want removed. The list of all tab stops is in the box on the left side of the dialog panel
2. Click the Delete button.
Note
You can delete all tab stops at once by clicking Delete All.

KWord will not prompt you prior to deleting all tabs, so make sure that is your intention prior to selecting the Delete All button.

When you are done deleting tab stops, you can click OK to finish.


Tab filling

By default, KWord uses the standard tab function that you are familiar with when using a typewriter or most wordprocessing programs. You can, however, have KWord insert dots or lines to fill the tab space.

To change the way the tab fills work in KWord you change the combo box labeled Filling:. This combo box gives you many different line styles to choose from.

You can change the thickness of the lines by using the Width: spin box.

Prev Contents Next
Formatting Paragraphs Formatting Characters

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Formatting Characters

Mike McBride

This section will cover the changes that can be made to individual characters or blocks of characters including:

  • Character size
  • Font
  • Font style (italic, bold, etc).
  • Underlines, superscript, subscript, strikeout, etc.
  • Character color and background color.
  • Character case.


Changing Size, Font, Font Style, Text color and Background Color

Using the Keyboard or toolbars

There are several keyboard shortcuts which you can use to make common changes to character formatting. After selecting the text, you can use these key combinations to toggle each attribute.

The Format toolbar also has buttons which you can use to toggle these same attributes.

The following table details each attribute, the toolbar buttons and the keyboard shortcuts.

Attribute Toolbar Button Key Combo
Font Size
Decrease font size: Ctrl-<

Increase font size: Ctrl->

Font
-
Bold Face
Ctrl-B
Italics
Ctrl-I
Underline
Ctrl-U
Strikethrough
-
Superscript
-
Subscript
-
Font Color
-
Note
You cannot change the all text attributes using the keyboard or a button on a toolbar. For these attributes, you must use the dialog box.

Using the Dialog Box

If you have many changes to make, you can also use a dialog box to set these same attributes.

You can open the Select Font dialog box in one of three ways:

  • Select Format->Font... from the menubar.
  • Click on the selected text with the right mouse button. A small menu will appear. Select Font... from the menu.
  • You can use the keyboard shortcut: Alt-Ctrl-F

Either method will open a dialog box

Using this dialog box, you can select the font, size, italics and boldface options from the top three list boxes.

The preview box along the middle of the dialog, will show you how your current settings will appear.

Tip
If the default preview string is not appropriate, you can change it by clicking once inside the preview box with the left mouse button. A text cursor will appear. You can edit the text to suit your needs.
The sample sentence will revert to the default the next time you open this dialog.

If you click the tab labeled Highlighting, the dialog changes to:

The subsection labeled Underlining: has two combo boxes and a color selector box. In the left most combo box select between no underline (None), Single, Simple Bold, Double or Wave underlining.

Use the center combo box to select the style of underlining (Solid line, dashed line, etc.).

Use the right color selector box to select a color for the underline using the color selection dialog box.

The subsection labeled Strikethrough: has two combo boxes. Use the left combo box to select between no strikethrough (None), Single, Double or Simple Bold strikethrough. Use the right combo box to select the line style.

The checkbox labeled Word by word determines how underlining and strikethrough are drawn.

The section labeled Capitalization lets you select one of four special capitalization options. This will change the capitalization of the selected text. Examples of each scheme are shown below.

Note
The changes to capilalization will only affect the selected text at the current moment. This formatting is not enforced after closing the dialog box.

The third tab labeled Decoration allows you to change the color of the font, change the background color and create artificial shadows for your characters. Click on the tab:

Using the buttons labeled Text color: and Background color: you can change the color of the text or the background behind the text.

To create the illusion of a shadow behind your text, select the color you want your shadow by clicking the button labeled Shadow color:. Then select the distance between the shadow and the text using the spin box labeled Shadow & distance:. Finally, select the direction of your shadow by selecting one of the eight red squares. A preview of your shadow appears at the bottom of the dialog box.

The fourth tab labeled Layout allows you to create superscripts and subscripts. It also lets you select automatic hyphenation on a character by character basis.

The section labeled Position has four radio buttons and two spin boxes. SelectingNormal, produces text of normal height and at the normal vertical position. Selecting Superscript or Subscript will convert the currently selected text. If you select Custom, you can use the spin box labeled Offset: to move the selected text up or down relative to normal text alignment. Look at the example below:

Notice how a positive offset raises the text, and a negative offset lowers the text.

You can also use the spinbox labeled Relative size: to make the selected font larger or smaller.

The checkbox labeled Auto hyphenation is used to toggle automatic hyphenation on or off for the selected text.

The fifth tab labeled Language allows you to change the language. Click on the tab:

You can select the language to use on the selected text with the drop down box. If the selected text allows for automatic hyphenation, KWord will use general rules of spelling for the selected language to automatically hyphenate the selected text.

Clicking OK will commit your changes to the document and close the dialog box.

Clicking Apply will commit your changes to the document but keep the dialog box open.

Clicking Reset will restore the default settings to the selected text.

Clicking Cancel will abort all changes made.

Changing Font Case

KWord can change the case (uppercase or lowercase) of large blocks of text to one of five pre-defined styles. Begin by selecting the block of text you want changed. Select Tools->Change Case... from the menubar.

A small dialog box will appear with five options:

Uppercase

Will convert all characters to uppercase.
Example: KWORD WILL AUTOMATICALLY CHANGE CASES.

Lowercase

Will convert all characters to lowercase.
Example: kword will automatically change cases.

Title case

Will capitalize every word.
Example: Kword Will Automatically Change Cases.

Toggle case

Converts all lowercase letters to uppercase and converts all uppercase letters to lowercase.

Sentence case

Capitalizes the first character after a period.

When you have selected the desired options click OK and KWord will make the changes.

Prev Contents Next
Using Tab Stops Text Styles

Mike McBride

Introduction to text styles

When you build documents that are more complex than a business letter, such as a book, newsletter, or resumé, the document is often broken down into sections. Each of these sections may have a similar appearance.

You can use text styles to easily keep a consistent look throughout your document.

Tip
If you are familiar with Styles in Microsoft® Word, KWord text styles perform similar functions in KWord. You can skip to the next section.

Lets look at a section of a document and try to identify appropriate text styles:

In this example, you can see several different text styles at work:

  • The title is centered, underlined and in bold text
  • The section title (Income) is boldfaced.
  • The caption for figure 1-1 is smaller than normal text and boldface.
  • The rest of the document is in a standard font.

We do not need to know exactly how we want the text and paragraphs of these sections to look yet. All we need to do is identify these sections of text as “Section Titles”, “Normal Text”, etc.

Once we have finished the document, you can change the look of all the text labeled “Section Title” all at once.

This will ensure that all section titles appear consistent throughout your document.

KWord has 8 predefined text styles.

Note
Text styles should not be confused with table styles or frame styles.
Text styles determine how the characters and paragraphs appear. Framestyles, control the borders and background color for the frame. Tablestyles determine how tables appear in the finished document.

Changing the text style of text

To change the text style of text, first, select the text you want the changes to apply to.

You can now change the text style in one of two ways:

  • Select Format->Style from the menubar. This will show the list of available text styles, select the text style from the list.
  • You can select the text style using the combo box on the Paragraph toolbar. This combo box looks like this:

Simply select the new text style from the list provided.

Tip
You can change the text style of an entire paragraph. Simply place the cursor in a paragraph (making sure that no characters are selected) and select a new style. Every character in the paragraph will be converted to the new text style.

Creating a text style

If you plan on using text styles extensively in a large document, you will probably want to create new text styles specific for your needs.

There are two ways to create a new text style:

1. Create a text style based on another text style using a dialog.
2. Format a block of text to the desired format, then create a text style based on that text.

Creating a new text style based on a current text style

To create a new text style select Format->Style Manager... from the menubar.

This will bring up a dialog box.

In the list box on the left, is a list of all the currently defined text styles. Select the current style that most closely resembles the new text style. Click on that text style once with the left mouse button.

Click the New button.

KWord will create a new text style based on the selected text style. It will assign it a temporary name [New Style Template (8)].

Type a descriptive name in the box labeled Name. This will be the name of the text style.

The rest of the dialog is used to make the alterations needed to create the new text style.

The preview box will show you what your new text style will look like.

Use the tabs labeled Font, Indent & Spacing, General Layout, Decorations, Bullets/Numbers, and Tabulators, to format the text style.

Click OK to create your new text style.

Click Cancel to abort the creation of the text style.

Changing the Font Size, Type etc.

The tab labeled Font is used to set the font type, font style, formatting, etc.

This tab functions identically to the change font dialog used to edit general text. Changes to this tab affect to all text formated with this text style.

Changing Paragraph Spacing and Indents

The tab labeled Indents & Spacing is used to adjust spacing between lines, and paragraph indentation.

This tab functions identically to the same tab in the Format Paragraph dialog. Changes to this tab affect to all text formated with this text style.

Changing Paragraph Alignment

The tab labeled General Layout determines how the text is placed within the line. With other applications, you may have referred to this as Alignment, or Justification.

This tab functions identically to the same tab in the Format Paragraph dialog. Changes to this tab affect to all text formated with this text style.

Changing Paragraph Borders

The tab labeled Decorations is used to define and configure graphical borders around your paragraphs.

This tab functions identically to the same tab in the Format Paragraph dialog. Changes to this tab affect to all text formated with this text style.

Changing Paragraph Numbering/Bullets

The tab labeled Bullets/Numbers is used to make all text formatted with this text style into a list.

This tab functions identically to the same tab in the Format Paragraph dialog. For more information see the section entitled Lists.

Changing Tab-stops.

Using the tab labeled Tabulators it is possible to define tab stops for the new text style.

This tab functions identically to the same tab in the Format Paragraph dialog. For more information see the section entitled Using Tab Stops.

Creating a text style based on formatted text

If you have text that is already formatted correctly for a new text style:

1. Select the text and select Format->Create Style From Selection... from the menubar.
2. KWord will prompt you for a name for your text style. Enter the name in the text box.
3. Click the OK button.

A new text style is created with the font, paragraph spacing, paragraph alignment, borders and shadows of the currently selected text.

Note
Future formatting changes to this selected text will not automatically change the text style you just created. If you want the changes to become part of the text style, you must edit the text style.

Deleting a text style

Deleting an unneeded text style is easy.

Select Format->Style Manager... from the menubar.

This will bring up a dialog box.

From the list of available text styles, select the style you want to delete by clicking once with the left mouse button.

Warning
Be sure you have selected the correct text style before you click Delete. KWord will not ask for confirmation, so you will not be given an opportunity to back out.

Click Delete.

The text style is now deleted.

Editing a text style

The true power of text styles, is the ability to edit the formatting options of that text style after the text style is defined. By changing the formatting of the text style, KWord will immediately change every paragraph with that text style, and maintain a consistent look to the document.

KWord uses the same interfaces to edit the formatting options of a text style, that it used to create the text style in the first place.

To edit a current text style:

Select Format->Style Manager... from the menubar.

This will bring up a dialog box.

Select the text style you want to edit from the list on the left by clicking once with the left mouse button. Now you can make the changes you want to this text style.

The preview box will show you what your new text style will look like.

Warning
Do not change the name of your text style.
Doing so will delete your current text style from the list (and create a new one with the new name).
Any paragraphs which were originally formatted with this text style, will revert to “Standard”.

Use the tabs labeled Font, Indent & Spacing, General Layout, Decorations, Bullets/Numbers, and Tabulators, to alter the look of the text style.

Click OK to commit your changes.

Click Cancel to abort all changes to this text style.

Import a text style

KWord has the ability to import a text style from one KWord document and include it in the list of text styles in another KWord document.

To import a text style, select Format->Import Style... from the menubar.

This will bring up an empty dialog box.

Click on the Load button. This will bring up a file selection dialog. Choose the KWord file you want to import the text style from and click OK.

The dialog box will now fill with all available text text styles available for import.

Tip
If KWord encounters a duplicate text style name in the selected file, it will append a number to the end of the text style name to identify the imported style.
As an example, if you import the Standard text style from another KWord file, KWord will change the text style name to Standard-1.

Select all the text style you want to import. Then click OK.


Prev Contents Next
Formatting Characters Columns

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Columns

Mike McBride

You can divide the page into several columns, of equal width, with a user controlled space in between each column.

Note
This feature is only available in Text Oriented documents.
If you are working in a Page Layout document, you can build up several columns using a different frame for each column.

To change the number and width of columns select Format->Page Layout... from the menubar.

This will bring up a dialog box.

Click on the tab labeled Columns.

This will change the dialog box.

You can now select the number of columns in the spin box labeled Columns:, and the spacing between columns in the text box labeled Column spacing:.

The preview box shows you what your page will look like.

Click OK when you are done.

Click Cancel to abort changes.

Prev Contents Next
Text Styles Lists

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Lists

Mike McBride

KWord has a simple and flexible list creation system. Using the same interface, KWord can create bulleted or enumerated lists of nearly any depth. For easy, simple lists, KWord offers a toolbar button for both enumerated and bulleted lists.

An enumerating style is a series of letters or numbers which proposes an order or hierarchy within the list. Bullets simply mark the item as part of the list and usually consist of a symbol or shape.

Simple lists

To quickly create a single level list, KWord provides two toolbar buttons.

To create a simple enumerated list, simply select from the paragraph toolbar. A small menu will list different enumerated list styles. Select the appropriate style and the selected paragraphs are converted into a list of that style.

To create a simple bulleted list, select from the paragraph toolbar. A small menu will list different bulleted list styles. Select the appropriate style and the selected paragraphs are converted into a bulleted list of that style.

Tip
You are still able to make changes to the list styles by using the dialog.

Complex lists

All complex list formatting is done through the Paragraph Settings dialog. To get to the Paragraph Settings dialog you can:

  • Select Format->Paragraph... from the menubar
  • Type Alt+Ctrl+P
  • Place the mouse pointer in the paragraphs that will become the list and click once with the right mouse button. A small menu will appear. Select Paragraph....

A dialog will appear. To find the tab specific to lists, click once on the tab labeled Bullets/Numbers.

List type

To format the selected text as a list, select the radio button labeled List from the top section of the dialog box.

There is a list of five bullets types and five enumerating styles along the left side of the dialog box. Select the desired list style from the list on the left.

Changing the look of the list

The text box labeled Prefix text: allows the user to add text before the enumeration or bullet.

The text box labeled Suffix text: allows the user to add text after the enumeration or bullet.

For example: If “Step” is typed into the Prefix text: box, and “-” is typed into the Suffix text: text box, the list will look like this:

Step 1 - Place 1 cup of flour in a large mixing bowl.

Step 2 - Add 1/4 tablespoon of yeast.

Step 3 - ....


If an enumerated list style is selected, the starting number/letter for the list can be set in the spin box labeled Start at:. If you have selected a bulleted list style, this box will be inactive.

Multi-level lists

The spin box labeled ===Depth:=== is used to add subsections to your list. By selecting a depth greater than one, you are adding a subsection to the list.

Example of a multilevel enumerated list:

An example of a multilevel bulleted list:


Adjust the depth setting to determine where in the list this text occurs.

By adjusting the spin box labeled Display levels: you can determine if previous levels are displayed. For example, with a list where Depth: is set to three and Display levels: is set to one might be:

i. This is a step

ii. This is another step

If you change the Display levels: to two, it would change to:

A.i. This is a step

A.ii. This is another step

You can always refer to the preview section of the dialog for an example of how your list will look.

Custom Bullets

If you select Custom Bullet from the list of styles, you can click on the button labeled Custom character: to choose the letter or symbol you want for your bulleted list.

Restart new list

If you select the checkbox labeled Restart numbering at this paragraph KWord will start numbering your list at the beginning.

Multiple paragraphs in one list element

Each new paragraph represents a new list element. Sometimes, however, it will be desirable to have multiple paragraphs on a single list element. This is accomplished by inserting a New Line character instead of a Paragraph Break.

To insert a New Line, type Shift+Return.

Prev Contents Next
Columns Headers and Footers

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Headers/Footers

Mike McBride

Introduction

With multi-page documents, you might want to provide certain information at the top or bottom of each page throughout the document. Headers or footers can provide the reader with important information and they tie your documents together visually.

Headers and footers are special frames. You can edit the text and data within the headers and footers just as you would any other text frame. What makes headers and footers different from most other frames in KWord is that they are automatically created at the top and bottom of each page.

Note
Headers and footers are only available when using text oriented templates.

Using headers and footers

You can toggle headers and footers on and off independently at any time.

You can toggle the headers by selecting Format->Enable/Disable Document Headers from the menubar.

You can toggle the footers by selecting Format->Enable/Disable Document Footers from the menubar.

The footers will be added below the margins you set under page setup. The text within the main frames will be moved so the headers and/or footers do not overlap any text.

Since headers and footers are simply text frames that are placed on each page, you can use all of the tools and techniques you are familiar with to create your header and footer information.

For more information on options for headers and footers, see the section on Formatting the page.

For information on page numbers see the section on Page Numbering.

For information on formatting the frame, see the section on Setting the Properties for a Frame.

For an example of how to place the page numbers on the outside of even and odd pages, see the How do I? section.

Prev Contents Next
Lists Creating, Saving and Deleting Templates

Mike McBride

KWord comes with several predefined templates (both Page Layout and Text Oriented templates), which are designed to provide initial formatting of documents.

If, however, the same format for a custom document is used over and over, KWord can create a template which more exactly matches the needs of the document.

An unlimited number of templates can be created in KWord, and they can be organized into categories for easy recall.

Creating a new template

Templates are created by first generating the layout in KWord based on one of the predefined templates, and then saving the file. Instead of saving it as a traditional file, it is saved as a template.

What follows, is a step by step process to save the current document as a template.

1. When the document is a completed template, Select File->Create Template From Document... from the menubar.
     This brings up a dialog:
This dialog helps organize the templates into groups (categories).
2. Select the group to place the new template into.
Note
To create a new group to place templates in, simply click the button labeled Add Group. A dialog box will appear asking for the name of the new group. Click OK and the new group is created.
3. Type in a name for the template in the text box labeled Name.
4. Select the icon for your new template by using the radio buttons on the right
KWord has a default icon, which is shown below both options.
To change the icon, select Custom and a dialog box will appear. Simply select the desired icon using the dialog box. Click OK when the icon is selected.
5. Click OK.

Once you have saved the template, the next time you open a document, your new category/new template will appear in the open file dialog. Removing a template

To delete a template, follow these steps:

1. Select File->Create Template From Document... from the menubar.
This will bring up a dialog
2. Click on the small plus sign (+) in front of the template group where the template can be found.
3. Click once on the template name
4. Click on the button labeled Remove.
5. A small dialog box will appear verifying that you do intend to delete the template. Simply click Yes.

The template is now deleted.

Removing a template group

To delete a group of templates, follow these steps:

1. Select File->Create Template From Document... from the menubar.
This will bring up a dialog
2. Click once on the group name
3. Click on the button labeled Remove.
4. A small dialog box will appear verifying that you do intend to delete the group of templates. Simply click Yes.

The group and all of the templates within the group are now deleted.

Prev Contents Next
Headers and Footers Entering Document Information

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Detailed Guides: More than just text

Introduction

Up to this point in the documentation, we have been focusing on text. That is about to change!

This chapter will discuss inserting a table of contents, graphics, page numbers, links to web pages and how to insert other types of KOffice data into a document.

This chapter will also cover document information and its relationship to document variables.

Entering Document information

KWord can store information about the author and the document in the same file as the text and data of the document.

Entering this information into KWord has two potential benefits:

1. This information will always be available for reference. This is especially important in situations where there are many possible authors (employees) and hundreds (or thousands) of documents.
2. The information supplied here, can be inserted automatically into the document as a document variable.

To enter document information, simply select File->Document Information... from the menubar. This will bring up a dialog box with two tabs.

The first tab is labeled General. Enter a document Title, Subject lines, Keywords and an Abstract.

The bottom of this page displays the Type of the document, the date of the creation and modification, the last printing date, the Total editing time and the Revision number. Click on Reset to clear all data and set the actual date as creation date.

Tip
Both the document Title and the Abstract can be accessed through document variables.

The second tab is labeled Author and has blanks to enter the authors Name, Initials, Title, Position, Company and contact information (email address, telephone numbers and physical address).

Tip
Every value entered in this dialog can be inserted as a document variables.

At the bottom of the dialog is a button labeled Load From Address Book. Clicking on this button will automatically insert your information contained in the KDE address book into this KWord document information dialog.

Note
You must inform the KDE address book which entry corresponds to your information.
To do this, open the KDE address book, select the entry that contains your name and address. Now select Edit->Set as Personal Contact Data from the menubar in the KDE address book. This only needs to be performed once.

KWord will now insert the entered information when the Load From Address Book button is clicked.

The second button Delete Personal Data allows you to remove all data of the entries on this page.

When finished entering the information, click OK to apply the changes. If any document variables were changed, KWord will update their values throughout the document.

Prev Contents Next
Create, Save and Delete Templates Handling Graphics

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Graphics

Mike McBride

KWord is very good at handling textual information. KWord can also be used to incorporate graphical images with text.

Tip
A source of great clipart that is free to use is the Open Clip Art Library. This project has a large collection of vector graphics indexed and sorted by category, all released into the public domain.

Pictures can be inserted into a document as either framed or inline images.

Framed images are pictures that have a frame around them. The frame around a picture functions exactly the same as a frame around text. It contains the picture and determines the size and shape of the picture.

An inline image has a frame around it, but this frame is inserted within the current text frame. If text is inserted in front of the picture, the picture travels down the frame just like any text would. This means the picture will stay in the same area of the page as the text that surrounds it.

Framed pictures, on the other hand, need to be moved by hand on the page.

KWord can use pictures already stored in a file or acquire an image from a scanner.

Insert Graphics from a file

There are three ways to insert a picture into a document:

  • By selecting Insert->Picture... from the menubar
  • Using the keyboard shortcut: Shift+F5
  • or by clicking on the toolbar.

All three methods open a file selection dialog.

Use this dialog to select the picture.

Tip
Pressing Esc at this point will cancel the insertion of a picture into your document.

Once the appropriate picture file is located, click on the filename once with the left mouse button. Click OK to continue.

A new dialog box appears.

The right half of this dialog box contains a preview window. The picture should be visible in this window.

The left part of this box contains one button and two check boxes.

Choose Picture...

Click this button and KWord will open a new file dialog to choose a different picture.

Insert Picture Inline

If there is a mark in this check box, the picture will be an inline picture. If there is no mark, a new frame will be created. For details on the differences, see the introduction.

Retain original aspect ratio

Aspect ratio is defined in the KWord glossary.
If a there is a mark in this check box, KWord will not allow any change the aspect ratio of the picture. This prevents inappropriate stretching and compressing of the image. It will still be possible to change the overall size of the image, but it will not be possible to change the horizontal measurement without also changing the vertical measurement.
If there is no mark in this check box, the horizontal and vertical sizes of the picture can be changed independently.

To insert the picture, click OK. To abort the picture entirely, click Cancel.

If an inline picture was selected, click with the mouse in the appropriate location. The picture will be inserted.

If a framed picture was selected, the mouse cursor will change to crosshairs. Locate one corner of the location of the new picture frame with the mouse. Click and hold the left mouse button down. Drag the cursor to adjust the size of the picture frame. When the size of the picture frame is correct, release the left mouse button. KWord will insert the picture into the frame, and resize the picture to fit within the frame.

Using a picture from a scanner

Note
A complete discussion of how to operate a scanner is beyond the scope of this documentation. This document will confine itself to the controls available in KWord but will not go into detail on the use of these controls.

To use a scanner to insert a picture into your kword document, begin by selecting Insert->Scan Image... from the menubar.

KWord will open a dialog box for you to choose your scanner. Simply click on the radio button to the left of your scanner. Then click OK. This will bring up the scanning dialog:

You should begin by selecting the image type that you want to scan and the resolution. First determine the picture type using the drop down box labeled Scan Mode. You can choose between Color, Greyscale or Binary image.

If you want to select a different scanner, click the Source... button.

If you have selected a Binary image, you can use the drop down box labeled Halftoning to select your halftone protocol.

Select your resolution using the drop down box labeled Resolution

Now place the object you want to scan in the scanner and click Preview Scan. Your scanner will take a low resolution scan and preview it in the window in the far right of the dialog

Using your mouse, click on the upper left corner of he area you want to scan with the left mouse button and hold the button down. Drag the mouse down and to the right to create a box for a high-resolution scan. When you have an appropriate sized box, release the left mouse button. Once the box is drawn, you can adjust the selection box using the mouse.

You can refer to the box to the left of the preview window labeled Selection. This box will show you the height and width of your selection and the amount of disk space you will need to store this image in the KWord file.

Once you are satisfied with the size and position of the selection box, click Final Scan. The scanner will scan the selected area at the resolution you selected.

When the scanner is finished, click Close to close the dialog box. Your cursor will now be crosshairs. Using this cursor, draw the size and position you want your picture on the page. The scanned image will be inserted in a separate frame. You can now adjust the size of the picture by changing the size of the frame

Adjusting the image prior to final scanning

You can use the lower left part of this dialog to adjust your image prior to scanning.

By moving the slider bar labeled Threshold you can adjust the cutoff point of white in the scanned image.

By moving the slider bars labeled Brightness and Sharpness you can adjust the relative brightness and the sharpness of the scanned image.

Note
The preview window will not show you the effects of changes to your scanned image in the preview window.

You can select from one of three pre-defined gamma tables or you can select the User defined option from the drop down box labeled Use custom gamma table. If you selected User defined you can click the Edit... to alter the Brightness, Contrast and Gamma for your customized gamma table.

Adjusting the preview scan size

If you know the size of the object you are scanning, you can select the preview area from the drop-down box labeled Scan size. You can also use the radio buttons labeled Landscape and Portrait to change the orientation of the preview area.

Note
Changing the orientation between portrait and landscape does not change the orientation of the scanned text or image.

Using auto-selection

KWord can try to automatically select the object you want to scan. It does this by looking for an area within the preview window that seems to define an object in the picture. By default this option is disabled. You can enable autoselection in this dialog.

The autoselection area of the dialog is located just to the left of the preview window in the middle of the dialog box. It consists of three controls:

Checkbox

If a mark is placed in the checkbox, auto-selection is enabled. If there is no mark in the checkbox, then auto-selection is disabled.

Drop down box

This drop down box contains two possible choices: Black and White. If Black is chosen, then KWord will look for an area surrounded by black to select automatically. If White is chosen, then KWord will look for an area surrounded by white to select automatically.

Slider bar labeled Threshold

By adjusting this slider bar, you determine the threshold auto-selection uses to determine the area to select automatically.

Miscellaneous scanning options

There are two additional options for scanning that are accessed by clicking on the Options tab.

The checkbox labeled Ask for the scan device on plugin startup toggles the scanner selection dialog on and off. If there is a mark in this checkbox, KWord will ask you to select your scanner each time you insert a scanned image into your document. If there is no mark, then KWord uses the previously selected scanner. If you have access to only one scanner, or you only use one scanner, you should remove any mark from this box.

The checkbox labeled Query the network for scan devices is also used to select scanners. If there is a mark in this checkbox, KWord will check your local network for scanners that are available. If there is no mark in this box, KWord will only look for scanners connected directly to your machine.

To save these options, click Close.

Changing the size of a picture

Resizing a picture is done by changing the size of the frame that surrounds it. KWord will automatically change the picture to fill the entire frame.

For information on changing the size of a frame, see Resizing frames.

Move Pictures

The only way to move an inline image around on the page, is to alter the flow of the text that surrounds it. If this is causing problems, the picture can always be changed to a framed picture.

To move a framed picture in KWord is the same as moving any frame in KWord.

Delete Graphics

To delete a graphic in KWord, simply delete the frame around it.

Saving Graphic in separate file

You can save a picture or graph to a separate file (for use in another document or to archive the graphic).

Simply click once on the graphic with the right mouse button. A popup menu will appear. Select Save Picture.... A dialog will appear that will allow you to specify where to save the graphic.

Note
This does not remove the picture from the KWord document file. It is simply a way to extract a picture from a document so it can be archived or used in another application.

Switching between inline and framed pictures

Switching between inline pictures and framed pictures is easy in KWord.

Change an inline picture to a framed picture

To change in inline picture to a framed picture, click on the desired picture with the left mouse button once. This selects the frame of the picture.

Now click and hold with the right mouse button and a popup menu will appear. In this menu, is an item labeled Inline Frame, with a mark in front of it. Select this option by clicking with the left mouse button.

The frame is now an independent and can be moved around freely.

Change a framed picture to an inline picture

To change a framed picture into an inline picture, click on the desired picture with the left mouse button once. This selects the frame of the picture.

Now click and hold with the right mouse button and a popup menu will appear. In this menu, is an item labeled Inline Frame. Select this option by clicking with the left mouse button.

KWord has now converted this to an inline frame.

Note
KWord tries to make a reasonable estimation of where in the text the inline image should be inserted.
Prev Contents Next
Entering Document Information Table of Contents

Mike McBride

When writing a large document, it is useful to include a table of contents. This can be done automatically with KWord.

To begin creating a table of contents KWord needs to know what to include in the table of contents. The first part of this chapter describes how to prepare the document to generate an accurate table of contents.

The second part of this section, discusses the actual generation and updating of the table of contents.

The final part of this section provides pointers on changing the look of the table of contents.

Preparing the document

KWord uses a style-based method of creating table of contents entries.

For more information on styles, see the Styles section of this documentation.

To mark each level of the document, use the paragraph styles Head 1, Head 2 and Head 3.

Major subjects should be marked with the Head 1 style.

Sub-headings under the Head 1 subjects should be marked with Head 2.

Sub-headings under the Head 2 subject headings should be marked with Head 3

Once this is done, proceed to the next section.

Creating the table of contents

To create the table of contents is easy. Simply place the cursor in a text frame where the table of contents should be inserted.

Select Insert->Table of Contents from the menubar.

KWord locates all entries labeled with the appropriate paragraph styles, and their corresponding page numbers. It assembles this into the table of contents.


Note
Once the table of contents is created, it will remain unchanged until KWord is instructed to update it.
To update the table of contents, click once with the left mouse button in the current table of contents. Then select Insert->Update Table of Contents from the menubar.
KWord will replace the old table of contents with a newly updated one.

Changing the look of the table of contents.

The look of the table of contents is also adjusted by using the paragraph styles in KWord.

The table of contents title is formated with the Contents Title paragraph style. All major subject headings (those marked with the Head 1 style), are now formatted using Contents Head 1 paragraph style. All sub-headings (those marked with the Head 2 style), are now formatted using Contents Head 2 paragraph style. Finally, all sub-headings (those marked with the Head 3 style), are now formatted using Contents Head 3 paragraph style.

By changing the look of those three styles, the appearance of the table of contents can be radically changed.

Prev Contents Next
Handling Graphics Document Variables

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Document Variables

Mike McBride

Introduction

A variable is a simple way of allowing KWord to modify the document in very specific ways to reflect the changing nature of the document or report.

A variable can be a number (such as a page number, the total number of pages in a document, etc), a selection of words (clients name, product name, the documents filename, etc), a date, a time, or nearly anything you desire.

Once the variable is defined, a placeholder is inserted in the document. KWord will replace this placeholder with the value of that variable each time the placeholder is used.

Variables can either be fixed (which means that once inserted, their value does not change), or variable (where the placeholder is updated by KWord to reflect the current value of the variable).

This chapter will begin with a few examples of commonly used variables (date, time, and page numbers), then detail the remaining variables available to you. Finally, it will detail how to create custom variables for documents.

Date and Time

Many letters, reports and documents contain information about the dates or times they correspond to. The date and time information may establish the creation of a document (which will remain fixed as long as the document is around), or the date and time may serve as a notice of the last date of modification (which would change with each passing day).

KWord allows for both fixed and variable date and time variables in the document.

Insert Date

To insert the date in the document, simply place the cursor in the text box where the date should be inserted and select Insert->Variable->Date from the menubar. This will bring up several selections. To insert the current date, select one of two options: Current date (fixed) and Current date (variable).

Current date (fixed)

Selecting this option will insert the current date into the current cursor position. This date is determined by checking with the computers system clock. Once entered, this value will not change, even when KWord is asked to update the document variables.
This item is ideal for dates of document creation, or when including data in a report from todays work. Compare this choice to Current date (variable).

Current date (variable)

Selecting this option will insert the current date into the current cursor position. This date is determined by checking with the computers system clock. This value will change when KWord is asked to update the document variables.
This option is good for any point in the document where the current date is always wanted. Compare this choice to Current date (fixed).

Once the date has been selected, a dialog box will appear.

The top combo box determines the layout of the variable. Your choices are:

Locale date format

This inserts the date in the format specified in the KDE Control Center.
To select this option, simply make sure the upper combo box says Locale date format. A preview of the date format will appear above the OK button. If satisfied click OK.

Preformatted date strings

KWord comes with 19 predefined date strings. These predefined strings will be all that are needed in most circumstances. Simply select the predefined string in the upper combo box. A preview of the date format will appear above the OK button. If satisfied click OK.

Custom String

If the appropriate format for the date cannot be found, it is possible to create custom date format strings.
A date format string consists of a list of letters and numbers which follow specific rules (which are outlined below) to create the completed date.
The date format string consists of placeholders and separators. The placeholders are defined in the following three tables.
Days
Day placeholders d dd ddd dddd
Example 6 06 Thu Thursday
Months
Month placeholders M MM MMM MMMM
Example 3 03 Mar March
Year
Year placeholders yy yyyy
Example 02 2002
Simply combine placeholders with normal text (separators) to create completed date strings.
For example:
“MM/dd/yyyy” is translated to 01/06/2004
and
“MMMM d, yyyy” becomes January 6, 2004
Notice that only the placeholders change. Spaces, commas, slashes and other text remains unchanged.
Note
It is important to remember that placeholders are case sensitive. “DD” is not a placeholder, only “dd”.
To create a custom date string, place a mark in the Custom check box.
Now type placeholders and separators text into the upper combo box. Alternatively select the format from the Insert: combo box, and the placeholder will be inserted into the date format string at the cursor location.

There is a spinbox labeled Correct in Days. You can use this spin box to adjust the date up or down one or more days from the current date.

A preview of the current date string is visible above the OK button. Click OK when the date format string is correct to insert the variable into the document.

Tip
Once the date has been inserted into the document, it can be reformatted to a different layout and toggled between fixed and variable dates. Simply click once with the right mouse button on the date. A small menu will appear. Select Change Variable To and a submenu will appear. Select your new variable or new layout from the menu and the variable is immediately updated.

There are three additional dates you can insert into your document:

Date of Last Printing

Selecting this option will insert the date this document was last printed into the current cursor position.

Date of File Creation

Selecting this option will insert the date this document created into the current cursor position.

Date of File Modification

Selecting this option will insert the date this document was last edited into the current cursor position.

Insert Time

To insert the time in the document, simply place the cursor in the text box where the time should be inserted and select Insert->Variable->Time from the menubar. This will bring up two selections: Current time (fixed) and Current time (variable).

Current time (fixed)

Selecting this option will insert the current time into the current cursor position. This time is determined by checking with the computers system clock. Once entered, this value will not change, even when KWord is asked to update the document variables.
This item is ideal for timestamps. Compare this choice to Current time (variable).

Current time (variable)

Selecting this option will insert the current time into the current cursor position. This time is determined by checking with the computers system clock. This value will change when KWord is asked to update the document variables.
This option is good for any point in your document where the current time is always wanted. Compare this choice to Current time (fixed)

This brings up a dialog box.

400

The top combo box determines the layout of the variable. The choices are:

Locale format

This inserts the time in the format specified in the KDE Control Center.
To select this option, simply make sure the upper combo box says Locale format. A preview of the current time string is visible above the OK button. If satisfied click OK.

Preformatted time strings

KWord comes with 6 predefined time strings. These predefined strings will be all that are needed in most circumstances. Simply select the predefined string in the upper combo box. A preview of the current time string is visible above the OK button. If satisfied click OK

. Custom String

If the appropriate format cannot be found, a custom time format string can be created.
A time format string consists of a list of letters and numbers which follow specific rules (which are outlined below) to create the completed time.
The time format string consists of placeholders and separators. The placeholders are defined in the following five tables.
Hours
Hour placeholders h hh
Example 6 06
Minutes
Minutes placeholders m mm
Example 3 03
Seconds
Seconds placeholders s ss
Example 2 02
Milliseconds
Milliseconds placeholders zzz
Example 022
Periods
AM/PM placeholders ap AP
Example am AM
Simply combine placeholders with normal text (separators) to create completed time strings.
For example:
“hh:mm:ss” becomes 06:23:13
and
“h:mm ap” becomes 6:23 am
Notice that only the placeholders change. Spaces, colons and other text remains unchanged.
Note
It is important to remember that placeholders are case sensitive. “HH” is not a placeholder, only “hh”
To create a custom time string, place a mark in the Custom check box.
Type the placeholders and separator text into the upper combo box. Alternatively, you can select the format from the Insert: combo box, and the placeholder will be inserted into the time format string at the cursor location.
A preview of the current time string is visible below the Custom check box. Click OK when the time format string is correct to insert the variable into your document.

A preview of the current time string is visible below the Custom check box. Click OK when the time format string is correct to insert the variable into your document.

Tip

Once the time has been inserted into the document, it can be reformatted to a different layout and toggled between fixed and variable times. Simply click once with the right mouse button on the time in the document. A small menu will appear. Select Change Variable To and a submenu will appear. Select your new variable or new layout from the menu and the variable is immediately updated.

Page Numbering

Inserting page numbers is easy in KWord.

There are five variables that relate to page numbers: Page Number, Number of Pages,Section. TitleNext Page, and Previous Page.

To insert the current page number, place the cursor where you want the page number and select Insert->Variable->Page->Page Number from the menubar. The page number will be inserted at the current cursor location.

To insert the total number of pages, place the cursor where you want the variable and select Insert->Variable->Page->Number of Pages from the menubar. The total number of pages will be inserted.

To insert the title of the section, place the cursor where you want the variable and select Insert->Variable->Page->Section Title from the menubar. The section title will be inserted.

By selecting Insert->Variable->Page->Next Page from the menubar, a reference to the page number after the current page will be inserted at the current cursor location.

Likewise, by selecting Insert->Variable->Page->Previous Page from the menubar, a reference to the page number before the current page will be inserted at the current cursor location.

Note
Page numbers are updated dynamically as the document is edited.
Tip
Page numbers are usually best located within headers and footers. This ensures that every page will have a page number at the appropriate place.

Section Title

You can insert the section title anywhere in your document by selecting Insert->Variable->Page->Section Title from the menubar.

KWord determines the Section title by beginning a search from the top of the current page. The first paragraph with a style of Head 1 is the section title. If there are no paragraphs on the current page, KWord does the same search along on previous pages until it finds a section title.

Other Variables

KWord provides other commonly used variables that you might find useful. This set of variables are specific to the document. You can insert these variables by selecting Insert->Variable->Document Information from the menubar. This will bring up a list of variables. The variables are detailed below.

Variable Example Details
Author Name Joseph User The name of the author as specified in the Document information box.
City Philadelphia The city specified in the Document information box.
Company KDE The company name specified in the Document information box.
Country United States The country name specified in the Document information box.
Directory Name /home/juser/kword This is the folder name for the document. The filename is not included in the folder name variable.
Directory & Filename /home/juser/kword/Resume.kwd The folder and filename of the current file.
Document Abstract This is a current resume. The document abstract specified in the Document information box.
Document Keywords Resume, job, application The document keywords specified in the Document information box.
Document Subject My resume. The document subject line specified in the Document information box.
Document Title My Resume The document title specified in the Document information box.
Email [email protected] The email address of the author as specified in the Document information box.
Fax Any valid telephone number The fax machine number specified in the Document information box.
File Name Resume.kwd The complete name of the file.
File Name without extension Resume The filename without the suffix (usually .kwd).
Initials JCU The initials specified in the authors section of the Document information box.
Postal code Any valid postal code The postal code specified in the Document information box.
Street 123 Main St. The street address specified in the Document information box.
Telephone (work) Any valid telephone number The telephone number specified in the Document information box.
Telephone (private) Any valid telephone number The telephone number specified in the Document information box.
Title Director of Information Systems The title specified in the authors section of the Document information box.

Additionially, there are numerous variables under the Statistics submenu for inserting the number of words, lines, frames, etc. These variables should be self explanatory.

Note
Uninitialized variables will appear as <none>, until you define their value in the Document information box.

Custom Variables

KWord has many predefined variables. You may encounter documents where it would be nice to define your own variables for a document.

Using Custom Variables, you can create an unlimited number of variables for each document.

Create a new custom variable

To create a new custom variable, place the cursor at the location in the document to insert the new variable.

Select Insert'->Variable->Custom'->New from the menubar. This will bring up a dialog box.

Enter the variable name and its current value in the text boxes provided.

Click OK to create the new variable name and insert it at the current cursor location. Click Cancel to cancel the creation of the new variable.

It is now possible to insert this new variable at any place in your document.

Edit a custom variables value

In order for variables to be useful, you need to be able to give them a value, and be able to change that value easily. To change the value of a variable:

Select Tools->Custom Variables... from the menubar. This will bring up a dialog box.

Each custom variable has a line in this table. The first column is the name of the variable, and the second column is the value.

To change the value of a variables, simply click within the text box to the right of the variable name. Enter the desired value.

When all the changes have been complete, simply click OK and all the variables will be updated.

Insert a custom variable

To insert a new custom variable select Insert->Variable->Custom from the menubar. The custom variable is listed in the submenu. Click on the name of the variable and KWord will insert the variable, with its current value, at the cursor location.

Updating All Variable Values

You can tell KWord to update all variable values (to make sure all variables are set to their current values). This is especially important with dates and times.

Simply select Insert->Variable->Refresh All Variables from the menubar .

Updating One Date or Time Variable Value

You can tell KWord to update a single date or time variable value, and leave the others unchanged.

Simply place the mouse pointer over the variable you want to update and click with the right mouse button. Select Change Variable To. A small menu will appear which will show several new date or time formatting options and the option to change either dates or times to fixed or variable time formats. Simply select the new option and this variable will be updated.

Prev Contents Next
Table of Contents Expressions

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Expressions

Mike McBride

Introduction

Expressions are a way to quickly insert common phrases into a document. Once an expression has been selected, the text is inserted into KWord.

Note
Expressions are different from variables. Expressions are inserted as regular text, can only be changed later by manually editing the text. Variables insert a placeholder in the document which can be automatically updated at a later date.

Using expressions

To use an expression could not be easier.

Simply place the cursor at the location you want the expression inserted and select Insert->Expression from the menubar. This will give you a submenu with groups of expressions. Select the group that is appropriate for your expression. This will bring up a list of expressions available to you. Select the appropriate expression.

Once selected, that expression will be inserted at the cursor position.

Add, change and delete expression groups and expressions

Adding an expression is accomplished by selecting Tools->Edit Personal Expressions... from the menubar. This will bring up a dialog box.

The list at the left shows you all available groups (Employees and Notices in the example above). Notices is the currently selected group.

Add a new group

You will need to create a new group the first time you want to add a new expression. KWord will not allow the user to edit or remove any predefined expressions. You create a new group by clicking on the New located below the group list. A new group will be created with the name new group. You can change the name of the new group by clicking on the newly created group in the group list on the left, then editing the text box on the right labeled Group name:.

Change the name of a group

To change the name of a group, simply click on the group in the list on the left side of the dialog. Type the new name in the text box labeled Group name:.

Delete a group

To delete a group, click on the group in the list on the left side of the dialog.

Warning
Be sure you have selected the correct group prior to clicking on the Delete button. KWord will not give you the opportunity to restore the group if it is accidentally deleted.

Click on the Delete button below the group list. The group and all of the expressions it contained are immediately deleted.

Note
Deleting an expression with this dialog does not delete the expression from any document. It only removes the expression from the menus.

Add a new expression to a group

The left side of the dialog box lists all the available groups. Select the group you want to add your expression to by clicking with the left mouse button on the name of the group. The list on the right of the dialog labeled Expressions lists all the current expressions in the current group.

To add an expression, click on the New located below the expression list.

A new expression is created called empty. Type your new expression in the textbox below the list of expressions.

Edit an expression in a group

The left side of the dialog box lists all the available groups. Select the group that contains your expression to by clicking with the left mouse button on the name of the group. The list on the right of the dialog labeled Expressions lists all the current expressions in the current group.

Click on the expression you want to edit in the expression list on the right.

Click in the text box below the expression list. You can now edit your expression in the textbox below the list of expressions.

When you are finished adding new expressions, simply click OK.

Delete an expression

To delete an expression, click on the group in the list on the left side of the dialog. This will show a list of the expressions belonging to that group in the listbox on the right labeled Expressions.

Select the expression you want to delete by clicking once with the left mouse button.

Warning
Be sure you have selected the correct expression prior to clicking on the Delete button. KWord will not give you the opportunity to restore the expression if it is accidentally deleted.

Click on the Delete button below the expression list. The expression is immediately deleted.

Note
Deleting an expression with this dialog does not delete the expression from any document. It only removes the expression from the menus.

When you are finished making changes, simply click OK.

Prev Contents Next
Document Variables Document Links

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Document Links

Mike McBride

KWord has the ability to insert Internet addresses, email addresses, locations within the current document (bookmarks) and external file locations with a descriptor. This is most often used to create web pages in KWord.

Once inserted into the document, the descriptor will be visible in KWord, but when saved as a web document, the descriptor will become the hyperlink for the location specified with the address.

Insert a new document link

To insert a document link select Insert->Link... from the menubar. This will bring up a small dialog box.

Using the icon bar on the left, choose which link type you want to insert.

In the comment field, type the text you want to appear in your web document (for example: The KOffice Web Site).

In the address field, type the Internet address, email address or file location you want the comment to be linked with (for example: http://www.koffice.org)

Click OK.

Note
By default, KWord displays links underlined (as in most browsers). You can turn this behavior on and off by selecting Settings->Configure KWord... from the menubar and selecting the Misc page. More information can be found here.

Opening a document link

You an use a document link from within KWord.

Simply click once on the document link with the right mouse button. A popup menu will appear. Select Open Link.

A document link to a web site will open a new browser window and take you directly to that web site. A document link to an email address, will open a new message in your email program. A document link to a file will open the appropriate viewer or editor for that file type.

Copy a document link

You an use a document link in another application, by copying it from a KWord document.

Simply click once on the document link with the right mouse button. A popup menu will appear. Select Copy Link.

The link address has now been inserted into the clipboard. You can paste your clipboard entry into any other application.

Changing a document link

To change the details of a document link simply click once on the document link with the right mouse button. A popup menu will appear. Select Change Link....

The Insert Link dialog box will appear, with the current settings of the link displayed.

Make any appropriate changes and click OK to make your changes.

Deleting a document link

You can delete a document link like any other text in your document.

Simply place the cursor at the end of the document link, and press Backspace. Alternatively, place the cursor at the beginning of the document link and press Delete on the keyboard. The document link is deleted in its entirety.

Converting a document link to text

If a document link is no longer needed as a link, but you want to preserve the text that is the link, click once on the document link with the right mouse button. A popup menu will appear. Select Remove Link.... The linked text will now become plain text, and the link will be deleted.

Prev Contents Next
Expressions Document Comments

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Document Comments

Mike McBride

Document comments are included in KWord to allow you to have your documents read by another person. That person can make comments about the text and the comment will appear right next to the text. Adding a comment to a document

To add a comment to a document, select the text you want the comment to apply to.

Select Insert->Comment... from the menubar. This will bring up a small dialog box.

Type the text of your comment in the dialog box provided. If you click on the Add Author Name, the text will be signed, dated and the current time will be added.

Note
The authors name must be entered in the Document Information dialog or the name will not be included.

When you have entered all of your text, click OK to add your comment.

The comment will appear as a small yellow box at the cursor location.

Adding to or changing the comment in a document

To add more comments or change previous comments place the mouse pointer over the comment you want to edit. Click once with the right mouse button. A popup menu will appear. Select Edit Comment....

You can now make your changes to the comment.

Deleting a comment from a document

To delete a comment, place the mouse pointer over the comment you want to edit. Click once with the right mouse button. A popup menu will appear. Select Remove Comment.

The comment is immediately deleted.

Hiding all comments in a document

To hide all comments, select Settings->Configure KWord... from the menubar.

This will bring up a dialog box.

Click on Misc.

The check box labeled Display comments is used to toggle the comments on and off.

Prev Contents Next
Document Links Footnotes and Endnotes

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Footnotes and Endnotes

Mike McBride

KWord has a complete set of tools to create and manage footnotes and endnotes. When you assign a footnote, KWord automatically places the footnote at the bottom of the correct page. When you assign an endnote, the notation is located in a numbered list at the end of your text. If the footnote or endnote reference point is moved to a new page, the footnote automatically follows and is renumbered as needed (if the user desires).

KWord also has the ability to separately manage endnotes and footnotes in the same document.

You have the option of having KWord control the numbering of your footnotes. Alternatively, you can manually specify each footnote.

There are multiple automatic numbering schemes and your footnotes can be separated from the text with a dividing line. Add a new footnote or endnote

To add a new footnote or endnote, place your cursor at the end of the text you want to reference. Then select Insert->Footnote/Endnote... from the menubar. This will bring up a dialog box.

If you want KWord to automatically number your footnotes or endnotes for you, make sure that Automatic is selected. If you want to manually enter all footnotes in, then select Manual and enter the footnote or endnote entry in the text box to the right.

Tip
If at all possible, try to allow KWord to automatically number the footnotes and endnotes for you. If KWord controls the numbering, and you insert, delete or move footnotes, KWord will automatically renumber or reorder the footnotes for you.

Then select either Footnote or Endnote. Footnotes will appear at the bottom of the page where the notation occurs. Endnotes will appear as an ordered list at the end of your document.

Click Configure to change the look of your footnotes or endnotes.

Click Cancel to return to your document without inserting a footnote or endnote.

Click OK to insert the footnote or endnote. KWord will create the footnote or endnote entry, and place the cursor at the beginning of the entry for you to enter the desired reference information. Type your reference information in the space provided.

When you have finished entering your footnote or endnote reference information, simply move your cursor over the footnote or endnote number. Click with the right mouse button. A popup menu will appear. Select Go to Footnote and KWord will move the cursor back to the text where the reference was made.

Change reference of footnote

There are two ways to change reference information for a footnote:

  • Place the mouse pointer over the footnote you want to change, and click once with the right mouse button. A popup menu will appear. Select Edit Footnote. KWord will immediately move your cursor to the appropriate footnote reference.
  • Simply move to the bottom of the page (if it is a footnote) or the end of the document (if it is an endnote). Locate the footnote or endnote reference, and click once with the left mouse button.
Tip
You can jump to the end of the document by typing Ctrl+End.

Delete a footnote or endnote

To delete a footnote, simply delete the footnote or endnote number. KWord will remove the reference information and resize the footnote frame.

Change the look of footnotes

To configure the appearance of footnotes, select Format->Footnote... from the menubar. A dialog will appear.

There are 5 predefined numbering methods for footnotes. Those methods are listed in the left side of the dialog box. Begin by selecting the numbering method you want by clicking once with the left mouse button.

In the text box labeled Prefix text:, you can enter any characters you want to appear before the footnote number.

In the text box labeled Suffix text:, you can enter any characters you want to appear after the footnote number.

You can adjust the starting position of the footnote counter using the spinbox labeled Start at:.

Change the appearance of separator line

To change the appearance of the separator line, click on the tab labeled Separator Line.

You can determine the alignment of the separator line by selecting Left, Centered or Right

Determine the length of the line using the spin box labeled Size on page:.

The spinbox labeled Width: is used to determine the thickness of the seperator line.

Note
Do not confuse this option with the Size on page: option. The Width: is used to set the thickness of the line, not its distance across the page.

Use the combo box labeled Style to determine what kind of line is drawn.

Click OK to change the look of all footnotes or click Cancel to keep the previous options.

Change the placement of the footnotes

You can determine how much space separates the main text frame and the footnotes. Select Format->Page Layout... from the menubar. This will bring up a dialog:

Click on the tab labeled Header & Footer.

At the bottom of the dialog is a text box is labeled Spacing between footnote and body. As the label suggests, you can use this text box to specify the distance between the bottom edge of the main frame, and the top edge of the footnotes. When you have entered the desired spacing, click OK, and the footnotes will change position on the page.

[[Image:Kword_ If both footnotes and endnotes are on the current page, the setting will apply to the space between the body and the footnotes.

Change the look of endnote entries

To configure the appearance of endnotes, select Format->Footnote... from the menubar. A dialog will appear.

Click on the tab labeled Endnotes.

There are 5 predefined numbering methods for footnotes. Those methods are listed in the left side of the dialog box. Begin by selecting the numbering method you want by clicking once with the left mouse button.

In the text box labeled Prefix text:, you can enter any characters you want to appear before the endnote number.

In the text box labeled Suffix text:, you can enter any characters you want to appear before the endnote number.

You can adjust the starting position of the endnote counter using the spinbox labeled Start at:.

If you want a line separating the text of the document from your endnotes, instructions for this can be found in the section entitled Change the appearance of separator line.

Prev Contents Next
Document Comments KOffice Data Integration

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

KOffice Data Integration

Mike McBride


The applications which make up KOffice are capable of a fine degree of integration between each other.

Note
Because the actual process of inserting a component varies depending on the application, this chapter will not detail every step of the process. You will need to be familiar with the basics of using the other application in order to correctly insert a component from that application

Refer to the help files of the other applications for more specific information.

General instructions

There are two ways to insert a component (spreadsheet, presentation, graph, etc) from another application in KOffice:

  • Selecting Insert->Object Frame from the menubar.
You will be given a list of KOffice applications to choose from. Select the application you desire.
  • or by clicking on the toolbar.
A dialog box will appear with a list of KOffice applications to choose from. Select the application you desire.

KWord will now ask you to define a frame for this object. Place the mouse pointer where you want the upper left corner of the frame to be located. Click and hold with the left mouse button. Drag the mouse to draw a square for your new object. When you are happy with the size of the object frame, release the left mouse button

KWord will now execute the application you selected from within KWord. The details of each application are different. Please see the application manuals for the specific KOffice application for details on the use of that application. (In other words, from this point on, if you insert a spreadsheet from KSpread, then the windows will act the same as KSpread.)

Working with the inserted component

To edit the data within the component, simply double click with the mouse pointer and KWord will change the toolbars, menuitems and application structure to match the KOffice application. This way, you can use the application specific tools to refine your component.

Note
The frame that contains the embedded data, can be manipulated the same as any other frame in KWord.

When you save your document, the component is saved within the KWord document.

Prev Contents Next
Footnotes and Endnotes Inserting Files

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Inserting files

Mike McBride

KWord has the ability to insert a previously saved KWord file into the current document. This is especially useful for large documents that have multiple authors.

To insert a KWord file into the current document, place the cursor at the desired insertion point of the document.

Selecting Insert->File... from the menubar. You will be given a file selection dialog to select the KWord file you want to insert.

When you have located the KWord file, click OK, and the new KWord file will be inserted into the current document at the current cursor position.

KWord will integrate the newly inserted document into the structure of the current document.

Prev Contents Next
KOffice Data Integration Document Bookmarks

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Document bookmarks

Mike McBride

Bookmarks are invisible placeholders that allow you to move easily to specified points in a large document.

Tip
Some other wordprocessors have bookmarks as part of their interface. If you are familiar with their use, you will find that KWord functions in a similar manner.

It should be noted that bookmarks are attached to the text near the cursor, not the page location. If the text moves forward or backward in the document (as text is inserted or deleted respectively), the bookmark moves with the text.

Creating a new bookmark

Creating a bookark is simple.

Place the cursor where you want the bookmark to be inserted. Select Insert->Bookmark... from the menubar.

A small dialog box will appear.

Type a short description of the bookmark location (i.e. Chapter 1, Appendix, Abstract, etc). This description will identify the bookmark for you.

Click OK to create the bookmark.

Click Cancel to return to your document without creating a bookmark.

Jump to a previously created bookmark

To jump to a previously created bookmark, select Tools->Select Bookmark... from the menubar.

A small dialog will appear. Double click on the desired bookmark with the left mouse button. You will immediately be taken to the location in the document that is attached to that bookmark.

Note
Alternatively, you can click once on the desired bookmark with the left mouse button, and then click on OK. This will function the same as double clicking on the bookmark.

Rename a bookmark

To rename a bookmark, select Tools->Select Bookmark... from the menubar.

A small dialog will appear. Click on the desired bookmark with the left mouse button. Now click Rename Bookmark. A small dialog will appear. Enter the new name for your bookmark. Click OK. The bookmark is renamed immediately.

Delete a bookmark

To delete a bookmark, select Tools->Select Bookmark... from the menubar.

A small dialog will appear. Click on the desired bookmark with the left mouse button.

Warning
Be sure you have selected the correct bookmark from the list before proceeding. KWord does not ask for confirmation before deleting the selected bookmark.

Now click Delete Bookmark. The bookmark is deleted immediately.

Prev Contents Next
Inserting Files Formulae

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Formulae

Mike McBride

KWord has the ability to directly create formulae using the formula editor common to all KOffice applications.

Note
This is a formula editor for creating graphical versions of formulas. KWord does not currently have the ability to solve mathematical equations.

Add a formula

There are three ways to insert a formula into a document:

  • By selecting Insert->Formula from the menubar
  • Using the keyboard shortcut: F4
  • or by clicking on the toolbar.

KWord creates a formula frame at the current cursor location.

Note
Formula frames behave differently than most other frames in KWord:
  • All formula frames are inserted inline by default. This frame can later be converted to a non-inline frame later.
  • Formula frames expand and contract depending on the resulting size of the formula.
  • Formula frames automatically determine where in the line they are lined up.

Moving a formula

By default, formula frames are created as inline frames by default. The formula frame will move with the text as any other inline frame would.

If you want to have more control over where the formula is placed, you can convert it to a framed formula by clicking on the frame surrounding the formula with the right mouse button. A popup menu will appear. Simply select Inline Frame and the formula will now be a freely movable frame.

Once converted to a freely movable frame, you can move the frame just like any other frame in KWord.

Removing a formula

To delete a formula in KWord, simply delete the frame around it.

Editing a formula

Editing a formula is beyond the scope of this documentation. Please see the KFormula handbook for help with the editing of the formula.

Prev Contents Next
Document Bookmarks Installing the kdeaccessibility Module

This section of the documentation discusses accessibility features in KWord for users with disabilities. Some of these features apply to KDE as a whole and are controlled from the KDE Control Center. Some apply to all KOffice applications, and some are specific to KWord.

Installing the kdeaccessibility Module

Most of the features described in this chapter are enabled by installing the kdeaccessibility module. The kdeaccessibility module is part of the KDE project http://www.kde.org. The kdeaccessibility package can be obtained from ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/, the main ftp site of the KDE project.

Many distributions offer precompiled binaries on their ftp sites. Please check your distribution's web sites for more information.

More information about KDE accessibility can be obtained by visiting http://accessibility.kde.org/.

Prev Contents Next
Formulae Visual Impairments
Note
KWord is not usable by totally blind users. It is hoped that a general screen reader for the blind will be available in future versions of KDE.

Theming

For low-sighted or light allergic users, several features are available in the KDE Control Center Appearance & Themes->Theme Manager, like high contrast color themes. If you are light allergic, the HighContrastDark or HighContrastLight themes may be helpful. If you have difficulty reading small fonts or seeing small icons, the HighContrastDark-big or HighContrastLight-big themes will increase the size of text, buttons, and icons. You may also customize background, colors, fonts, and icons from the same dialog. A set of monochrome icons is available.

Tip
If you choose one of the Big themes, you may discover that some windows are too large to fit your monitor. Purchasing a larger monitor will be helpful. You can drag the portions of the window not visible into the visible area by holding down the Alt key and dragging with the left mouse button anywhere within the screen. If you have trouble operating a mouse, you can also move screens by pressing Alt+F3. In the dropdown Windows Operations Menu, choose Move. Move the screen with the arrow keys and press Esc to finish the move.

KMagnifier

The kdeaccessibility module includes a screen magnifier application called KMagnifier. If it is installed, you can run it from K-Button->Utilities->KMag (Screen Magnifier).

Text-to-Speech

The kdeaccessibility module includes a Text-to-Speech component called KTTS. If KTTS is installed, you can configure KWord to speak the text that is under the mouse pointer or speak the text of each screen widget as it receives focus. Before using this feature, first configure KTTS. See The KTTS Handbook for details. To turn on the TTS feature in KWord, select Settings->Configure KWord... from the menubar. This will display a dialog box. Clicking on TTS will allow you to change the following:

Speak widget under mouse pointer

When checked, KWord will speak the text of each widget as the mouse pointer moves over the widget.

Speak widget with focus

When checked, KWord will speak the text of each widget as it receives focus.

Speak tool tips

When checked, KWord will speak the popup tool tip for each widget in addition to the text of the widget.

Speak What's This

When checked, KWord will speak the What's This help for each widget in addition to the text of the widget.

Say whether disabled

When checked, KWord will speak the word "disabled" if the widget is currently disabled (grayed).

Speak accelerators

When checked, KWord will speak the accelerator of the widget in addition to the text of the widget. Accelerators are the underlined letters you see in the text of the widget. For example, in the main menu, the Quit menu item has the "Q" underlined. You can choose it by pressing Q. To speak the accelerator, check this option and enter the word you want to speak before the accelerator in the Prefaced by the word box. In this example shown above, KWord will speak "Accelerator Q".

Polling interval

This option determines how often KWord will check for a change in the widget under the mouse pointer or a new focused widget. You should leave this option on the default setting.
Note
If the TTS option does not appear on this screen, you do not have the KTTS component installed in your system.

Not all widgets are spoken. For example, the items on the main menubar are not spoken. The text of the KWord document window is also not spoken, but see the section called “Document Structure” for another way to speak the document.

Prev Contents Next
Installing the kdeaccessibility Module Motor Impairments and Mouseless Operation

KMouseTool

If you can operate a mouse, but have trouble clicking, the KMouseTool application may help. Run it from K-Button->Utilities->KMouseTool (Automatik Mouse Click).

XAccess Features

The KDE Control Center offers several keyboard features collectively called XAccess. They include:

Sticky Keys

This feature permits operation of meta keys, such as Alt, Ctrl, and Shift without having to hold the keys down. It is useful when you can only use one finger or one hand to operate the keyboard. With Sticky Keys on, press and release a Alt, Ctrl, or Shift key, then press another key. The result is as if you pressed both keys at once. Press the Alt, Ctrl, or Shift key again to turn off the sticky key. Activate this feature in K-Button->System Settings->Regional & Accessibility->Accessibility->Modifier Keys.

Slow Keys

This feature is useful if you have hand tremors or difficulty accurately pressing keys. It prevents inadvertent key presses by requiring that a key be held down for a minimum time before it is accepted. Activate this feature in K-Button->SystemSettings->Regional & Accessibility->Accessibility->Keyboard Filters.

Bounce Keys

This feature is also useful if you have hand tremors. It prevents inadvertent repeated key presses by preventing another keystroke for a certain amount of time. Activate this feature in K-Button->System Settings->Regional & Accessibility->Accessibility->Keyboard Filters.

Mouse Emulation

Mouse Emulation permits you to move and click the mouse using the keyboard. Press Alt-F12 to activate it. Use the arrow keys to move the mouse pointer to the desired location, and press spacebar to "click" the mouse. Unfortunately, you cannot use Mouse Emulation to perform right mouse button clicks or dragging.

Mouse Navigation

This feature permits you to emulate the mouse using the numeric keypad of your keyboard. To activate it, go to K-Button->System Settings->Peripherals->Mouse->Mouse Navigation. Check the Move pointer with keyboard (using the num pad) box. When you do this, the other settings will become enabled, and you can customize the keyboard pointer behavior further, if required. The various keys on the number pad move in the direction you would expect. Note that you can move diagonally as well as up, down, left and right. The 5 key emulates a click to a pointer button, typically left mouse button. You change which button is emulated by using the / key (which makes it left mouse button), * key (which makes it middle mouse button) and - (which makes it right mouse button). Using the + emulates a doubleclick to the selected pointer button. You can use the 0 key to emulate holding down the selected pointer button (for easy dragging), and then use the . to emulate releasing the selected pointer button.

Keyboard shortcuts

KWord has a number of keyboard shortcuts that will be useful to users who cannot operate a mouse. See Appendix D, Key Bindings Summary for details. In addition, the following tips will be useful:

1. Several of the functions that can only be performed with the mouse in the main document panel can be performed with the keyboard in the Document Structure area. See the section called “Document Structure. You can switch from the document panel to the Document Structure area by pressing Alt+1. Switch to the document panel by pressing Alt+2.
2. Use the Menu key to pop up the context menu. On most keyboards, the Menu key is on the righthand side of the keyboard between the Windows® and Ctrl keys. It has a menu icon on it.
3. When inserting a new frame into the document, you can insert the frame at the current position of the text caret, instead of positioning it with the mouse. Just press Enter when the crosshairs appear. You can resize the new frame or change its position by changing the numbers in the Connect Frame dialog. See the section called “Adding a Text Frame to a Document” for details.
4. In order to change the properties of a frame or delete a frame, you must first select it. To do so without using the mouse, position the text caret anywhere inside the frame and choose Edit->Select Frame from the main menubar. Alternatively, press Alt+1 to go to the Document Structure area, scroll to the desired frame, press the Menu key to pop up the context menu and choose Properties or Delete Frame.
5. You cannot use the arrow keys to move the text caret into some frames within the document panel. To move the caret inside the frame, press Alt+1 to go to the Document Structure area, scroll to the desired frame, press the Menu key to pop up the context menu and choose Edit Text.

Resizing panels

You can move the sizing bar between the Document Structure area and the main document panel by pressing F8. A sizing icon appears overtop the sizing bar. Use the arrow keys to move the bar left or right. Press F8 again or Esc when finished sizing.

Setting focus to widgets

Normally, one can use the Tab and Shift+Tab to move focus from one widget to the next in any application. However, when focus is on the main document in KWord, pressing Tab does not move the focus; instead it inserts a tabulator into the document. You can set focus to any widget that can receive focus by pressing Alt+F8. A small lettered box appears overtop each widget on the screen that can receive focus.

Press the letter to move focus to the corresponding widget. Press Alt+F8 again or Esc to abandon moving the focus.

Prev Contents Next
Visual Impairments Document Structure

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Document Structure

Introduction

The sections that are included in this chapter are for advanced users. The instructions for these sections will assume you are familiar with the basic operation of KWord.

Sometimes, when editing a complicated document, it can be helpful to look at an organized view of your document.

You can use this organized view to jump immediately to certain text frames, select picture frames, change frame properties, delete frames, or simply review your document.

Show and hide Document Structure area

Because simple documents do not need the information provided in the Document Structure area, KWord has the ability to toggle the Document Structure area on and off.

To toggle the Document Structure area on and off, select View->Show Doc Structure from the menubar to make the Document Structure area visible. Select View->Hide Doc Structure from the menubar to make the Document Structure area disappear.

You can move focus to the document structure area by pressing Alt-1. You can move focus to the main document panel by pressing Alt-2. Navigating the document structure area

Lets examine a sample Document Structure area.

As you can see, there are five groups of frames categorized (Text Frames/Frame Sets, Pictures, Tables, Formula Frames, Embedded Objects).

Text Frames/Frame Sets

Within this category, is a list of all text framesets. Below each frameset, each frame is listed. Below each frame, each paragraph is listed.

Pictures

Within this category is a list of all frames that contain pictures, and the folder the pictures were loaded from.

Tables

Within this category is a list of all frames that contain tables. Note that a table behaves very much like a frameset. Each cell of the table is a frame, and each frame may contain multiple paragraphs.

Formula Frames

Within this category is a list of all frames that contain formulas.

Embedded Objects

Within this category, is an alphabetical list of all frames that contain data from other KOffice applications.

You can use your mouse to select the category you want, or first put focus in the document structure area (press Alt-1) then use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the list. Double click on a category to expand or collapse the category, or press the right or left arrow keys.

Note
Depending on your document, you may not have all categories in your Document Structure area. The category only appears when there is at least one frame in the category.

Edit a text frame, frameset, or paragraph using the document structure area

To edit a text frame, frameset, or paragraph, click on the item with the right mouse button or scroll to the item and press the Menu key. A popup menu will appear. Select Edit Text from the menu.

Speak the text of a text frame, frameset, or paragraph using the document structure area

If you have the KTTS component installed in your system, you can have the computer speak the text of the document. To speak the text of a frame, frameset, or paragraph, click on the item with the right mouse button or scroll to the item and press the Menu key. A popup menu will appear. Select Speak Text from the menu.
Tip
The Speak Text menu item will be disabled if KTTS is not installed in your system.

If KTTS fails to speak the text, or speaks the text in the wrong language, make sure you have a Talker in KTTS configured with the correct language. See The KTTS Handbook for details. Also, make sure the Global Language is properly set in the KWord settings.

Jump to a frame, frameset, or paragraph using the document structure area

To display a frame, frameset, or paragraph in the main document panel, click on the item with the right mouse button or scroll to the item and press the Menu key. A popup menu will appear. Select Show from the menu.

Delete frame or frameset using the document structure area

To delete a frame or frameset, click on the frame title with the right mouse button or scroll to the frame title and press the Menu key. A popup menu will appear. Select Delete Frame from the menu.

Edit a frame or paragraph properties using the document structure area

To change the properties of a frame or paragraph, click on the item with the right mouse button or scroll to the item and press the Menu key. A popup menu will appear. Select Properties from the menu.

Prev Contents Next
Motor Impairments and Mouseless Operation Mail Merge

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Mail Merge

Introduction

KWord has the ability to use data from an outside database (or internal database) to personalize your documents for individual members/clients/friends.

This section of the manual will cover all aspects of creating, merging and printing documents that are specific to KWord. This manual will not cover:

  • Creating an external database.
  • Security issues regarding databases.
  • Detailed instructions on SQL. It is assumed you have some knowledge regarding SQL if you are using a SQL database for your data source.
  • Accessing the network or Internet.

For answers to these questions, other documentation is available on the Internet that is specific to the software you have chosen.

You can retreive your mail-merge data from a number of sources:

  • If you want to use an outside SQL database, click here for instructions.
  • If you want to use a KSpread file for your data, click here.
  • If you want use information from your KDE Address Book, click here.
  • If you want to use the internal database of KWord, click here.

Using an external SQL database as a data source

KWord has the ability to use several of the most popular open source databases as a source of data for personalized documents.

Note
In order to access an outside database using SQL, your machine needs to have the appropriate database module compiled into your copy of QT.

For more information see the installation section of this documentation.

The database can be located on the same machine as KWord, or on any computer which is accessable through your computer network or the Internet.

In order to use the database, you must know the following information:

  • Name of the database
  • Host name/IP address of the computer the database is located on
  • The port address on the specified computer granting SQL access
  • A valid user name for the database
  • A valid password for the user name

If you have all this information at your finger tips, you are ready to proceed.

Using an outside database to create personalized documents is a three step process:

1. Connect to the database and select your query.
2. Insert the merge fields to tell KWord where to insert the database information.
3. Print the personalized documents.

Locate the database and query the records.

To begin, select Tools->Configure Mail Merge... from the menubar. A dialog box will appear.

Click on Open Existing.... Another small dialog will appear.

Select QT-SQL Source and click on OK. A new dialog box will appear.

Enter the URL or IP address of the computer that holds the database in the text box labeled Hostname:.

Select the driver named QMYSQL3 from the combo box labeled Driver:.

Enter the database name you were provided in the text box labeled Database name: and a user name in the text box labeled Username:.

If the database access is through a port other than the default port enter that port number in the text box labeled Port:.

Tip
If you are going to be using this database at other times, you can click on the button labeled Keep settings.... KWord will ask for a descriptive name.

When you want to restore these settings on future sessions, simply select the descriptive name from the combo box in the upper left of the dialog box.

When all information is correct, click OK. KWord will ask you for a password to that database. Enter the password in the text box, and click OK.

KWord will now ask if you want to replace your current data source with the source you have selected. Click Yes.

You are now connected to the database. Now you need to select the data from the database. This dialog box has re-appeared.

Click on Edit Current.... Another dialog will appear.

This dialog is designed to help you enter and test your database query. The dialog is divided into three sections: Database information, Query information and Query line.

The database information section is labeled Information and consists of two combo boxes. The left combo box (Available tables:) gives you a list of all available tables within the current database. Select the desired table from the list by clicking on the table name with the left mouse button. A list of all available fields from that table will appear in the right combo box.

The query line is a text box located near the bottom of the dialog labeled Query:. Simply type your SQL query into this text box and click Execute. KWord will query the database and return the specified query in tabular format in the Query Result box. You can alter, or edit your query on the query line and each time you click Execute, the new query results will appear.

Note
KWord does not limit your query strings. They can be simple and straight forward:
select * from Clients

Or complex multitable queries:

select Clients.FirstName, Clients.LastName, Clients.address, data.Birthday, data.EyeColour from eMail, data where data.FirstName=Clients.FirstName and data.LastName=Clients.LastName

Clicking Setup, will allow you to log into a different database.

When you have the correct query in the Query: text box, click OK to select that query.

This will return you to the mail merge main dialog box.

Click Close.

Now that you have selected your data query, it is time to insert the merge fields in the document. Click here to continue.

Using a KSpread file as a data source

KWord can use data in a KSpread document for personalizing documents.

Note
In order to use this data, you only need to know the location of the KSpread document and the worksheet (page) number the data is located on.

Using a KSpread document to create personalized documents is a three step process:

1. Select the file the data is located within.
2. Insert the merge fields to tell KWord where to insert the database information
3. Print the personalized documents.

Selecting the file that contains the data.

To begin, select Tools->Configure Mail Merge... from the menubar. A dialog box will appear.

Click on Open Existing.... Another small dialog will appear.

Select KSpread Table Source from the drop down box labeled Available sources: and click on OK. A new dialog box will appear.

Enter the URL or file name of the KSpread document in the text box labeled URL:. You can type the file name directly into the text box, or click on the button with the blue folder and use the file dialog to select the KSpread file.

Once you have selected the KSpread document, the drop down box labeled Page number: will show you all the available pages or worksheets within the KSpread document. Select the page (or worksheet) that contains the mail merge data.

When all information is correct, click OK. KWord will ask you if you want to replace the current data source. Click Yes to continue.

You will again see the mail merge main dialog box.

Click Close.

Now that you have selected your data query, it is time to insert the merge fields in the document. Click here to continue.

Using your KDE Address book as a data source

KWord can use data in your address book for personalizing documents.

Using address book entries to create personalized documents is a three step process:

1. Select the people you want included in the mail merge.
2. Insert the merge fields to tell KWord where to insert the database information
3. Print the personalized documents.

Select the people you want included

To begin, select Tools->Configure Mail Merge... from the menubar. A dialog box will appear.

Click on Open Existing.... Another small dialog will appear.

Select KDE Addressbook Plugin from the drop down box labeled Available sources: and click on OK. A new dialog box will appear.

The dialog consists of two listboxes labeled Address Book and Selected Addresses. By moving entries from your Address book to the Selected Addresses listbox, you will be including those entries in your merge document.

To add an entry, select the entry in the left listbox by clicking with the left mouse button. Then click Add.

To remove an entry, select the entry in the right listbox by clicking with the left mouse button. Then click Remove.

Tip
You can locate entries quickly by entering the first 2-3 letters of an entries name in the textbox labeled Filter on:
Note
You can load the full address book application by clicking the Address Book... button.

You can also save a distribution list using the Save as Distribution List... button. For more information on distribution lists, see the documentation on the KDE Addressbook.

When you have selected all the entries and distribution lists you want, click OK. KWord will ask you if you want to replace the current data source. Click Yes to continue.

You will again see the mail merge main dialog box.

Click Close.

Now that you have selected your data query, it is time to insert the merge fields in the document. Click here to continue.

Using an internal representation of tabular data to create documents

For small sets of data, or when you do not currently have a database containing the merge data, KWord offers you the ability to enter the data directly into KWord in tabular form. This internal data structure can then be used to create documents with this data inserted at predefined locations.

Using an internal representation of the data to create personalized documents is a three step process:

1. Enter the data into KWord
2. Insert the merge fields to tell KWord where to insert the database information
3. Print the personalized documents.

After the data has been created once, you can go back and change the data as needed, and produce another set of personalized documents from that data.

Enter the data

To begin, select Tools->Configure Mail Merge... from the menubar. A dialog box will appear.

Click on Create New.... Another small dialog will appear.

There is currently only one option in this dialog box, Internal Storage. Click on OK. A new dialog box will appear.

This is a record card for creating your tabular data file. Along the top is a toolbar and the main part of the dialog is space to hold your entry/data pairs.

Defining the structure of your data table

First, we need to add one or more entries (merge fields). This is accomplished by clicking the Add entry button (third button from the right along the toolbar). A small dialog box will appear. Type a descriptive name of your entry in the dialog box (Name, Address, Balance Due, etc....).

Note
This is for the name of the entry, not the data that is contained within the entry.

Click OK, and the entry is added to the card.

Repeat this process until all needed entries are visible on this first card.

If you want to delete an entry, simply click once on the entry name with the left mouse button and select Remove entry.

Warning
Be very sure you have selected the correct entry name. Once you tell KWord to delete the entry, the entry and all of the data within those entries will be deleted immediately. You will not be given the option to stop or reverse the process once it is begun.

Entering the data into the table

Now that the structure of your data is defined, you can enter the data into your entries.

At the top of the dialog box, are 4 buttons surrounding a spin box. The spin box gives the current record number. All records are numbered in the order they are added starting with number 1. You can use the spin box to go directly to the desired record or you can use the arrows to graphically move through the list of records.

Button Action
Move directly to record one
Move back one record
Move forward one record
Move to the last record in the dataset

To enter the data, simply place the cursor in the text box to the right of the entry name, and type in the data. (KWord uses “No Value” as the default value for all entries in newly created records.)

To add a record, click the button.

To delete a record, click the button.


Warning
Be careful when you are deleting records. Once deleted, the record cannot be retrieved.

Continue to enter all data until your dataset is complete.

After your dataset is complete, click OK to save the changes to your dataset. This will bring up the mail merge main dialog:

Click Close. Now it is time to insert the merge fields in the document.

Insert merge fields in document

Now that KWord knows the entries available in your data source, you can insert the merge fields into your document.

A merge field is a placeholder within the document. This placeholder will be replaced in each personalized document with the value of the entry for that individual record.

Insert a merge field

To insert a merge field, place the cursor at the desired place in the document. Select Insert->Variable->Mail Merge... from the menubar. A list of available entries will appear. Select the desired entry, and click OK.

The merge field is inserted at the current cursor location. The merge field is surrounded by brackets.

You can place the cursor in a new location in the document and insert another placeholder. When you are done inserting placeholders, you can proceed to printing your document.

Delete a merge field

You can delete a merge field two ways.

  • Place the cursor at the end of the merge field, and press the Backspace key.
  • Place the cursor at the beginning of the merge field, and press the Delete key.

Previewing and printing the merged document

Once you have inserted all the merge fields you want, you are ready to preview and print the personalized documents.

Preview your documents before printing

To preview your document select Tools->Configure Mail Merge... from the menubar. A dialog box will appear.

400px|thumb|center

Click Print Preview.... You will be able to see the final output of your personalized documents prior to printing.

Print your personalized documents.

You print personalized documents using the same methods that you do to print traditional documents. For more information on printing see the section on [[Kword/Mnual/PrintDoc|Printing a Document].

Prev Contents Next
Document Structure Book-like Headers and Footers

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

How do I...

The next part of KWord documentation is designed to provide examples on how to solve specific problems using KWord.

Each section is a self contained list of steps, and refers the reader to other sections of the documentation for more complete information on different aspects of KWord.

These examples were selected to:

  • Show how KWord might function differently from other word processors you are used to.
  • Show how to combine several elements to create the desired document.
  • Illustrate the power of KWord.

You can use these examples as recipes for your document, or modify them to create the look or content you desire.

How do I get the pages numbers on the outsides of the pages and the title in the middle of the header (like a novel)?

This first example shows how you can combine center tabs and variables in a header to create a common format to your document.

Note
Your document must be at least 2 pages long before you begin this procedure.
1. Select File->Document Information from the menubar.
2. Click on the General tab.
3. Click once in the text box labeled Title with the left mouse button and enter the desired document title.
4. Click on the OK button.
5. Select Format->Page Layout... from the menubar.
6. Click on the Header & Footer tab.
7. Select Different header for even and odd pages.
8. Then click OK.
9. Select Format->Enable Document Headers from the menubar.
10. Move to an odd numbered page in your document, and click in the header box.
11. Select Format->Paragraph... from the menubar.
12. The Paragraph Settings dialog will appear. Click on the Tabulators tab.
13. Click the New button.
14. Using the arrows of the spinbox labeled Position enter a value that is exactly 1/2 the frame width. The frame width is listed directly below the Position spin box.
15. Click the Center radio button in the section entitled Alignment.
16. Click the New button again.
17. Using the arrows of the spinbox labeled Position enter a value that is slightly less than the frame width. The frame width is listed directly below the Position spin box.
18. Click the Right radio button in the section entitled Alignment.
19. Then click OK.
20. Click in the header again with the left mouse button.
21. Type the Tab key. This will move the cursor to the center of the header.
22. Select Insert->Variable->Document Information->Document Title from the menubar.
23. Type the Tab key again. This will move the cursor near the right margin of the header.
24. Select Insert->Variable->Page->Page Number from the menubar.
25. Move to an even numbered page in your document, and click in the header box.
26. Select Format->Paragraph from the menubar.
27. The Paragraph Settings dialog will appear. Click on the Tabulators tab.
28. Click the New button.
29. Using the arrows of the spinbox labeled Position enter a value that is exactly 1/2 the frame width. The frame width is listed directly below the Position spin box.
30. Click the Center radio button in the section entitled Alignment.
31. Then click OK.
32. Click in the header again with the left mouse button.
33. Select Insert->Variable->Page->Page Number from the menubar.
34. Type the Tab key. This will move the cursor to the center of the header.
35. Select Insert->Variable->Document Information->Document Title from the menubar.

That completes the procedure. Your document now has the title of the document in the center along the top of each page, and the page numbers on the outside corners of the pages.

If you want page numbers on the bottom of the pages, you can use Footers instead of headers in your document.

Prev Contents Next
Mail Merge Create a .pdf file

KWord differs slightly from other word processors here. Instead of saving your file as a .pdf file, you print your file to create the .pdf file.

When you are ready to create a .pdf file from your document:

1. Select File->Print from the menubar. This will bring up the Print dialog.
2. In the combo box labeled Name, select Print to File (PDF)
3. Enter your desired filename in the Output file: text box.
4. If you wish to make any changes to the PDF formatting, select Properties.
A complete explanation to all these properties, is beyond the scope of this document.
5. Click OK.

Your PDF file will be created and saved at the location specified in Output file.

For more information on printing in KDE, visit The KDE Print web page.

Prev Contents Next
Book-like Headers and Footers Removing Template Categories

Templates can only be removed using the Create Template dialog. For instructions, click Removing template group.


Prev Contents Next
Create a .pdf file Introduction to the Menubar and Toolbars

The key to getting the most out of KWord, is found in the menu bars and the toolbars.

The menubar is organized into groups of functions (e.g. file functions, table functions, etc.). Below each of these groups, is a submenu of actions. Some of these submenus will have sub menus of their own.

The toolbars are also organized into groups. Each toolbar consists of a set of buttons. Each button performs a specific function. The toolbars are designed to act as shortcuts for more commonly used functions.

The first part of this section of the manual discusses the manipulation of KWord's toolbars to suit your needs.

The second part of this section, takes a detailed look at each menubar function, and each standard toolbar button, and provides you with a brief summary of its action. Many of these sections also provide you with a link to more detailed information located elsewhere in the KWord Handbook.

Prev Contents Next
Removing Template Categories Hiding, Changing and Moving Toolbars

KWord offers the user great flexibility when it comes to toolbars. This first section will show you some of the many options you have for relocating, reformatting and removing toolbars.

Hiding Toolbars

When you start KWord for the first time, several toolbars are visible. If you don't think you will need a toolbar, and want to reclaim that desktop space, you can hide any or all of the toolbars

To hide a toolbar, Select Settings->Toolbars from the menubar. This will bring up a submenu. All of the toolbars are listed. Simply select the toolbar you want to hide or restore.

Moving Toolbars around

Toolbars can be located on the screen in 5 places.

1. Top
2. Bottom
3. Left
4. Right
5. Floating

Top, Bottom, Left and Right refer to the edges of the KWord screen.

By locating a toolbar in the Bottom position, for example, you move the toolbar into a horizontal position below the Document Area, and along the bottom of the KWord window. By locating a toolbar in the Left position,however, you move the toolbar into a vertical position to the left of the Document Area, and along the left edge of the KWord window.

Multiple toolbars can be located at each of these points in the screen. (You could, for instance, move all the toolbars to the top of the screen). KWord will shuffle toolbars around, to fit in the most compact way at that location.

There are two ways to move any toolbar.

  • Click on the striped area of the toolbar with the left mouse button and hold the button down. Drag the toolbar to the desired location. You will see a rectangular shape indicating the position and orientation of the toolbar. When at the desired location, release the left mouse button and the toolbar will be inserted there.
or
  • Click on the toolbar with the right mouse button. A popup menu will appear. Select Orientation. A small submenu will appear. Select Top, Bottom, Left, Right, Floating or Flat.

If you select Floating for any toolbar, a new window will be created just for that toolbar. This window can be moved independently from the KWord window.

Finally, if you select Flat for any toolbar, the toolbar will be reduced to a horizontal section of lines located directly below the menubar. To restore this menubar, simply double click with the left mouse button on the flattened toolbar and the toolbar will be restored to its original size and position.

Changing the look of your toolbars

Toolbars can have their buttons displayed different ways. Below are examples of the four options for the File toolbar.

Icons Only
Text Only
Text Aside Icons
Text Under Icons

To change the appearance of a toolbar, place the cursor over on the toolbar you want to change, and click with the right mouse button.

A small menu will appear at the mouse cursor. Select Text Position. This will open a submenu, select your preference from the list.

Changing Icon Size

You can also select the size of the icons by clicking on the toolbar with the right mouse button. A small popup menu will appear. Select Icon Size and then your preferred icon size.

Note
Setting the look of one toolbar does not alter the look of another toolbar.
Prev Contents Next
Introduction to the Menubar and Toolbars The Menubar

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Menubar

The Menubar contains all commands available to KWord. It is divided into 10 general categories.

File Menu

By clicking on the File menu, you can begin new documents, load previously edited documents, print your documents, close the current document (so you can load another document), or quit KWord entirely.

File->New or (Ctrl+N)

Allows you to open new files for editing. For Step by Step instructions see Beginning a New Document.
Typing Ctrl+N or clicking is equivalent to using the menubar.

File->Open... (Ctrl+O)

For opening previously created KWord files. For Step by Step instructions see Retrieving a Saved Document.
Typing Ctrl+O or clicking is equivalent to using the menubar.

File->Open Recent

For opening the most recently edited files. Once you have clicked on this option, a list of recently edited files will appear. Select the file you want and KWord will open the file.

File->Save (Ctrl+S)

Saves your current file to disk. If you have not saved the file yet, you will be prompted for a filename. For more details, see Saving a Document.
Typing Ctrl+S or clicking is equivalent to using the menubar.

File->Save As...

Allows you to save your file under another name or another format. For more details, see Saving a Document.

File->Reload

Reloads the current file from disk, erasing any changes to the document since the last time it was saved.

File->Import...

Will load a file from another application. KWord attempts to decipher as much of the file as it can. For many files, some information will be lost. For more information on the ability to import files from other applications, see the section on filters at the end of this documentation.

File->Export...

Will save a file using the format of another application. KWord attempts to save as much of the file as it can. For many files, some information will be lost. For more information on the ability to export files to other applications, see the section on filters at the end of this documentation.

File->Mail...

Launches your email client so you can send the current file as an attachment. The file must have been saved once before this option can be selected.

File->Create Template From Document...

Allows you to save your file as a template, to use as a starting point for future documents. For more details, see Creating a new template.

File->Statistics

Opens a window that counts the sentences, words, characters and syllables in your document.
The number of sentences is not always absolutely correct, as KWord has to guess if a dot really starts a new sentence or not. The number of syllables is estimated, KWord therefore assumes that the text is written in English.
The Flesch reading ease: score is a number between 0 and 100 which estimates how readable a text is. The higher the number, the easier the text can be read. Text with a score of 70-80 should have fairly good readability.
The Flesch formula uses the number of words per sentences and the number of syllables per word. It assumes that the use of short words and short sentences increases the readability of a text. It says nothing about grammar or meaning. As both the number of sentences and the number of syllables is estimated, the result is not absolutely precise. The text should be at least 200 words long, if it isn't the score will be marked as approximated.
The Flesch score is defined for English text only, but the basic idea should work for many other languages, too.
Click OK to dismiss the window.

File->Print... (Ctrl+P)

Print the file. For an overview of printing options see Printing a Document.
Typing Ctrl+P or clicking are equivalent to using the menubar.

File->Print Preview...

Print the file, but sends the output to your postscript viewer, for your confirmation before sending it to the printer. The operation of your postscript viewer will vary depending on which viewer you use. Refer to the help files for your viewer for help.
Clicking is equivalent to using the menubar.

File->Document Information

Opens a window that lets you enter information related to the document (such as author's name, address, phone numbers, document abstract, etc.). This information is saved with the document for later classification.
For more information, see Document Information.

File->Close (Ctrl+W)

Close the file you are currently working on. If you have not saved your most recent changes, you will be prompted.
Typing Ctrl+W is equivalent to using the menubar.

File->Quit (Ctrl+Q)

Quits KWord.
Typing Ctrl+Q is equivalent to using the menubar.

Edit Menu

By clicking on the Edit menu, you can cut/copy/paste text, undo or redo edits and perform searches and text replacement.

Edit->Undo (Ctrl+Z)

Reverses the last action you performed. Not all actions can be reversed. If you are not able to Undo the last action, the Undo option will be displayed gray and is not accessible. For a more thorough discussion of Undo/Redo, click here.
Typing Ctrl+Z or clicking is equivalent to using the menubar.

Edit->Redo (Ctrl+Shift+Z)

Reverses the last Undo performed. If the Redo option is unavailable, the Toolbar will display this items gray. For a more thorough discussion of Undo/Redo, click here.
Typing Ctrl+Shift+Z or clicking is equivalent to using the menubar.

Edit->Cut (Ctrl+X)

Deletes the highlighted text from the document, and places a copy in the clipboard. For a more complete directions on cutting and pasting, and a full description of the clipboard, click here.
Typing Ctrl+X or clicking is equivalent to using the menubar.

Edit->Copy (Ctrl+C)

Places a copy of the highlighted text in the clipboard, without changing the text in the document. For a more complete directions on cutting and pasting, and a full description of the clipboard, click here.
Typing Ctrl+C or clicking is equivalent to using the menubar.

Edit->Paste (Ctrl+V)

Inserts a copy of the clipboard into the current cursor position. If there is highlighted text, KWord replaces replaces all highlighted text with the contents of the clipboard. The clipboard is not altered. For a more complete directions on cutting and pasting, and a full description of the clipboard, click here.
Typing Ctrl+V or clicking is equivalent to using the menubar.

Edit->Select All (Ctrl+A)

Immediately highlights all text of the current frameset.
Typing Ctrl+A is equivalent to using the menubar.

Edit->Select All Frames

Immediately selects all frames in the current document.

Edit->Select Frame

Selects the current text frame in the document.

Edit->Find... (Ctrl+F)

Allows you to search for a series of characters. The find features of KWord are covered in more detail under Searching for Text.
Typing Ctrl+F or clicking is equivalent to using the menubar.

Edit->Find Next (F3)

Repeat the last search for characters starting at the current cursor position. The find features of KWord are covered in more detail under Searching for Text.
Typing F3 is equivalent to using the menubar.

Edit->Find Previous (Shift+F3)

Repeat the last search for characters starting at the current cursor position and moving backwards. The find features of KWord are covered in more detail under Searching for Text.
Typing Shift+F3 is equivalent to using the menubar.

Edit->Replace... (Ctrl+R)

Allows you to replace one or more characters with another set of characters. The find and replace features of KWord are covered in more detail under Replacing Text.
Typing Ctrl+R is equivalent to using the menubar.

Edit->Delete Page

Delete the current page.

View Menu

View->New View

This will create a new view of your document. For more information on views, refer to the section entitled Using Multiple Views.

View->Close All Views (Ctrl+Shift+W)

This will close all views including the current view. This will also quit KWord. For more information on views, refer to the section entitled Using Multiple Views.

View->Split View

This will split the current view. The orientation of the split is determined by the 'Splitter Orientation. For more information on views, refer to the section entitled Using Multiple Views.

View->Remove View

This will close the current view. For more information on views, refer to the section entitled Using Multiple Views.

View->Splitter Orientation

This determines whether split views are oriented horizontally or vertically. Click on this option, and you are presented with a submenu with 2 options: Vertical and Horizontal. For more information on views, refer to the section entitled Using Multiple Views.

View->Display Mode

When this option is selected, a submenu opens with 3 options:
Page Mode - KWord will show you how your page looks in a WYSIWYG environment. This is the standard view for editing your document.
Preview Mode - This changes KWord from a single page view, to a multiple page view suitable for evaluating document flow and formatting. The number of pages shown in preview mode can be adjusted.
Text Mode - When this option is selected, KWord will only show the text of your document.

View->Formatting Characters

Clicking on this option toggles the display of formatting characters. Selecting this option will display non-printable characters (spaces, character returns, and tab stops). Selecting this option again will turn the display of these characters off.
Which formatting characters are visible can be configured in the KWord configuration dialog.

View->Frame Borders

Clicking on this option toggles the display of the borders to frames. Normally, KWord draws a gray line around each frame, so you can see the borders of the frames. If you want this option turned off, you can select this option. Selecting this option again will turn the borders back on.

View->Show/Hide Doc Structure

Clicking on this option toggles the display of the document structure window. For more information, refer to the section entitled Document Structure.

View->Show/Hide Rulers

Selecting this option will toggle the rulers off. Selecting this option again will turn rulers on. More information on rulers can be found under Using rulers.

View->Show/Hide Grid

Selecting this option will toggle the grid on. Selecting this option again will turn grid off.

View->Snap to Grid

Selecting this option will toggle the snap to grid on. Selecting this option again will turn snap to grid off. A checkmark before the menu entry will show you the current status of this option.

View->Zoom

Selecting this option will let you increase or decrease the page magnification. Selecting a zoom value larger than 100 percent causes the text and pictures to appear larger. Selecting a zoom value smaller than 100 percent will cause the text and pictures to appear smaller.
Important
The zoom value does not affect the final output of the text or pictures. This option is intended to help you edit and layout your documents.

Insert Menu

Insert->Special Character... (Alt+Shift+C)

Opens a dialog box which allows you to select characters not found on the keyboard.
Typing Alt+Shift+C is equivalent to using the menubar.

Insert->Page Break (Ctrl+Return)

This will enter a special character which will force text into the next connected text frame (Page Layout Templates) or the next page (Text Oriented Templates). More information can be found at Page Breaks located in the Working with Frames section.
Typing Ctrl+Return is equivalent to using the menubar.

Insert->Page

This option will insert a new page at the current cursor position.

Insert->Footnote/Endnote...

This will insert a footnote or endnote at the current cursor position. More detailed information can be found in Footnotes and Endnotes.

Insert->Table of Contents

This will insert or update a table of contents at the current cursor position. More detailed information can be found in Table of Contents.

Insert->Variable

Selecting this option will allow you to insert page numbers, date, time, author information, etc. You can find specific information about page numbers here. More information about Date and Times can be found under Inserting the Date and Time. More information on other variables can be found in Document Variables.

Insert->Expression

Selecting this option will allow you to insert common phrases. The phrases are organized into categories. For information on using and adding expressions refer to the section entitled Expressions.

Insert->Link...

Allows you to connect text to an external web page, email address or files For more information refer to the section entitled Document Links

.

Insert->Comment...

Allows you to add comments to selected text. For more information refer to the section entitled Document Comments.

Insert->File...

Allows you to insert another KWord file within the document. For more information refer to the section entitled Inserting Files.

Insert->Bookmark...

Allows you to mark your place in the document for easy retrieval. For more information refer to the section entitled Document Bookmarks.

Insert->Picture... (Shift+F5)

This option will let you create a new frame, and automatically insert a picture from a file into the new frame. After selecting this menu item or toolbar button, a dialog box will be opened, so you may select the picture file from your system. (For help with this dialog box, please see Inserting Graphics.) Once you have selected the file you want, click on the OK button. KWord will close the dialog box, and your cursor will change to cross hairs. Locate the cursor on the page where you would like to locate one corner of your picture. Click and hold the left mouse button, then drag the mouse. This will create a border which represents the final size of the picture in your document. When you are happy with the size of the picture, release the mouse button and the picture will be inserted in your new frame.
Typing Shift+F5 or clicking is equivalent to using the menubar.

Insert->Text Frame (F10)

To create a new text frame. After selecting this option, your cursor will change to cross hairs. Choose the location of one corner of your new text frame. Click on the left mouse button and hold the button down. Drag the mouse, until you have the desired text frame. When you have the correct shape and size, release the mouse button. KWord will now bring up a dialog box with options to connect this text frame to other frames in your document. For more information on this subject, see Working with Frames.
Typing F10 or clicking is equivalent to using the menubar.

Insert->Formula (F4)

Insert a formula into the document. More information on formulas in KWord can be found here.
Typing F4 or clicking are equivalent to using the menubar.

Insert->Object Frame

Creates a new frame, and opens a dialog box listing each of the KOffice applications. This will allow you to insert any data into your KWord document.
Clicking is equivalent to using the menubar.

Insert->Scan Image...

Allows you to access your scanner for inserting pictures into your document. For more information see the section entitled Using a picture from a scanner.

Format Menu

Format->Default Format

Automatically changes all formating back to the default settings for the selected text.
The default format can be set with the Document Configuration options.

Format->Font... (Alt+Ctrl+F)

Allows you to change the formatting characteristics of the selected text. For more details, go to Formating Characters
Typing Alt+Ctrl+F is equivalent to using the menubar.

Format->Paragraph... (Alt+Ctrl+P)

To change the indenting, spacing between paragraphs, text flow, tab stops, numbering and borders. For more details, go to Formating Paragraphs.
Typing Alt+Ctrl+P is equivalent to using the menubar.

Format->Footnote...

Allows you to change the look of your footnotes. For more information see Footnotes.

Format->Formula

Allows you to format the selected formula. For more information go to Formulae

Format->Style

Allows you to select a style for the selected text. Selecting this option shows a submenu listing all available paragraphs styles. Select the correct style and the paragraph style will be changed.
For more information go to Text Styles.

Format->Style Manager... (Alt+Ctrl+S)

Opens a dialog to allow you to format, add and delete styles. For more information go to Styles
   Typing Alt+Ctrl+S is equivalent to using the menubar. 

Format->Import Styles...

Allows you to import a style. For more information go to Text Styles.

Format->Create Style From Selection...

Uses the currently selected text to create a new style.
For more information go to Text Styles.

Format->Page Layout...

Use this to alter the properties of the printed page, including size, headers and footers. For more details, go to Formatting the Page

Format->Enable/Disable Document Headers

Selecting this option will toggle headers on. Selecting this option again will turn headers off. More information on headers and footers can be found under Headers and Footers.

Format->Enable/Disable Document Footers

Selecting this option will toggle footers on. Selecting this option again will turn footers off. More information on headers and footers can be found under Headers and Footers.

Frames Menu

Frames->Frame/Frameset Properties...

Allows you to configure basic formatting options for the frameset. More information on this subject can be found in Setting properties for frames.

Frames->Delete Frame

This will allow you to delete the entire frame, and all of the text and objects contained within the frame.

Frames->Raise Frame (Ctrl+Shift+R)

This will allow you to raise the frame up one level. For more information see the section entitled Raise and Lower frames.
Typing Ctrl+Shift+R is equivalent to using the menubar.

Frames->Lower Frame (Ctrl+Shift+L)

This will allow you to lower the frame down one level. For more information see the section entitled Raise and Lower frames.
Typing Ctrl+Shift+L is equivalent to using the menubar.

Frames->Bring to Front

This raises the currently selected frame to the top of all overlapping frames. For more information see the section entitled Raise and Lower frames.

Frames->Send to Back

This lowers the currently selected frame to the bottom of all overlapping frames. For more information see the section entitled Raise and Lower frames.

Frames->Create Linked Copy

Creates a duplicate frame. The contents of the new frame will automatically be updated to match the contents of the old frame. As you continue to edit the document, changes to one of these frames will result in the same changes to the other frame.

Frames->Convert to Text Box

Selected text is removed from the current frame. A new frame is created to allow the selected text to be inserted, and the new text frame is inserted into the current document. This is an easy way to remove a section of text and place it in a text box of its own.

Frames->Frame Style Manager...

Allows you to edit the frame styles. For more information see the section entitled Using frame styles

Frames->Create Framestyle From Frame...

Create a new framestyle based on the currently selected frame. For more information see the section entitled Using Framestyles.

Frames->Framestyle

Allows you to format the selected frame(s) with a predefined framestyle. For more information see the section entitled Using frame styles.

Frames->Frame Background Color...

This will allow you to change the background color of the current frame.

Frames->Configure Frame Border

This will allow you to change the border surrounding the current frame. When selected, a submenu will appear with all available border styles. Select the correct style and the borders are instantly changed.

Tools Menu

Tools->Spellcheck->Autospellcheck

Will toggle automatic spellchecking of the document on and off.

Tools->Spellcheck->Spelling...

Will check the spelling of the document.
Clicking is equivalent to using the menubar.

Tools->Autocorrection->Disable/Enable Autocorrection

Toggles autocorrection on and off. For more information see the section entitled Autocorrection.

Tools->Autocorrection->Apply Autocorrection

KWord will format your document according to specific rules. For more information see Manually Applying Autocorrection.

Tools->Change Case...

Allows you to set the case of all selected text. For more information see Changing Font Case.

Tools->Sort Text...

Alphabetizes the selected paragraphs. You will be given the option to sort in ascending or descending order.

Tools->Edit Personal Expressions...

This is for adding and editing expressions. For information on using and adding expressions refer to the section entitled Expressions.

Tools->Add Expression

Creates a new personal expression with the selected text. For more information on personal expressions, refer to the section entitled Expressions.

Tools->Custom Variables...

This is for editing custom document variables. For information on using and adding expressions refer to the section entitled Document variables.

Tools->Select Bookmark...

Jump to, rename or delete bookmarks. For more information see the section entitled Document Bookmarks.

Tools->Configure Mail Merge...

Displays the Mail Merge Setup Dialog.

Settings Menu

Settings->Toolbars

Allows you to hide or reveal toolbars individually. For more information see the section entitled Hiding, Changing and Moving Toolbars.

Settings->Configure Autocorrection...

Allows you to modify the autocorrection options. For more on Autocorrection, click here.

Settings->Configure Completion...

Allows you to modify the autocompletion options. For more see the section on Autocompletion.

Settings->Configure Shortcuts...

Allows you to change the keyboard shortcuts. For details, click here]

Settings->Configure Toolbars...

Allows you to change the toolbars. For details, click here

Settings->Configure KWord...

Allows you to change miscellaneous KWord options.For details, click here.

Help Menu

Help->KWord Handbook (F1)

Invokes the KDE Help system starting at the KWord help pages. (this document).

Help->What's This? (Shift+F1)

Changes the mouse cursor to a combination arrow and question mark. Clicking on items within KWord will open a help window (if one exists for the particular item) explaining the item's function.

Help->Report Bug...

Opens the Bug report dialog where you can report a bug or request a “wishlist” feature.

Help->About KWord

This will display version and author information.

Help->About KDE

This displays the KDE version and other basic information.
Prev Contents Next
Hiding, Changing and Moving Toolbars The File Toolbar

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

File Toolbar

The File toolbar consists of 5 buttons. Each button performs a task from the menubar. Click on that task for more details.


Button Command
Open New File
Open Saved File
KWord/1.5/Manual/SaveDoc
Print File
Print Preview
Prev Contents Next
The Menubar The Format Toolbar

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Format ToolBar

The Format toolbar consists of 9 buttons. Each button performs a task from the format character dialog.


Button Command
Select Font Face
Character Size
Toggle Bold Text
Toggle Italics
Toggle Underline
Toggle Strikeout
Toggle Superscript Text
Toggle Subscript Text
Change Font Color

Clicking on the letter changes the selected text to the color previewed in the underline. Clicking the arrow to the right of the letter will let you select a new color.


Prev Contents Next
The File Toolbar The Insert Toolbar

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Insert Toolbar

The Insert toolbar consists of 4 buttons. Each button performs a task from the menubar. Click on that task for more details.


Button Command
Insert Picture
Insert Text Frame
Insert Formula Frame
Insert Object Frame


Prev Contents Next
The Format Toolbar The Edit Toolbar

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Edit Toolbar

The Edit toolbar consists of 8 buttons. Each button performs a task from the menubar. Click on that task for more details.


Button Command
Undo
Redo
Cut
Copy
Paste
Spell Check
Find
Zoom


Prev Contents Next
The Insert Toolbar The Paragraph Toolbar

The Paragraph toolbar consists of 9 buttons. Each button performs a task from the menubar.


Button Command
Select Character Style
Left Text Align
Center Text Align
Right Text Align
Justify Text
Numbered Text paragraphs
Bulleted Text paragraphs
Reduce paragraph indent
Increase Paragraph Indent


Prev Contents Next
The Edit Toolbar The Border Toolbar

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Border Toolbar

The Border toolbar consists of 10 buttons. Each button performs a task from the menubar. Click on that task for more details.


Button Command
Set framestyle
Toggle border outline
Toggle Left Frame Border
Toggle Right Frame Border
Toggle Top Frame Border
Toggle Bottom Frame Border
Select Border Size
Select Border Style
Select Border Color
Select Background Color


Prev Contents Next
The Paragraph Toolbar Selecting Colors from a Select Color dialog

KWord uses a common dialog box any time the user needs to select a color for an object (text, backgrounds, borders, etc.).

This section will go into some detail on how to use this color dialog to choose the best color for your object.

When it is necessary to select a color, a dialog box appears.

The color dialog is an incredibly flexible dialog box, which makes it possible to select colors in one of six different methods:

Spectrum selectors

The spectrum selectors consists of a square to adjust Hue and Saturation, and a tall narrow box to adjust Value.
The white cross hairs in the box show the currently selected color on the spectrum. Drag the cross hairs up to increase saturation. Drag down to decrease saturation. Move the cross hairs left or right to change the hue.
To adjust the value of the color, use the tall, narrow box to move the black arrow. Sliding the arrow up increases the color's value. Sliding the arrow down decreases the color's value.
The currently selected color is visible in the colored square below the Add to Custom Colors button.

Hue, Saturation and Value

Using the three spin boxes labeled H,S and V, a user can specify the Hue (Range 0-359), Saturation (Range 0-255) and Value (Range 0-255) respectively.
The currently selected color is visible in the colored square below the Add to Custom Colors button.

Red, Green and Blue

Using the three spin boxes labeled R,G and B, a user can specify the amount of Red, Green and Blue to be mixed to form the current color. All three boxes can be set to any value from 0-255.
The currently selected color is visible in the colored square below the Add to Custom Colors button.

Palettes

A palette is a group of related colors. These colors are all made available for easy selection according to a meaningful association.
To select a new palette, click on the combo box at the top of the palette selection area. You will be presented with several choices:
Recent Colors - This is a list of the most recently used colors in your document. You can use this palette to maintain consistency. As each new color is selected, it is automatically added to the recent colors palette.
Custom Colors - You can create your own custom palette. This is done by selecting a color using one of the other color selection options, and clicking on Add to Custom Colors. That color is now added to your custom color palette.
Forty Colors - This is a list of 40 commonly used colors. This is a good palette to choose from if some of the people viewing your document will be on machines with limited color capability.
Web Colors - This is a predefined palette of colors that you might find useful for designing web pages.
Royal Colors - This is a predefined palette of colors including numerous shades of purple and yellow.
Named Colors - This is a list of color names. The names are based on standard X server color names. The names are designed to give descriptive names to each color. Simply select the name you want.
Once you have selected a palette, you will be presented with a small square showing each color available in the palette. To select a color from the palette, simply click on the square of the desired color.
The currently selected color is visible in the colored square below the Add to Custom Colors button.

Eye dropper

The eye dropper can be used to sample a color from the screen.
When the eye dropper button is clicked, the cursor becomes crosshairs. Simply place the crosshairs over any spot on the screen and click once. KWord will detect the selected color and automatically change the current color to match the selection.
This is especially useful for matching color elements between previously created elements and new items.
The currently selected color is visible in the colored square below the Add to Custom Colors button.

HTML code

If you know the HTML color code you want to use, you can enter it into the text box labeled HTML:.
For more information on HTML color codes, visit the this color code page.
The currently selected color is visible in the colored square below the Add to Custom Colors button.

Once the color is selected, click OK to make that the current color for your text, border, etc.

Click Cancel to abort the color selection.


Prev Contents Next
The Border Toolbar Selecting files using the file dialog

KWord uses a common dialog box for all file related actions (saving, loading, or selecting new files for insertion into the document). An example is shown below.

This section will look more closely at this dialog and provided detailed information on its use.

We will begin at the top of the dialog.

Toolbar

The current location on the drive is listed at the top-center of the dialog. This example dialog shows the current folder is /home/mmcbride/kword. If you click on this drop down box, you will see common and recently visited folders. By selecting one of these folders, you will be immediately moved to that folder and the dialog box will update the file list.

In the upper left corner, is a blue arrow pointed up. This arrow will take you up one level in the folder structure.

The next two buttons are back and forward buttons. These buttons work just like those in an Internet browser. You can use the Back button to travel to the previous folder, and the Forward button to advance into a folder you just came from.

Next to the arrow buttons, is a Reload button. Clicking this button, causes KWord to reload the current folder if new files have been added or deleted.

To the right of the Reload button, is a blue file folder with a starburst. This button will let you create a new folder and name it.

Next to the new folder button, is a button with a star on it. This button allows you to set and navigate through bookmarks. This is a quick way to jump to commonly accessed folders. By clicking this button, a submenu appears which allows you to add bookmarks or jump to a new bookmark.

Next to the bookmark button, is a button with a wrench on it. Clicking this button brings up a sub menu with several entries:

Sorting

If this option is selected, a submenu will appear allowing you to sort your files by name, date or size. You can sort them forward or reversed. You can also determine if folders should be listed before files, or mixed within the files.

Short View

If this option is selected, only the names of the files and folders will be shown.
Compare this to detailed view.

Detailed View

If this option is selected, the names, sizes, dates, permissions, file owners and group ownerships are shown.
Compare this to short view.

Show Hidden Files

This will toggle between revealing and hiding normally hidden files. In most cases you will want to leave this option off.

Show/Hide Quick Access Navigation Panel

The tall box along the left side of the dialog with a dark grey background is the Quick Navigation Panel. You can use this option to toggle whether it is visible or not.
More detailed information about the Quick Navigation Panel is available

further down this page.

Show/Hide Preview

You can use this option to toggle whether the preview panel is visible or not. Typically, the preview panel is left off, but it can be useful when looking for a picture to insert into a document.

Separate Folders

Use this option to toggle between a 2 pane view of the filesystem and a one pane view of the filesystem. Most people will not need to worry about this option as most people prefer the one pane view.

Quick Navigation Bar

Along the left side of the dialog box, is a column that contains several icons. You can think of each of these icons as a shortcut to another subfolder. If you click on an icon, you will be immediately moved to that location.

You can add/edit or delete entries from the Location Bar. Simply click with the right mouse button and a small popup menu will appear.

File Name and Filters

The text box labeled Location: contains the current filename Resume.kwd. This text box will contain the filename of the currently selected file when loading new documents or files into KWord. When saving a file, you will enter the desired filename in this text box.

The text box labeled Filter: shows we are only looking at KWord files. By clicking on the combo box, you can select from several different file formats. You can also select All Supported Files to display all files that are supported by KWord. The file types available will change depending on the specific task at hand.

If there is a mark in the checkbox labeled Automatically select filename extension, then KWord will add the correct filename extension based on your selection in the Filter: drop down box. If there is no mark in this box, you are responsible for providing an extension. Most users will leave this box marked.

There is a Cancel button, if you click this button, the action will be aborted, and you will return to editing the document.

There is an OK button, which will be used when we have selected the correct filename.

Using this dialog, you can move through the folder tree to find any location on your computer.

To enter a folder click on that folder. To exit that folder, click the blue up arrow button. Note

This dialog box is used in many different tasks in KWord. The task will determine the exact effect of the information you have entered into this dialog box. For more information on the exact effect, see the documentation on that task.


Prev Contents Next
Selecting Colors from a Select Color dialog Configure Key Bindings (keyboard shortcuts)

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

KWord Options

Introduction

This section of the documentation will show you how to configure KWord to suit your personal work style and preferences.

KWord can be modified in three separate ways:

1. Configure shortcuts
2. Configure toolbars
3. Miscellaneous options

Configure Key Bindings (keyboard shortcuts)

To configure the keyboard shortcuts select Settings->Configure Shortcuts... from the menubar.

This will bring up a dialog box.

To edit the shortcuts, the first thing you need to do is find the action you want to edit. All of the possible actions are listed in the combo box labeled Action. By using the scrollbar, locate the action you are interested in and click once with the left mouse button.

Once you have selected the action, you can turn your attention to the bottom half of the dialog box. You use the bottom half of the dialog box to change the shortcuts.

None

By selecting this option, the currently selected action will not have any keyboard shortcut.

Default

By selecting this option, the currently selected action will use the default shortcut. Once this option is clicked, the default keyboard shortcut is listed below.

Custom

By selecting this option, you can choose any keyboard combination as a shortcut for this action.

Defining custom keyboard shortcuts

You determine the key combination by clicking on the button with the current keyboard combination in it. A second dialog will appear:

This dialog box allows you to determine two different key combinations which will trigger the desired action: Primary shortcut: and Alternate shortcut:.

Defining simple keyboard shortcuts

Begin by deciding if you want to specify the Primary shortcut: or Alternate shortcut: , by placing a mark in the appropriate radiobutton.

The button will clear the current keyboard shortcut.

Now type the keyboard shortcut into the keyboard. KWord will use this keyboard combination as the new keyboard shortcut. The window will close automatically.

Once you have completed your entries, simply click on OK to accept the changes or Cancel to cancel your changes.

Defining multi-key keyboard shortcuts

Multi-key keyboard shortcuts can be used when you run out of simple keyboard shortcuts.

Multi-key shortcuts are edited the same as simple keyboard shortcuts, except a mark is placed in the check box labeled Multi-key mode prior to entering the keyboard shortcut.

You can now enter multiple keyboard characters for the keyboard shortcut.

Note
It is important to understand that keyboard combinations (i.e.: Alt+Shift+P) are still a single character because all the keys are depressed at the same time.
An example of a multi-key combination would be if you press Alt+X, release both characters then type a W. This is a multi-key combination.

Once you have completed your entries, simply click on OK to accept the changes or Cancel to cancel your changes.


Prev Contents Next
Selecting files using the file dialog Configure Toolbars

To configure KWord's toolbars select Settings->Configure Toolbars... from the menubar.

This will bring up a dialog box. You can add or remove as many toolbar buttons to as many toolbars as you like. You can also move the buttons around on the toolbar using this dialog.

Adding a button to a toolbar

To add a button to a toolbar, you move it from the Available actions: box to the Current actions: column.

First select the toolbar you want to add a button to by selecting the toolbar from the combo box labeled Toolbar:

Now select the action you want to add from the combo box labeled Available actions: by clicking once with the left mouse button.

Click the blue arrow pointing to the right

Once the OK button or the Apply button has been clicked, the toolbars will change.

Deleting a button from a toolbar

To delete a button from a toolbar, you move it from the Current actions: box to the Available actions: column.

First select the toolbar you want to delete a button from by selecting the toolbar from the combo box labeled Toolbar:

Select the toolbar button you want to remove the button from the combo box labeled Current actions:.

Click the blue arrow pointing to the left

Once the OK button or the Apply button has been clicked, the toolbars will change.

Moving a button on a toolbar

First select the toolbar you want to move a button on by selecting the toolbar from the combo box labeled Toolbar:

To move a button, simply click on the button you want to move with the left mouse button.

Click the up or down arrows to move the button up or down the toolbar respectively.

Once the OK button or the Apply button has been clicked, the toolbars will change.


Prev Contents Next
Configure Key Bindings (keyboard shortcuts) Configure KWord User Interface

To configure options regarding spelling and the user interface select Settings->Configure KWord... from the menubar.

This will bring up a dialog box.

Configure KWord User Interface

Clicking Interface will allow you to change the following.

Units:

Select your preferred unit of measurement. KWord will use these units for all measurements. See Using Rulers for more information.

Show status bar

Placing a mark in this check box makes the status bar visible in KWord. See The KWord Screen for more information.

Show scrollbar

Placing a mark in this check box makes the scrollbar visible in KWord. See The KWord Screen for more information.

PageUp/PageDown moves the caret

If this check box has a mark, then when you press the PageUp and PageDown keys on the keyboard, KWord moves the text cursor (the caret) down one page. If there is no mark in this check box then KWord moves the view, but does not change the position of the text cursor.

Number of recent files:

This determines the maximum number of files that are listed under File->Open Recent command. You can adjust this value from 1-20.

Horizontal grid size:

Determines the horizontal size of the grid. When frames and tab stops are placed on the page, they are placed on a point in the grid. This gives your document a more professional look because elements are effectively aligned. You can reduce the grid size if you need finer control of your layout.

Vertical grid size:

Determines the vertical size of the grid. When frames are placed on the page, they are placed on a point in the grid. This gives your document a more professional look because elements are effectively aligned. You can reduce the grid size if you need finer control of your layout.

Paragraph indent by toolbar buttons:

Use this spin box to determine how far the paragraph is indented when using the increase indent button () and the decrease indent button ().

Number of pages per row in preview mode:

Determines the number of pages per row in preview mode. This determines the size of the pages in preview mode.

When you are happy with the changes, simply click OK.

If you click on Cancel, all changes will be lost.

Clicking on the Defaults button restores all values to their default values.

Configure document options

Document defaults

Default column spacing

Use this to adjust the default spacing between columns. For more information on columns see Columns.

Default font:

Click on the Choose... button, and a new dialog will appear. Use this dialog to choose the default font. This setting determines the default font used by KWord until further formatting is done. You can revert any text to this default by selecting Format->Default Format from the menubar.

Global language:

Use this drop down box to determine the default language for the document. This setting is used by the hyphenation and spelling tools.

Automatic hyphenation

Place a mark in this checkbox if you want KWord to automatically hyphenate long words when it determines the word wrap in text frames.

Document settings

Autosave every (min):

You can use this to adjust how often KWord saves a temporary file. If you set this value to No autosave, KWord will not autosave. You can adjust the autosave from 1 minute to 60 minutes.

Create backup file

If there is a mark in this checkbox, KWord will automatically create a backup file every time you save your document.

Starting page number:

Use this text box to determine the starting page number. For more information on page numbering see KWord/1.5/Manual/DocVar#Page_Numbering|Page Numbering]].
Tip
This is helpful if you have split a single document into multiple files.

Tab stop:

Each KWord document has a default set of tab stops. If you add tab stops to your document, the newly added tab stops override the default tabstops. You can use this text box to define the spacing between default tab stops.
As an example. If you enter 1.5 in this text box, and the unit of measure is in centimeters, then the first default tab stop will be located 1.5 cm to the right of the left margin of the frame. The second default tab stop will be located at 3 cm from the left margin, etc....

Cursor settings

Cursor in protected area

When there is a mark in this check box, and you click in a protected frame of your document, a cursor appears. When the mark is removed from this check box, and you click in a protected frame, there is no cursor visible.

When you are happy with the changes, simply click OK.

If you click on Cancel, all changes will be lost.

Clicking on the Defaults button restores all values to their default values.

Configure Spelling.

To configure the options for the speller, click on the button labeled Spelling.

Each option is detailed below.

Default language:

Used by the spelling application to choose the correct dictionary.

Enable background spellchecking

If a mark is placed in this checkbox, KWord will check the spelling of words in your document as you type them. Words that KWord believes are misspelled will have a red line drawn under them.

Skip all uppercase words

If a mark is placed in this checkbox, KWord will not check the spelling of any word which consists of all capital letters.
Tip
This is useful if the document you are working on uses a large number of acronyms. If this box is left unchecked, most of those acronyms will be incorrectly marked. By placing a mark in this checkbox, KWord will not mark the acronyms as misspelled.

Skip run-together words

If this box is not checked, and KWord finds a two words in its dictionary that are placed next to each other, it will be marked as misspelled. If this box is checked, the combined word will be ignored.
Examples of such words are shutout, cannot, and blackout.
Tip
Checking this box will help prevent KWord from flagging website and email addresses for spelling errors. These addresses often contain words run together.

Ignoring words

The bottom half of the dialog box allows you to designate specific words (they may be specialized terminology, proper names, etc) which should be ignored by the spelling program.

Adding a word to the ignore list

To add a word, type the word in the text box directly below the words Ignore These Words and click the Add button.

Deleting a word from the ignore list

To remove a word, select the word in the listbox containing all the currently ignored words by clicking on it with the left mouse button. Now click the Remove button.

Changing the order a word appears in the list

To move a word in the list, select the word in the listbox containing all the currently ignored words by clicking on it with the left mouse button. Now click the Move Upbutton or the Move Down button to move the word within the list.

When you are happy with the changes, simply click OK.

If you click on Cancel, all changes will be lost.

Clicking on the Defaults button restores all values to their default values.

Configure miscellaneous options

Misc

Undo/redo limit:

Use this spin box or slider to determine how many actions KWord keeps in its 'Undo buffer. Any action that exceeds this number will be forgotten.

Display links

Placing a mark in this check box makes document links visible in KWord. If there is no mark in this check box, document links will be hidden. See Document links for more information.

Underline all links

Placing a mark in this check box will have KWord automatically underline a document link when it is created. See Document links for more information.

Display comments

Placing a mark in this check box makes document comments visible in KWord. See Document comments for more information.

Display field code

If there is a mark in this check box, KWord shows the variable name of document variables, rather than the content of the variable in the KWord screen. If this check box does not have a mark, then KWord shows the contents of the variables.
Note
This option does not affect the printed output. The contents of the variables are printed regardless of the state of this check box.

View Formatting

You can use these four check boxes to determine what formatting characters are displayed when you have asked KWord to show formatting characters.

View formatting end paragraph

Toggles the display of paragraph marks (new-line characters) on and off.

View formatting space

Toggles the display of individual spaces on and off.

View formatting tabs

Toggles the display of tab stops on and off.

View formatting break

Toggles the display of frame breaks on and off.

When you are happy with the changes, simply click OK.

If you click on Cancel, all changes will be lost.

Clicking on the Defaults button restores all values to their default values.

Configure path options

Use this dialog to set the Backup Path and the directory for your Personal Expression list in KWord.

Configure Text-To-Speech options

See the Text-to-Speech section in the accessibility chapter for further details.


Prev Contents Next
Configure Toolbars Questions and Answers

When I try to load a document or picture, it does not appear in my dialog box, but I know I saved it there. Why can I not see it?

Check to make sure that you have selected the correct file type in the open dialog box. If you save a file in one format, but ask KWord to show you the files from another format, you will not see your saved file.

What is a kwd file? What is a kwt file?

A kwd file is a KWord document.

A kwt file is a KWord template file.

Where can I get updates?

For updates to KWord you should always check the following sites:

The KOffice website (http://koffice.kde.org) is the first place to look for updates. Any software updates, bug fixes or announcements of new releases of KOffice will be found here.

Addons for KOffice can be found at http://koffice.kde.org/addons/. 14.4.

How do themes affect KWord?

KWord (like all of KOffice) is completely themeable. You can use any QT or KDE theme to customize the look of KWord.

Can I use KWord to read Microsoft® Word files?

KWord does have the ability to import Microsoft® Word files. The conversion process is not perfect, and some formatting information will be lost. For more details please refer to the Import/Export Filters section of the documentation.

Can I save my KWord document as a Microsoft® Word file?

At the moment, KWord does not yet provide support for exporting to Microsoft® Word documents. If you need to exchange documents with MS Word, you should use Rich Text Format as an intermediate file format. Rich Text Format files are converted well by both Microsoft® Word and KWord,

Can I save my KWord document as a PDF file?

Yes. Instructions on creating a PDF file are found here.

I have to exchange documents with a friend who does not have KWord; what is the best way to do this ?

What you and your friend need to do is agree on a file format that both word processors can read and write effectively. Rich Text Format is probably a good choice.


Prev Contents Next
Configure KWord User Interface Credits and Licenses

KWord Copyright 1999-2005 by The KWord Team

KWord Developers (Alphabetically)

  • Dag Andersen (danders AT get2net.dk)
  • John Califf (jcaliff AT compuzone.net)
  • Frank Dekervel (frank.dekervel AT student.kuleuven.ac.be)
  • Krister Wicksell Eriksson (krister.wicksell AT spray.se)
  • David Faure (faure AT kde.org)
  • Nicolas Goutte (goutte AT kde.org)
  • Shaheed Haque (srhaque AT iee.org)
  • Simon Hausmann (hausmann AT kde.org)
  • Nash Hoogwater (nrhoogwater AT wanadoo.nl)
  • Stephan Kulow (coolo AT kde.org)
  • Sven Lüppken (sven AT kde.org>)
  • Laurent Montel (montel AT kde.org)
  • Daniel Naber (daniel.naber AT t-online.de)
  • Reginald Stadlbauer (reggie AT kde.org)
  • Werner Trobin (trobin AT kde.org)
  • Torben Weis (weis AT kde.org)
  • Joseph Wenninger (jowenn AT kde.org)
  • Thomas Zander (zander AT kde.org)

KWord Import/Export Filter Developers (Alphabetically)

  • Enno Bartels (ebartels AT nwn.de)
  • Wolf-Michael Bolle
  • Matthias Kalle Dalheimer (kalle AT dalheimer.de)
  • Clarence Dang (dang AT kde.org)
  • Frank Dekervel (frank.dekervel AT student.kuleuven.ac.be)
  • Nicolas Goutte (goutte AT kde.org)
  • Tomasz Grobelny (grotk AT poczta.onet.pl)
  • Shaheed Haque (srhaque AT iee.org)
  • Ariya Hidayat (ariya AT kde.org)
  • Robert Jacolin (rjacolin AT ifrance.com)
  • Michael Johnson
  • Ewald Snel (ewald AT rambo.its.tudelft.nl)

KFormula developers

  • Andrea Rizzi (rizzi AT kde.org)
  • Ulrich Kuettler (ulrich.kuettler AT mailbox.tu-dresden.de)

KOffice 1 Documentation by Mike McBride

This documentation is licensed under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License.

This program is licensed under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License v2.


Prev Contents Next
Questions and Answers Howto Obtain KWord

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

How to obtain KWord

KWord is part of the KDE project http://www.kde.org. KWord is located in the KOffice package which can be obtained from ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/, the main ftp site of the KDE project.

Many distributions offer precompiled binaries on their ftp sites. Please check your distribution's web sites for more information.

If you want to compile KWord from source, then you should read through the next few sections for help on compilation.


Prev Contents Next
Credits and Licenses Requirements

In order to successfully use KWord, you need:

  • Qt™ Toolkit 3.2 or later. This can be obtained from Qt Software.
Tip
While KOffice will compile and run with any version of Qt™ 3.2 or later, it is recommended that you compile and install Qt™ 3.3.4 to take advantage of all the bug fixes (including some security fixes) that have occurred.
  • KDE 3.3.0 libraries (kdelibs) and the KDE 3.3.0 base package (kdebase). These can be obtained from the KDE web page.
Tip
While KOffice will compile and run with any version of KDE 3.3.0 or later, it is recommended that you compile and install KDE 3.4 to take advantage of all the bug fixes that have occurred.
It is also recommended that you install the arts package 1.3.2 from the KDE FTP site.
  • GNU c++ compiler or any c++ compiler that supports exceptions. For help on obtaining this, please refer to your distribution's web site.
  • autoconf 2.53 or later and automake 1.7 or later
Note
In order to use external databases for mail merging documents, you must have the QT toolkit compiled with SQL support. To add SQL support (as a plugin), simply include -plugin-sql-driver in your configure line.

driver should be replaced with mysql, odbc, CVS, or psql as is appropriate for your database needs.


Prev Contents Next
How to Obtain KWord Compile and Install from Source

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Compilation and Installation

Complete instructions on installing KOffice from source are located at http://www.koffice.org/download/source.php.


Prev Contents Next
Requirements Command Line Options

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

KWord Command Line Options

You can specify some initial actions for KWord. The most commonly used options are discussed below with instructions on finding help on the rest of the command line options.

Specifying the file name

Probably the most common command line option used is to specify the file to edit.

The format for specifying the file name is:

$kword filename

Example:

$ kword Resumé.kwd

This will cause KWord to load Resumé.kwd for editing.

Show KWord version

To see the version numbers for the QT toolkit, KDE, and KWord type:

$ kword -v

Show the license for KWord

To see the license for KWord type:

$ kword --license

Show KWord developer list

To see the list of developers for KWord type:

$ kword --author

Other command line options

There are many other, rarely used, command line options. You can get detailed help on these options by typing:

$ kword --help


Prev Contents Next
Compile and Install from Source Import and Export Filters

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Introduction to Filters

KWord has the ability (with varying success) to load data from foreign (non-KOffice) data files. KWord also has the ability to save data as non-KOffice data files. This is provided to help users of KWord to interact more seamlessly with people who use other operating systems and wordprocessors.

KWord does this by loading a non-KOffice datafile into memory and passing the data through a filter to extract as much information as possible from the data file. Some formatting information will be lost or changed by the filter in the attempt.

When KWord reads data into KWord from a non-KOffice file format, it is importing the data.

When KWord saves a KWord document as a non-KOffice file format, it is exporting the data.


Prev Contents Next
Command ine Options Filters included in KWord

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Filters included in KWord

KWord comes with the following filters:

Application Import Export
Abiword Yes Yes
AmiPro Yes Yes
Applixword Yes No
HTML Yes Yes
KPresenter Yes No
Hancom Word Yes No
Magic Point Presentation Yes No
Microsoft® Powerpoint Yes No
Microsoft® Word Yes No
Microsoft® Write Yes Yes
Oasis OpenDocument Yes Yes
OpenOffice.org Presentation Yes No
OpenOffice.org Text Document Yes Yes
Palm Document Yes Yes
PDF Yes No
Plain Text Yes Yes
RTF Yes Yes
SGML No Yes
TeX Document No Yes
WML Yes Yes
WordPerfect® Yes Yes
XML Yes No

For details on each filter, please refer to the KOffice filters web page.


Prev Contents Next
Import and Export Filters Key Bindings Summary

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Key Bindings Summary

Keybindings for Working with Documents

Start New Document Ctrl+N
Open Document Ctrl+O
Save Document Ctrl+S
Print Document Ctrl+P
Close Document Ctrl+W
Quit KWord Ctrl+Q

Keybindings for Character Selection

Move selection one character to the left. Shift+Left Arrow
Move selection one word to the left. Ctrl+Shift+Left Arrow
Move selection one character to the right. Shift+Right Arrow
Move selection one word to the right. Ctrl+Shift+Right Arrow
Selects all characters from the start of the selection, to the character directly up one line. Shift+Up Arrow
Selects all characters from the start of the selection, to the first character of the line directly above. Ctrl+Shift+Up Arrow
Selects all characters from the start of the selection, to the character directly down one line. Shift+Down Arrow
Selects all characters from the start of the selection, to the last character of the line directly below. Ctrl+Shift+Down Arrow
Selects all characters from the start of the selection, to the beginning of the line. Shift+Home
Selects all characters from the start of the selection, to the beginning of the document. Ctrl+Shift+Home
Selects all characters from the start of the selection, to the end of the line. Shift+End
Selects all characters from the start of the selection, to the end of the document. Ctrl+Shift+End
Moves the current endpoint one screen up. Shift+Page-Up
Moves the current endpoint one page up. The endpoint is located at the first character of this page. Ctrl+Shift+Page-Up
Moves the current endpoint down one screen. Shift+Page-Down
Moves the current endpoint down one page. The endpoint is located at the first character of this page. Ctrl+Shift+Page-Down
Select all text in the current frame. Ctrl+A

Keybindings for Character Formatting

Toggle Boldface On/Off Ctrl+B
Toggle Italics On/Off Ctrl+I
Toggle Underline On/Off Ctrl+U
Format Font Alt+Ctrl+F
Decrease Font Size Ctrl+<
Increase Font Size Ctrl+>

Keybindings for Paragraph Formatting

Align Block (Justify) Ctrl+J
Align Center Alt+Ctrl+C
Align Left Ctrl+L
Align Right Alt+Ctrl+R
Format Paragraph Alt+Ctrl+P

Keybindings for Basic Editing Functions and Search and Replace

Copy Ctrl+C (Ctrl+Insert)
Cut Ctrl+X (Shift+Delete)
Paste Ctrl+V (Shift+Insert)
Find Ctrl+F
Replace Ctrl+R
Undo Ctrl+Z
Redo Ctrl+Shift+Z

Keybindings for Inserting

Create Text Frame F10
Insert Picture Shift+F5
Create Formula Frame F4
Create Table F5
Insert Special Character Alt+Shift+C
Insert Non-breaking Space Ctrl+Space
Insert Soft Hyphen Ctrl+-
Insert Line Break Shift+Return
Insert Hard Frame Break Ctrl+Return

Keybindings for Accessibility

Popup Context Menu Menu (see note below)
Resize Panel Forward F8
Resize Panel Reverse Shift+F8
Set Focus to Widget Alt+F8
Enter keyboard Mouse Emulation mode Alt+F12
Click mouse in Mouse Emulation mode spacebar
Go to Document Structure Alt+1
Go to Document Alt+2
Note
On most keyboards, the Menu key is on the righthand side between the Windows® and Ctrl keys. It has a menu icon on it.

Keybindings for Mouse Navigation

Miscellaneous Keyboard Shortcuts

KWord Handbook F1
What's This? Shift+F1
Completion Ctrl+E
Lower Frame Ctrl+Shift+L
Raise Frame Ctrl+Shift+R
Show Stylist Alt+Ctrl+S
Prev Contents Next
Filters included in KWord KWord Technical details

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Kword MIME types

The KWord MIME type is : application/x-kword


Prev Contents Next
Key Bindings Summary (Shortcuts) Glossary

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

KWord has been superseded by Calligra Words.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Glossary

Aspect Ratio

This is the ratio of the measurement of a screen, picture or document horizontally compared to the vertical measurement. All standard computer monitors have the same aspect ratio, regardless of their resolution. Any KWord document that conforms to the standard screen will look good on any monitor.
For many images, it is important to maintain the aspect ratio. This prevents distortion to the picture.

Binary code

Binary code is the actual instructions for the computer. So if we refer to binaries we mean the executable KWord program. While computers have no difficulties reading binary files, they are not easily understood by people. Compare this distribution method to Source Code. For more information on compiling KWord, see the section entitled Installation

Bitmap Image

Bit mapped images are composed of individual dots. This type of file is very good for photographs and complex drawings. The downside of using bitmap images, is that when you change the size of the image on the page, there is a loss of detail. The file names of such pictures often end in jpeg, png or gif.

Cells

Tables are made up of rows and columns of cells. Each cell is defined by a combination of the row and column of a heading.

Clipboard

The clipboard is a temporary storage area in memory. Whenever you use the Cut or Copy command, you are placing the object that was selected into this memory location. Then when you use the Paste command, you insert the information from the clipboard into the document. For more information see the section on Cut/Copy/Paste.

Compiling

When you compile a program, you are converting it from a source file (which is easily edited by a programmer) into a binary file (which the computer uses). Compare this distribution method to Binary Code.
Compiling programs is not as easy as installing binary versions. Users who are only interested in using KWord are encouraged to find a binary version of KWord for their computer. For users who want to learn more about programming, more information on compiling KWord is available in the section entitled Installation.

Custom Variables

Using custom variables you can store certain values (e.g. numbers or text) for later use in your document or in a script. If you want to find out more about custom variables, see Document Variables.

DEB

This is a binary file format that is used by Debian and Debian-based distributions. This will be the suffix of a file specifically for these distributions. An example would be "koffice-1.2.deb". For more information on installing these files, refer to the Debian Web Site.

Dialog Box

A dialog box is a small window that appears on top of your working document. This window usually has questions, information or configuration options related to the task you are performing. When you are finished with the dialog box, it will disappear and return you to your document (possibly after making some changes to the document).

DTP

Stands for DeskTop Publishing.

FAQ

Stands for Frequently Asked Questions and normally means a document, where questions that arise many times are answered. If you have a question to the developers of KOffice, you should always have a look at the FAQ first; you can find the latest version here.

File Mask

A file mask can be thought of as a strainer for you. On the average computer, there are several thousand files. These files are sorted into sub-directories, but it is not uncommon for many users to have 100's of data files in a single sub-directory.
Fortunately for us, most applications use a suffix to their filenames. By applying a file mask, KWord will only show you the files which are not filtered out by the mask. (That is to say KWord only shows the files that fit through the strainer). This can be helpful if you have many files from many different applications. The file mask is incorporated in the Filter: line of the Save Document and Open Document dialog boxes.
As an example. If you use a file mask for KWord files, the file mask will try to filter out all files that are not for KWord.

Filter

A filter takes a document file from one program (e.g. Microsoft® Word), and filters out the text and formatting information and converts that information into a KWord document. Filters are used to read and write files for other programs. More information on the filters included with KWord is available in the section entitled Import/Export Filters.

Footer

The footer of a page is an area below the normal text area. Often it contains the page numbering and maybe some additional information. The contents of the footer are normally the same for most pages, and changing the footer on one page will change all other pages as well. See Header.

Frame

Nearly everything in KWord is in a frame. Text is always in a text frame. Pictures are in picture frames. Parts are in part frames. A frame is basically just a rectangle that can contain some part of your document. Frames can be moved, resized, deleted etc.

Frameset

A frame-set is a group of frames which are connected together. If you are writing text that does not fit into the first frame of a frame-set, it will continue in the next frame belonging to that frame-set.

FTP

FTP is the File Transfer Protocol; it is an Internet protocol that allows you to retrieve files from so-called FTP servers. If you want to download KOffice from the Internet, you will probably use FTP.

Hard Frame Break

Normally, KWord automatically adjusts text so it fits into a text frame. By inserting a hard frame break you can force KWord to always start the next frame in the frameset with the text that follows the break.

Hanging indention

A paragraph where the first line of the paragraph extends outwards to the left compared with other lines in the paragraph.

Header

The header of a page is an area above the normal text area. Often it contains the page numbering and maybe some additional information. The contents of the header normally are the same for most pages, and changing the header on one page will change all other pages as well. See Footer.

HTML

Stands for HyperText Markup Language. Most web pages on the Internet are written in HTML. KWord can read and write HTML documents for publishing on the World Wide Web.

Hue

Hue is a more technically correct term for what we generally refer to as color.
Examples of hues include red, green, blue and purple.

Inline frame

An inline frame is a special frame type in KWord. Inline frames are associated with a position in a text frame. KWord will keep the inline frame near the specified text. You will not be able to determine where exactly on a page the frame will appear, but it will be located close to the specified text.
If you insert or delete text in front of the specified text, the inline image will move up or down the page to follow the specified text
Tip
Inline frames are very useful when they contain a picture, graph or figure. Simply place the inline frame within the text which describes the object, and KWord will make sure both the text and the inline frame are always near each other.

KDE

Stands for theK Desktop Environment. Part of KDE is required for KWord to operate. The K Desktop Environment is a user interface which allows users to manipulate files and operate programs graphically. For more information, please visit http://www.kde.org.

Key Binding

All of the features of KWord are available through the menubar. You will find, however, that there are certain features of KWord that you use on a regular basis. You can bind a certain key combination to that function. Once this combination is bound to the function, you can use it as a shortcut to the function. KWord comes with several predefined key-bindings. For more information on changing the default key-bindings, click here.

Landscape

When you have a standard sheet of paper, you can either orient your document with the long side vertically or horizontally. When the horizontal dimension is greater than the vertical, this is termed Landscape.
Example:
Compare with Portrait.

Menubar

The menubar is located at the top of the KWord screen. You can use it to access all features of KWord.
Menubar:

Portrait

When you have a standard sheet of paper, you can either orient your document with the long side vertically or horizontally. When the vertical dimension is greater than the horizontal, this is termed Portrait.
Example:
Compare with Landscape.

RPM

This is the binary file format for distributions based on the Red Hat® package manager, a widely used packaging tool for the Linux® operating system. If you still have to get KOffice and your system supports RPM packages, you should get KOffice packages ending in .rpm. They are very easy to use.

Saturation

Saturation refers to the subjective quantity of a specific hue in a color. Colors with a low saturation appear more white. Colors with high saturation appear more richly colored.
This is a set of four red dots which increase in saturation from left to right.

Scaling Pictures

Whenever you change the size of a graphics image, you are scaling that image. In KWord you scale the pictures by changing the shape of the frame which surrounds the graphic.

Source Code

Source code is the human readable version of an application (such as KWord). Computers cannot use source code directly. Instead, source code must be compiled into binary code, before use.

TAR

Tar gets its name historically from 'Tape Archive', and is a tool used for the archiving of files in so-called tar-files or tarballs which you recognize by their suffix .tar. You can find KOffice source and binary distributions as gzipped tar-files; however, you should not use them if there are special packages for your system and package manager. See RPM, DEB.

tar.gz

See TGZ.

TGZ

Files ending in .tar.gz or .tgz are tar-files compressed with the gzip program. This makes the tar files smaller and quicker to download. You can find KOffice source and binary distributions in this format; however, you should not use them if there are special packages for your system and package manager. See RPM, DEB.

Toolbar

A toolbar is a line of buttons which are shortcuts to more of the commonly used features of KWord. More information on toolbars can be found here.
Example Toolbar:

URL

URL is an abbreviation for Universal Resource Locator. A universal resource locator is the technical term for what is commonly referred to as a website's address.
Examples of URLs include http://www.koffice.org and http://www.kde.org

Value (color)

Color value refers to how bright or dark a color is. Colors with low value are more black in appearance. Colors with high value are more richly colored.
This is a set of four red dots which increase in value from left to right.

Vector Image

A vector based graphic is described in terms of lines and shapes, not in terms of dots. These files scale better than bit-mapped images.

WYSIWYG

Stands for What You See Is What You Get. KWord is a WYSIWYG word processor, which means that the document will appear the same on the screen while you are editing it, as it will on the printed page.

X Window System®

The X Window System® (also known simply as “X”) is required for KOffice to operate. More information on X Window System® for Linux® can be found at http://www.xfree86.org
Prev Contents
KWord Mime Type

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

This relates to a very old version. There is a page for a newer version here: KAddressBook

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

KAddressBook 4.3

Viewing KAddressBook within Kontact
KAddressBook stores all the personal details of your contacts.

Information

This page is related to KAddressBook version 4.3. If you have a different version of KAddressBook then you may find a page for that version here.


Features

As the name implies: this component manages your valued contacts. The application providing this component is KAddressbook, a program that is deeply rooted into KDEsoftware. It was integrated in KMail and KOrganizer even before the KDE Kontact project was started. Here a list of the features of this simple yet flexible application:

  • Imports and exports to nearly every address book standard
  • Reads .vcf format files, and can import and export vCards and csv format files
  • Can use multiple LDAPservers
  • Tabbed data entry screen for complex records
  • supports all international character sets
  • Multiple distribution lists possible
  • Configurable filters
  • Powerful search capabilities
  • Can use geo-data
  • Can integrate with the plugin-based, multi-protocol instant messaging application,Kopete
  • Integrates with other Kontact components, e.g. exporting Birthday reminders to KOrganizer
  • Capable of groupware integration
  • intuitive printing using predefined and custom styles
  • Addition of custom field gives extreme flexibility
  • It can be easily embedded into other applications


Hints and Tips

Problem: You had some Distributions Lists set up, and since you upgraded you can't find them.

Solution: Until recently Distribution Lists were kept in a separate file under ~/.kde/share/apps/kabc/. Recent installs of KAddressBook store Distribution Lists as simply another entry in your address-book. For example, if you have a list called 'Family', then typing 'Family' into your address will pick up all the addresses in that list. This method appears to work in KMail 1.9.x and early 1.10.x.

It does not work in late 1.10.x and early 1.11.x, but the next method does.

Open Contacts and from the View menu ensure that the Distribution List Editor is selected. Select the list you want to use, and in the right-hand panel you will see some information about the list, including a clickable list name. Clicking on that will open a mail composer window with the list of recipients expanded.

In the Akonadi-based AddressBook, Distribution Lists are replaced by Groups. This part of the migration is not yet enabled (January 2010) but your list information is not lost: it is still in your std.vcf.

Problem: You have sudden an unexplained loss of connection to your addressbook.

Solution1: One user has confirmed to his satisfaction that closing down with Twinkle (softphone) enabled and parked was the cause of his problem. In his case the std.vcf appears to be corrupt, so a backup file had to be used.

Solution2: Another user has not managed to find the cause, but has found that removing the old connection and making a new one was sufficient.

Migrating to Akonadi-based Addressbook

KAddressBook is the first PIM application to be migrated, and inevitably some people are seeing issues. Please watch the Akonadi page for more information and for solutions to some of the common problems.

For information about where to find your files, and organising backup, see Akonadi_and_AddressBook


  • KWord/ManualIf this is anything like the old manual it will need a lot of pages. I'm wondering if the content on this page should be move now to KWord/Manual/Introduction so that KWord/Manual can carry one big table of contents for the whole manual. What do you think? I'll help you with the move if you think it's sensible. --annew 18:42, 28 March 2010 (UTC)

The suggestion sounds good to me. When I first looked at this page, today, it seemed unlike the central startup page for a full manual on which I expected to find a bunch of links to the sections which would contain the useful details for how to make the most of the 2.0 series KWord. Has an outline of "chapters" been created? --Algot 20:48, 14 October 2010 (UTC)

  • KMid
  • KOrganizer/ScreenshotsCan somebody, please, explain to me what are the boxes on top of the KOrganizer main view window (Week View, one box above every week day) and how to get rid of them? I have been using KOrganizer for years and I still have no idea what the boxes are for. Thank you very much!!! :-)
If you asked this on a mailing list you could attach a screenshot, which would help us understand the question. I don't see any 'box', but could it be the area in week view which currently shows me
16 109/256 110/255 etc?
If so, that's week 16, 109 days gone, 256 left in the year. And it's configurable in the Plugins section. If you don't mean that, please ask on the kde-pim user list, https://mail.kde.org/mailman/listinfo/kdepim-users
Please also remember that the screenshots here are out of date - the latest korganizer looks quite different. I'll try to get some newer ones added soon--annew 15:23, 21 April 2010 (UTC)
Thanks, did not notice it. Sorry.

Information

Wenn ihre KAddressBook Version kleiner als Version 4.4 ist, schauen Sie sich bitte diese Seite an

|

||KAddressBook wiedergeboren um ihre Daten allen ihren Applikationen zur Verfügung zu stellen

|}

  • KAddressBook/3/de==Einführung==
  • KAddressBook/4/deKAddressBook ist in der Entwicklung. Das bedeutet nicht, dass es instabil ist, aber es bedeutet, dass es nicht vollständig ist. Wie Sie sehen ist die Gestaltung ganz anders als in der älteren Version und es ist durchaus möglich, dass die nächste Version wieder ganz anders ist, weil wieder mehr Funktionen verfügbar sind.
  • KAddressBook/5/de==Ihr neues Adressbuch einrichten==
  • KAddressBook/6/de===Automatische Migration===
  • KAddressBook/1/uk

Інформація

Якщо у вашій системі встановлено KAddressBook версії, що передувала 4.4, будь ласка, зверніться до цієї сторінки


|

||Нова версія KAddressBook, яка зробить ваші дані доступними для всіх програм

|}

  • KAddressBook/7/deWenn Sie vorher KAddressBook verwendet haben, wissen Sie wahrscheinlich das es in ~/.kde/share/apps/kabc/std.vcf gespeichert wurde. Bei der Installation von KDE SC 4.4 wird das automatische Migrationswerkzeug die Datei prüfen und eine Akonadi Ressource unter Verwendung der darin enthaltenen Daten erstellen. Allerdings können Sie feststellen, dass eine Reihe anderer Dinge überprüft werden müssen. Da es sich um völlig neue Technologie handelt, kann es sein, dass die Distributionen nicht in der Lage waren alles perfekt aufzusetzen.
  • KAddressBook/8/de===Grundlegende Voraussetzungen===
  • KAddressBook (uk).png
  • KAddressBook/9/deNepomuk muss ausgeführt werden. Öffnen Sie Systemeinstellungen -> Erweitert -> Desktopsuche und aktivieren Sie Nepomuk. Strigi kann unter Umständen zu viele Ressourcen ihrer Hardware verbrauchen und ist nicht unbedingt notwendig. Schalten Sie es ab, falls Sie damit Probleme haben. Obwohl die fehlende Indizierung kann zwangsläufig Auswirkungen auf die Arbeitsfähigkeit von Nepomuk haben. MySQL muss laufen. Dies ist bei manchen Distributionen problematisch. Falls Sie damit Probleme haben lohnt es sich die Seite Akonadi Problemlösungen zu lesen.
  • KAddressBook/10/de===Ressourcen aktivieren===
  • KAddressBook/3/uk==Вступ==
  • KAddressBook/4/ukРозробку стабільної версії KAddressBook ще не завершено. Сама програма працює досить стабільно, але набір можливостей все ще є неповним. Компонування вікна нової версії дуже відрізняється від попередніх. Ймовірно, у новій версії його теж буде змінено, оскільки розробники мають намір повернути ряд можливостей.
  • KAddressBook/11/deAuch hier könnte Ihre Distribution dies bereits getan haben, aber überprüfen Sie Systemeinstellungen -> Erweitert -> KDE Ressourcen. Stellen Sie sicher, dass die dort aufgeführten Ressourcen aktiviert sind, dann verwenden Sie die Schaltfläche 'Als Standard verwenden' für 'akonadi-resource'. Damit stellen Sie das Adressbuch der persönlichen Kontakte KMail zur Verfügung.
  • KAddressBook/1/zh-cnTemplate:Info (zh CN)
  • KAddressBook/zh-cn
  • KAddressBook/2/zh-cn{|style="text-align:center" cellpadding="2"

|

||新生的 KAddressBook 让所有的程序都能访问你的数据。

|}

  • KAddressBook/3/zh-cn==介绍==
  • KAddressBook/4/zh-cnKAddressBook 是个开发中的程序。这并不意味着它不够稳定,意思是它还没有完成。这个版本你看到的布局与老版本相比有很大的区别,很有可能下个版本再次做变动,如同我们看到更多新特性再次增加的。
  • KAddressBook/5/zh-cn==新建地址薄(AddressBook)==
  • KAddressBook/23/zh-cn
  • KAddressBook/22/zh-cn随 KDE SC 4.4 一同发布的版本汇报了许多常见的'初期问题(teething problems)'。之中很多问题随着4.4.1版本的发布消失了,但如果你还是遇到错误信息,Akonadi 4.4 故障排解有方法解决很多问题。
  • KAddressBook/21/zh-cn==故障解决==
  • KAddressBook/20/zh-cnAkonadi 和通讯录页面有助于你理解 KAddressBook 的结构,你可以备份所有你想要的数据。
  • KAddressBook/19/zh-cn==备份数据==
  • KAddressBook/18/zh-cn不可见域(Invisible fields) - 一些用户因为有些域的信息当前不可见而担心。如果你检查~/.local/share/contacts/中的记录,你会看到数据并没有丢失。期待在下一版能再次访问这些数据,使其可见。
  • KAddressBook/17/zh-cn通讯组列表(Distribution Lists) - 用于你现有的通讯组列表的迁移工具还没发布。它现在还处于未完成状态。在适当情况下,你可以创建新「组」 - 「组」会取代「通讯组列表」。自动补全使得在「组」中添加新条目非常容易。在 KDE SC <= 4.4.2 中,你还不能像用「通讯组列表」那样用「组」,键入名字,指望它展开成名字列表。不过,你可以从右侧面板上复制、粘贴名字列表。
  • KAddressBook/16/zh-cn==这一版的状况==
  • KAddressBook/15/zh-cn
  • KAddressBook/14/zh-cnKDE SC 4.5 中,路径稍微有些不同但过程是一样的。「系统设置」被重新设计,「KDE 资源」现在是在「个人信息(Personal Information)」中。
  • KAddressBook/13/zh-cn你自个系统中的资源可能跟这里截图中看到的不一样 - 没关系的。个人联系人(Personal Contacts)是 KAddressBook 和 KMail 协同工作重要的一部分(is the one of importance for working with KAddressBook and KMail)。
  • KAddressBook/12/zh-cn进一步,你可以用「管理地址薄资源」按钮检查资源的设定:
  • KAddressBook/6/zh-cn===自动迁移(Automatic Migration)===
  • KAddressBook/7/zh-cn如果你之前有用过 KAddressBook 可能知道它是存储在 ~/.kde/share/apps/kabc/std.vcf。当你装好 KDE SC 4.4,自动迁移工具便会检查该文件,用它包含的数据建立一个 Akonadi 资源。但是,你可能发现还有许多其他东西需要检查。因为这个是完全的新技术,发行版有可能没搞定所有的东西。
  • KAddressBook/8/zh-cn===初始化要求(Initial Requirements)===
  • KAddressBook/9/zh-cnNepomuk 要求一定运行。打开「系统设置」 > 「高级」 > 「桌面搜索」,启用 Nepomuk。Strigi 对硬件的资源负荷很大,可以关掉,这是可选的。关掉后,索引功能的缺少肯定会削弱 Nepomuk 的功能。MySQL 要求一定运行。这东西在某些发行版上一直是个问题。如果你有疑问,阅读这个故障解决页面
  • KAddressBook/10/zh-cn===启用资源(Enabling Resources)===
  • KAddressBook/11/zh-cn你的发行版有可能已经把这部分搞定了,但最好检查下「系统设置」 > 「高级」 > 「KDE 资源」。确保那列出的资源已经启用,然后用'akonadi-resource Personal'上的'设为标准资源'按钮 。这便可让 KMail 能够访问个人联系人地址薄(Personal Contacts addressbook)。
  • KAddressBook/1/zh-twTemplate:Info (zh TW)
  • KAddressBook/zh-tw
  • KAddressBook/2/zh-tw{|style="text-align:center" cellpadding="2"

|

||新生的KAddressBook 讓所有的程式都能訪問你的數據。

|}

  • KAddressBook/3/zh-tw==介紹==
  • KAddressBook/4/zh-twKAddressBook 是個開發中的程序。這並不意味著它不夠穩定,意思是它還沒有完成。這個版本你看到的佈局與老版本相比有很大的區別,很有可能下個版本再次做變動,如同我們看到更多新特性再次增加的。
  • KAddressBook/5/zh-tw==新建地址薄(AddressBook)==
  • KAddressBook/6/zh-tw===自動遷移(Automatic Migration)===
  • KAddressBook/7/zh-tw如果你之前有用過KAddressBook 可能知道它是存儲在~/.kde/share/apps/kabc/std.vcf。當你裝好KDE SC 4.4,自動遷移工具便會檢查該文件,用它包含的數據建立一個Akonadi 資源。但是,你可能發現還有許多其他東西需要檢查。因為這個是完全的新技術,發行版有可能沒搞定所有的東西。
  • KAddressBook/8/zh-tw===初始化要求(Initial Requirements)===
  • KAddressBook/9/zh-twNepomuk 要求一定運行。打開「系統設置」 > 「高級」 > 「桌面搜索」,啟用Nepomuk。 Strigi 對硬件的資源負荷很大,可以關掉,這是可選的。關掉後,索引功能的缺少肯定會削弱 Nepomuk 的功能。 MySQL 要求一定運行。這東西在某些發行版上一直是個問題。如果你有疑問,閱讀這個故障解決頁面
  • KAddressBook/10/zh-tw===啟用資源(Enabling Resources)===
  • KAddressBook/11/zh-tw你的發行版有可能已經把這部分搞定了,但最好檢查下「系統設置」 > 「高級」 > 「KDE 資源」。確保那列出的資源已經啟用,然後用'akonadi-resource Personal'上的'設為標準資源'按鈕。這便可讓KMail 能夠訪問個人聯繫人地址薄(Personal Contacts addressbook)。
  • KAddressBook/12/zh-tw進一步,你可以用「管理地址薄資源」按鈕檢查資源的設定:
  • KAddressBook/13/zh-tw你自個系統中的資源可能跟這裡截圖中看到的不一樣 - 沒關係的。個人聯繫人(Personal Contacts)是KAddressBook 和KMail 協同工作重要的一部分(is the one of importance for working with KAddressBook and KMail)。
  • KAddressBook/14/zh-twKDE SC 4.5 中,路徑稍微有些不同但過程是一樣的。 「系統設定」因為被重新設計,「KDE 資源」現在是在「個人資訊(Personal Information)」中。
  • KAddressBook/15/zh-tw
  • KAddressBook/16/zh-tw==這一版的狀況==
  • KAddressBook/17/zh-tw通訊組列表(Distribution Lists) - 用於你現有的通訊組列表的遷移工具還沒發布。它現在還處於未完成狀態。在適當情況下,你可以創建新「組」 - 「組」會取代「通訊組列表」。自動補全使得在「組」中添加新條目非常容易。在KDE SC <= 4.4.2 中,你還不能像用「通訊組列表」那樣用「組」,鍵入名字,指望它展開成名字列表。不過,你可以從右側面板上複製、粘貼名字列表。
  • KAddressBook/18/zh-tw不可見域(Invisible fields) - 一些用戶因為有些域的信息當前不可見而擔心。如果你檢查~/.local/share/contacts/中的記錄,你會看到數據並沒有丟失。期待在下一版能再次訪問這些數據,使其可見。
  • KAddressBook/19/zh-tw==備份數據==
  • KAddressBook/20/zh-twAkonadi 和地址薄頁面有助於你理解 KAddressBook 的結構,你可以備份所有你想要的數據。
  • KAddressBook/21/zh-tw==故障解決==
  • KAddressBook/22/zh-tw隨 KDE SC 4.4 一同發布的版本匯報了許多常見的'初期問題(teething problems)'。之中很多問題隨著4.4.1版本的發布消失了,但如果你還是遇到錯誤信息,Akonadi 4.4 故障排解有方法解決很多問題。
  • KAddressBook/23/zh-tw
  • KAddressBook/5/uk==Налаштування вашої нової адресної книги==
  • KAddressBook/6/uk===Автоматичний перехід на нову версію===
  • KAddressBook/7/ukЯкщо ви раніше користувалися KAddressBook, ймовірно, ви знаєте, що адресна книга зберігалася у файлі ~/.kde/share/apps/kabc/std.vcf. Після встановлення KDE SC 4.4 програма автоматичного переходу виконає аналіз цього файла і створить ресурс Akonadi на основі даних файла. Але цього може виявитися недостатньо, вам доведеться дещо зробити вручну. Оскільки технології, на яких засновано роботу програми, є зовсім новими, розробникам дистрибутивів важко налаштувати все ідеально.
  • KAddressBook/8/uk===Початкові вимоги===
  • KAddressBook/9/ukМає бути запущено Nepomuk. Відкрийте вікно програми «Системні параметри», перейдіть на вкладку «Додатково», потім на сторінку «Стільниця», і увімкніть Nepomuk. Вмикання Strigi може значно позначитися на швидкодії вашої системи, але вмикати Strigi зовсім не обов’язково. Вимкніть Strigi, якщо нова швидкодія та постійна робота жорсткого диска є небажаною, хоча без індексування можливості Nepomuk трохи зменшаться. У системі має працювати фонова служба MySQL. Це може стати проблемою у деяких дистрибутивах. Якщо у вас виникли проблеми, вам варто ознайомитися зі сторінкою порад щодо усування вад.
  • KAddressBook/10/uk===Вмикання ресурсів===
  • KAddressBook/11/ukЗнову ж таки, можливо, всю роботу за вас вже зроблено розробниками дистрибутива, але спробуйте відкрити сторінку «Системні параметри» > «Додатково» > Ресурси KDE. Переконайтеся, що ресурси зі списку увімкнено, а потім скористайтеся кнопкою «Зробити стандартним» для ресурсу 'akonadi-resource Personal'. Таким чином, ви отримаєте доступ до адресної книги особистих записів контактів у KMail.
  • KAddressBook/12/ukЯкщо рушити трохи далі, за допомогою кнопки 'Керування джерелами адресної книги' ви зможете переглянути список параметрів ваших ресурсів:
  • KAddressBook/13/ukСписок ресурсів вашої системи може не збігатися зі списком на наведеному зображенні. Особисті записи контактів є найважливішими для належної роботи KAddressBook і KMail.
  • KAddressBook/14/ukУ KDE SC 4.5 шлях до файлів трошки інший, але сама процедура є такою самою. Компонування «Системних параметрів» було радикально змінено, отже тепер список ресурсів KDE можна відкрити за допомогою пункту «Особисті відомості».
  • KAddressBook/15/uk
  • KAddressBook/16/uk==Поточний стан==
  • KAddressBook/17/ukСписки розповсюдження — програму для перетворення поточних списків розповсюдження ще не випущено. Робота над нею триває. У разі потреби ви можете створити нову «Групу». Групи замінять собою списки розповсюдження. Додавання записів у групи полегшується автодоповненням. У KDE SC <= 4.4.2 ви не зможете скористатися групами подібно до списків розповсюдження: вам слід ввести ім’я і сподіватися на те, що його буде доповнено до списку імен. Але ви можете скопіювати і вставити список імен з правою панелі.
  • KAddressBook/18/ukНевидимі поля — декого з користувачів непокоїть те, що деякі з даних полів все ще не можна побачити у інтерфейсі програми. Якщо ви відкриєте у текстовому редакторів файли ~/.local/share/contacts/ ви побачите, що дані не було втрачено. Можливість перегляду даних за допомогою графічного інтерфейсу буде повернено у наступних версіях програми.
  • KAddressBook/19/uk===Створення резервних копій ваших даних===
  • KAddressBook/20/ukНа сторінці Akonadi і AddressBook наведено відомості, які допоможуть вам зрозуміти структуру даних KAddressBook, і створити належну резервну копію.
  • KAddressBook/21/uk==Усування проблем==
  • KAddressBook/22/ukВерсія програми з KDE SC 4.4 має численні вади становлення. Багато з них було усунуто у 4.4.1, але якщо ви постійно бачите повідомлення про помилки, способи усування проблем можна знайти на сторінці усування проблем.
  • KAddressBook/23/uk
  • KAddressBook/1/it

{{{4}}}

Se il tuo KAddressBook è precedente alla versione 4.4, guarda questa pagina
Informazione


|

||KAddressBook è rinato per rendere disponibili i tuoi dati a tutte le tue applicazioni

|}

  • KAddressBook/3/it==Introduzione==
  • KAddressBook/4/itKAddressBook è ancora in attivo sviluppo. Questo non significa che è instabile, ma che non è completo. La disposizione degli elementi che vedi in questa versione è molto differente rispetto alla precedente ed è molto probabile che la prossima versione sarà ancora diversa, man mano che un maggior numero di caratteristiche torneranno nuovamente disponibili.
  • KAddressBook/5/it==Configurazione della tua nuova rubrica (AddressBook)==
  • KAddressBook/6/it===Migrazione automatica===
  • KAddressBook/7/itSe hai precedentemente utilizzato KAddressBook, sei probabilmente consapevole che era memorizzato in ~/.kde/share/apps/kabc/std.vcf. Quando installi KDE SC 4.4, lo strumento di migrazione automatica esaminerà quel file e creerà una risorsa Akonadi utilizzando i dati che esso contiene. Tuttavia è possibile che un certo numero di altre cose necessiti di controllo. Poiché si tratta di una tecnologia completamente nuova, le distribuzioni potrebbero non essere state in grado di impostare tutto alla perfezione.
  • KAddressBook/8/it===Requisiti iniziali===
  • KAddressBook/12/deGehen Sie ein wenig weiter, in dem Sie auf Schaltfläche 'Adressbuchquellen verwalten' klicken und Sie werden sehen, dass Sie die Einstellungen für ihre Ressourcen überprüfen können:
  • KAddressBook/13/deDie Ressourcen auf ihrem System stimmen möglicherweise nicht mit der Liste in dem Bild überein - das ist ohne Belang. 'Persönliche Kontakte' ist die einzige Ressource, die für die Zusammenarbeit von KAdressBook und KMail wichtig ist.
  • KAddressBook/9/itNepomuk deve essere in esecuzione. Apri Impostazioni di sistema > scheda Avanzate > Ricerca desktop e abilita Nepomuk. Strigi può essere troppo pesante in termini di risorse se il tuo hardware è poco potente, ma abilitare Strigi è opzionale. Disattivalo se ti dà problemi, anche se la mancata indicizzazione impatterà necessariamente sulle possibilità di Nepomuk. MySQL deve essere in funzione. Questo è stato problematico in alcune distribuzioni. Se hai problemi, probabilmente trarrai beneficio dalla lettura della pagina Risoluzione dei problemi di Akonadi.
  • KAddressBook/14/deIn KDE SC 4.5 ist der Weg etwas anders, obwohl die Vorgehensweise gleich ist. Die Systemeinstellungen wurden überarbeitet, so das die KDE-Ressourcen unter 'Persönliche Informationen' abgelegt sind.
  • KAddressBook/15/de
  • KAddressBook/10/it===Abilitare le Risorse===
  • KAddressBook/16/de==Status dieser Version==
  • KAddressBook/11/itAncora una volta la tua distribuzione potrebbe avere già fatto questo per te, ma controlla Impostazioni di sistema > scheda Avanzate > Risorse di KDE. Assicurati che le risorse qui elencate siano abilitate, poi utilizza il pulsante 'Usa come standard' su 'akonadi-resource Personal'. Questo renderà la rubrica Contatti personali disponibile per KMail.
  • KAddressBook/12/itEsplora un po' di più, con il pulsante Gestisci fonti di calendario e vedrai che puoi esaminare le impostazioni delle tue risorse:
  • KAddressBook/13/itLe risorse sul tuo sistema potrebbero non coincidere con la lista che vedi in questa immagine, non c'è problema al riguardo. Contatti personali è quella importante per lavorare con KAddressBook e KMail.
  • KAddressBook/14/itIn KDE SC 4.5 il percorso è leggermente diverso anche se il procedimento è lo stesso. Impostazioni di sistema è stato ridisegnato così che Risorse di KDE si trova ora sotto Informazioni personali.
  • KAddressBook/15/it
  • KAddressBook/17/deVerteilerlisten - das Migrationswerkzeug für ihre bestehenden Verteilerlisten ist noch nicht freigegeben. Es ist noch in Arbeit. Gegebenenfalls können Sie eine neue Kontaktgruppe erstellen - Kontaktgruppen werden die Verteilerlisten ersetzen. Auto-Vervollständigung macht es ganz einfach Einträge zu einer Kontaktgruppe hinzuzufügen. In KDE SC <= 4.4.2 können Sie die Kontaktgruppe noch nicht ganz wie eine Verteilerliste verwenden, also den Namen eingeben und erwarten, dass dies in eine Liste von Namen erweitert wird. Sie können aber die Liste der Namen von dem rechtsseitigen Fenster kopieren und einfügen.
  • KAddressBook/16/it==Stato di questo rilascio==
  • KAddressBook/18/deUnsichtbare Felder - Einige Anwender machen sich Sorgen, weil sie wissen, dass Informationen in Feldern sind, die zurzeit nicht sichtbar sind. Wenn Sie jeden Datensatz in ~/.local/share/contacts/ überprüfen, werden Sie sehen, dass die Daten nicht verloren sind. Wir können erwarten, dass die Daten in einer der nächsten Versionen wieder sichtbar sind.
  • KAddressBook/19/de===Sicherung ihrer Daten===
  • KAddressBook/20/deDie Seite Akonadi und Adressbuch hilft ihnen die Struktur von KAddressBook zu verstehen, so dass Sie sicher sein können, dass Sie alles gesichert haben was notwendig ist.
  • KAddressBook/21/de== Problemlösungen ==
  • KAddressBook/22/deEine Reihe von generellen 'Kinderkrankheiten' sind über die Versionen, die mit KDE SC 4.4 ausgeliefert wurden, berichtet worden. Viele von ihnen verschwanden mit dem Aufkommen von 4.4.1, aber wenn Sie immer noch Fehlermeldungen bekommen, Akonadi 4.4 Problemlösungen hat Lösungen für viele Probleme.
  • KAddressBook/17/itListe di distribuzione: lo strumento di migrazione per le tue liste di distribuzioni esistenti non è ancora stato rilasciato. È in lavorazione. Se è opportuno puoi creare un nuovo Gruppo (i Gruppi sostituiranno le liste di distribuzione). L'autocompletamento rende abbastanza facile aggiungere elementi al gruppo. In KDE SC <= 4.4.2 non puoi utilizzare il gruppo più o meno come una lista di distribuzione, digitando il nome e aspettando di vedere l'intera lista di nomi. Puoi, tuttavia, copiare ed incollare la lista dei nomi dal pannello di destra.
  • KAddressBook/18/itCampi invisibili: alcuni utenti si sono preoccupati perché sapevano che le informazioni erano in campi non attualmente visibili. Se controlli tutti i dati in ~/.local/share/contacts/, vedrai che i dati non sono persi. Possiamo aspettarci di vedere i dati nuovamente visibili nella prossima versione.
  • KAddressBook/19/it==Fare una copia di sicurezza dei tuoi dati==
  • KAddressBook/20/itLa pagina Akonadi e AddressBook ti aiuta a capire la struttura di KAddressBook, in modo che tu possa essere sicuro di avere fatto una copia di sicurezza di tutto il necessario.
  • KAddressBook/21/it==Risoluzione dei problemi==
  • KAddressBook/22/itUn certo numero di 'problemi iniziali' comuni è stato segnalato in versioni distribuite con KDE SC 4.4. Molti di questi sono spariti con l'avvento di 4.4.1, ma se ricevi ancora messaggi d'errore, Risoluzione dei problemi di Akonadi 4.4 ha le soluzioni a molti problemi.
  • KAddressBook/23/it
  • KAddressBook de.png
  • KAddressBook/23/de
  • KAddressBook/1/da

Information

Hvis din KAddressBook er ældre end version 4.4, så se venligst denne side

|

||KAddressBook genfødt for at gøre dine data tilgængelige i alle dine programmer

|}

  • KAddressBook/3/da==Introduktion==
  • KAddressBook/4/daKAddressBook er et igangværende arbejde. Det betyder ikke, at den er ustabil, men det betyder, at den ikke er fuldstændig. Layoutet i denne udgave er meget forskelligt fra den ældre version, og det er tænkeligt, at den næste version vil være anderledes igen i takt med at flere funktioner bliver tilghængelige for os igen.
  • KAddressBook/5/da==Opsætning af din nye AddressBook==
  • KAddressBook/6/da===Automatisk overføring===
  • KAddressBook/7/daHvis du tidligere har brugt KAdressBook, så ved du måske, at dine data blev gemt i ~/.kde/share/apps/kabc/std.vcf. Når du installerer KDE SC 4.4 vil det automatiske overføringsredskab undersøge denne fil og oprette en Akonadi-ressource med de data, som det finder der. Det er dog muligt, at du skal checke nogle andre ting. Dette er en helt ny teknologi og distributionerne har måske ikke været i stand til at sætte alting helt perfekt op.
  • KAddressBook/8/da===Forudsætninger===
  • KAddressBook/9/daNepomuk skal køre. Åbn Systemindstillinger > Avanceret > Skrivebordssøgning og aktivér Nepomuk. Strigi kan være for ressourcekrævende, hvis din hardvare er hårdt belastet, men det er valgfrit at aktivere Strigi. Slå den fra, hvis den giver problemer; men når du giver afkald på indekseringsmuligheden, så påvirker det nogle af Nepomuks funktioner. MySQL skal virke. Dette har været et problem ved nogle distributioner. Hvis du har problemer, så kan du måske have glæde af at læse

denne side om problemløsning.

  • KAddressBook/10/da===Aktivering af ressourcer===
  • KAddressBook/11/daDin distribution har måske allerede gjort dette for dig, men check Systemindstillinger > Avanceret > KDE-ressourcer. Sørg for, at ressourcerne i denne liste er aktiverede; vælg så 'akonadi-resource Personal' og klik på knappen Brug som standard. Dette vil gøre din Personal Contacts adressebog tilgængelig for KMail.
  • KAddressBook/12/daForsk lidt videre med knappen Manage Addressbook Sources, så vil du se, at du kan kan undersøge indstillingerne for dine ressourcer:
  • KAddressBook/13/daRessourcerne på dit system passer ikke nødvendigvis med dem du ser i dette billede - det har ingen betydning. Personal Contacts er den der har betydning for arbejdet med KAdressBook og KMail.
  • KAddressBook/14/daI KDE SC 4.5 er Systemindstillinger's desig blevet ændret, sådan at KDE ressourcer nu findes under Personlig information. Processes er i øvrigt den samme.
  • KAddressBook/15/da
  • KAddressBook/16/da==Status for denne udgave==
  • KAddressBook/17/daDistributionslister - overføringsredskabet for dine eksisterende distributionslister er endnu ikke udgivet. Du kan lave en ny Gruppe - grupper erstatter distributionslister. Autofuldførelse gør det ret nemt at føje navne til gruppen. I versioner af KDE SC op til 4.4.2 kan du ikke bruge grupper helt som distributionslister ved blot at skrive navnet og få indsat en liste af navne. Du kan dog kopiere og indsætte navnelisten fra panelet til højre.
  • KAddressBook/18/daUsynlige felter - nogle brugere har været bekymrede, fordi de havde information i felter, som ikke længere er synlige. Hvis du checker data i ~/.local/share/contacts/, så vil du se, at ingen data er tabt. Vi kan forvente, at 'usynlige' data bliver synlige igen i kommende udgaver.
  • KAddressBook/19/da== Sikkerhedskopiering af dine data ==
  • KAddressBook/20/daSiden Akonadi og AddressBook hjælper dig med at forstå strukturen af KAddressBook, sådan at du kan være sikker på, at du har alt med i din backup.
  • KAddressBook/22/daEt antal almindelige 'børnesygdomme' er rapporteret for den udgave, som kommer med KDE EC 4.4. Mange af dem forsvandt i 4.4.1, men hvis du stadig får fejlmeddelelser, så har

Akonadi 4.4 problemer løsning på mange af dem.

|

Нотатники у вікні особистих даних

|| У KJots всі ваші нотатки буде впорядковано у окремих книгах

|}

The Claus chr/DPL page on Techbase.

|

Вікно вітання KMail

|| KMail — це компонент для роботи з електронною поштою Kontact, загального інструменту керування особистими даними у KDE.

|}

  • KMail/uk
  • KMail/2/uk==Основні можливості==
  • KMail/3/uk* Підтримка стандартних протоколів роботи з електронною поштою: IMAP, POP3 і SMTP.
  • Підтримка розпізнавання за допомогою NTLM (Microsoft Windows) і GSSAPI (Kerberos)
  • Підтримка нешифрованого та шифрованого обміну даними за допомогою SSL в TLS.
  • Робота з різним кодовими таблицями символів.
  • Підтримка перевірки правопису (на льоту і за запитом).
  • Вбудована підтримка OpenPGP, PGP/MIME і S/MIME.
  • Читання і створення повідомлень у форматі HTML.
  • Можливість показу лише текстової частини повідомлення у форматі HTML.
  • Читання і створення повідомлень у форматі HTML.
  • Можливість отримання і підтвердження запрошень.
  • Інтеграція з популярними інструментами фільтрування небажаної кореспонденції (спаму), зокрема SpamAssassin, Bogofilter тощо.
  • Можливість показу даних індикатора ймовірності спаму.
  • Потужні можливості з пошуку і фільтрування.
  • Може імпортувати дані з багатьох інших клієнтських програм для роботи з електронною поштою та у багатьох форматах.
  • Повна підтримка пошуку у теках IMAP.
  • Високий рівень інтеграції з іншими компонентами Kontact.
  • Зберігання зашифрованих паролів у KWallet.
  • Декілька варіантів резервного копіювання даних.
  • KMail/4/uk===Інші можливості===
  • KMail/5/uk* Позначення та визначення міток повідомлень з метою впорядкування та відновлення даних.
  • Підтримка можливостей керування списками листування.
  • Можливість заміни текстових емоційок зображеннями.
  • Показ фото або аватару відправника, якщо такі зберігаються у адресній книзі.
  • Підтримка X-Face (чорно-білих зображень у повідомленнях).
  • Стискання долучень.
  • KMail/6/uk=== Групова робота ===
  • KMail/7/ukУ KMail передбачено підтримку функціональних можливостей групової роботи. Ви можете отримувати запрошення від колег та підтверджувати їх. Після підтвердження дані щодо зустрічі буде додано до вашого календаря. Переглянути календар можна за допомогою KOrganizer або Kontact.
  • KMail/8/uk==Знімки вікон==
  • KMail/9/ukЗнімки вікон програми можна знайти на цій сторінці.
  • KMail/10/uk===Набір інструментів KMail===
  • KMail/11/ukНа цій сторінці ви знайдете обговорення таких питань:
  • KMail/12/uk* Інструменти імпортування пошти
  • Інструменти експортування пошти
  • Інструменти імпортування адресних книг
  • Розробка і безпека
  • Інструменти фільтрування небажаної кореспонденції
  • Інші інструменти і латки
  • KMail/13/uk==KMail і PGP/MIME==
  • KMail/14/ukНа сторінці KMail і PGP/MIME ви знайдете відомості щодо
  • Програм, які слід встановити
  • Встановлення GnuPG
  • Налаштування агента gpg і
  • Того, як все це перевірити у KMail.

|

Читання повідомлень Usenet

|| KNode — це ваша програма для читання пошти usenet.

|}

  • KNode/uk
  • KNode/2/uk=Можливості=
  • KNode/3/ukKNode є простим у користуванні інструментом для роботи з новинами, типовим інструментом для читання новин у KDE. У цій програмі ви знайдете всі потрібні вам можливості:
  • KNode/4/uk* Сумісність з GNKSA.
  • Підтримку роботи з декількома серверами новин.
  • Підписування повідомлень електронної пошти і статей новин.
  • Читання і створення повідомлень MIME з декількох частин.
  • Можливість показу вбудованих долучень (тексту і зображень).
  • Підтримку всіх кодових таблиць.
  • Потужні можливості з пошуку і фільтрування.
  • Перевірку правопису.
  • Повну підтримку оцінювання.
  • Підтримку перетягування зі скиданням між теками груп і архівів.
та багато іншого.

|

Редагування нотатки

|| KNotes — це проста програма для керування записами нотаток. Ви можете переглядати потрібні вам нотатки, навіть якщо програму Kontact не запущено

|}

  • KNotes/uk
  • KNotes/2/uk=Можливості=
  • KNotes/3/uk* Створення нотаток обраним вами кольором на вказаному вами тлі
  • Можливість використання перетягування зі скиданням для надсилання нотаток електронною поштою
  • Можливість скидання нотаток до календаря для створення розкладів
  • Можливість друку нотаток
  • KNotes/4/ukРоботу компонента «Нотатки» забезпечує саме KNotes.
  • KNotes/5/uk
  • KMail/1/it{|style="text-align:center"

|

La schermata di benvenuto di KMail

|| KMail è il componente posta elettronica di Kontact, il gestore di informazioni personali integrato di KDE.

|}

|

KOrganizer

|| KOrganizer — це компонент календаря та планування подій комплексного інструменту керування особистою інформацією KDE — Kontact.

|}

  • KOrganizer/uk
  • KOrganizer/2/uk==Перелік можливостей==
  • KMail/3/it* Supporta i protocolli di posta standard IMAP, POP3 e SMTP.
  • Supporta l'autenticazione tramite NTLM (Microsoft Windows) e GSSAPI (Kerberos).
  • Supporta il testo semplice e gli accessi sicuri utilizzando SSL e TLS.
  • Integrazione dei set di caratteri internazionali.
  • Controllo ortografico (mentre scrivi e a richiesta).
  • Supporto nativo per OpenPGP inline, PGP/MIME, e S/MIME.
  • Lettura e scrittura di messaggi HTML.
  • Permette di ricevere e accettare inviti.
  • Integrazione con i comuni sistemi di riconoscimento della spam, per esempio SpamAssassin, Bogofilter, ecc.
  • Un contatore opzionale della probabilità spam.
  • Potenti funzioni di ricerca e filtro.
  • Opzioni di importazione per molti altri programmi/formati.
  • Supporto completo per la ricerca in cartelle IMAP.
  • Altamente integrato con altri componenti di Kontact.
  • Salvataggio cifrato della password in KWallet.
  • Numerose opzioni di backup.
  • KOrganizer/3/uk* Підтримка роботи з декількома календарями та списками завдань. KOrganizer здатен прозоро об’єднувати дані календарів з різних файлів або інших джерел календарних даних, наприклад, календарів у інтернеті. Ці джерела даних можна у зручний спосіб вмикати, вимикати, додавати і вилучати за допомогою графічного інтерфейсу.
  • KOrganizer/4/uk* Вбудованість до Kontact. У KOrganizer передбачено повну інтеграцію програми до Kontact, програми для загального керування усіма особистими відомостями у KDE. За допомогою Kontact ви отримаєте доступ до додаткових можливостей, зокрема перетворення даних з повідомлень електронної пошти на записи подій або завдань простим перетягуванням зі скиданням.
  • KMail/4/it===Altre caratteristiche===
  • KOrganizer/5/uk* Модель сховища. У KOrganizer передбачено постійну роботу з календарем. Користувачеві не потрібно перейматися завантаженням або збереженням календаря. Внесені зміни негайно буде збережено на диску. Якщо календар буде змінено з зовнішнього джерела, програма автоматично завантажить і оновить дані у області перегляду. За допомогою механізму блокування програма запобігає конфліктам під час одночасного доступу декількох користувачів до календаря.
  • KOrganizer/6/uk* Скасування і повторення дій. У KOrganizer передбачено необмежену можливість скасування і повторення дій.
  • KOrganizer/7/uk* Можливість вбудовування завдань до перегляду розкладу. Завдання показано у переглядах тижня і дня. Записи завдань можна перетворити на записи подій перетягуванням зі списку завдань з наступним скиданням до розкладу.
  • KMail/5/it* Segnalazione ed etichettatura dei messaggi per aiutare nell'ordinamento e recupero delle informazioni
  • Supporta la gestione delle mailing list
  • Può sostituire smile testuali con emoticon
  • Visualizza l'immagine del mittente o l'avatar se presente nella rubrica
  • Supporta X-Face (immagini bianco e nero nei messaggi)
  • Compressione degli allegati
  • KOrganizer/8/uk* Долучення для подій і завдань. Посилання на сторінки у інтернеті, локальні файли або повідомлення електронної пошти можна долучити до записів подій і завдань. Доступ до долучених даних можна отримати простим клацанням кнопкою миші на панелях подій та завдань, а також панелі резюме або редакторів.
  • KMail/6/it=== Groupware ===
  • KOrganizer/9/uk* Швидке створення записів завдань. За допомогою особливого поля введення даних ви зможете швидко створити запис завдання без відкриття вікна редактора. Це поле буде особливо корисним, якщо вам потрібно створити декілька записів завдань одразу.
  • KOrganizer/10/uk* Додаток для дат єврейського календаря. Якщо ви увімкнете цей додатко, програма показуватиме дати єврейського календаря для кожного з днів на панелі календаря.
  • KMail/7/itKMail supporta la funzionalità Groupware. Puoi ricevere inviti da colleghi e accettarli. Una volta accettati questi vengono inseriti nel tuo calendario. Per vedere il tuo calendario avvia KOrganizer o Kontact.
  • KOrganizer/11/uk* Підтримка друку. Можливий друк календарів у будь-якому з багатьох стилів. Підтримується кольоровий друк і друк з перекриттям подій.
  • KMail/8/it== Schermate ==
  • KOrganizer/12/uk* У KMail передбачено безпосереднє передавання запрошень та інших долучень з даними календаря до KOrganizer.
  • KMail/9/itGuarda questa pagina per altre immagini.
  • KMail/10/it==Casella degli strumenti di KMail==
  • KOrganizer/13/ukУ KOrganizer передбачено можливості керування розкладом подій і завдань, сповіщення щодо подій, експортування даних у мережу, прозора обробка мережевих даних, групове планування, імпортування та експортування файлів календаря та інші можливості. Програма може працювати з широким діапазоном серверів групової роботи, зокрема Kolab, Open-Xchange, Citadel і OpenGroupware.org.
  • KMail/11/itQuesta pagina tratta le seguenti questioni:
  • KOrganizer/14/ukKOrganizer — дуже гнучка у налаштуваннях згідно ваших потреб програма, яка є інтегральною частиною набору програм KDE PIM, який призначено для впорядкування ваших особистих даних. У KOrganizer передбачено підтримку двох основних стандартів зберігання і обміну даними календарів: vCalendar і iCalendar.
  • KOrganizer/15/uk===Інші можливості===
  • KMail/12/it:* Strumenti per importare messaggi
  • prerequisiti
  • installazione di GnuPG
  • impostazione gpg-agent e
  • verifica del funzionamento in KMail.
  • KOrganizer/21/ukХоча значну частину параметрів зустрічі можна змінити, час є єдиним параметром, який не можна змінити, оскільки таким чином буде втрачено регулярність послідовності подій (окремі винятки все ж можливі). KOrganizer використовує поле часу як основний параметр, отже буде складно, якщо взагалі можливо, внести подібну зміну.
  • KOrganizer/22/ukЗамість цього можна створити запис про початок зустрічі зі зміненим часом, у якому буде здубльовано параметри першого запису, окрім зміненого часу початку.
  • KMail/15/it==La squadra di sviluppo==
  • KOrganizer/23/ukДокладніший опис проблеми можна знайти тут
  • KMail/16/itUn elenco dei numerosi sviluppatori è disponibile qui.
  • KOrganizer/24/uk== Підручники ==
  • KOrganizer/25/uk* Як вести блог за допомогою KOrganizer (застаріле)
  • KMail/17/it== Domande frequenti, consigli e suggerimenti ==
  • KOrganizer/26/uk
  • KMail/18/itPer facilitare la lettura queste sono state spostate in una pagina specifica.
  • KMail/19/it
  • KNotes/1/it{|style="text-align:center"

|

Modifica di una nota

|| KNotes è l'applicazione per note adesive "non adesive". Visualizzale sul tuo desktop anche quando Kontact è chiuso

|}

There are 30545 pages beginning with Ka-Kz

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

This page is (mostly?) outdated. Archive or mark as historic page?

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Information

Most of this page refers to KDE3, and was written a long time ago. It may be helpful if you need to use an old version


About Jingle support in Kopete Jabber plugin.

Jingle support under KDE SC 4 was added in version 4.2. It was, however, exerimental, and the bugs in sound were found to be too great for it to be useful. The developers therefore decided to remove it again in 4.3, pending further work.

Much of that work is now done, at least on the sound side, and problems connecting through firewalls and routers have been addressed. There are still areas under development, notably Rtp and webcams can be configured but not used in Kopete. The adventurous can see the latest snapshot at svn://anonsvn.kde.org/home/kde/branches/work/kopete/new_jingle

Kopete in KDE 4.4 does contain Jingle support using libjingle, so it's Google Talk compatible. It won't work with standard-compatible clients however.

This information is correct at the time of writing (4th February 2010). For the latest information you should check the project site at kopete.kde.org


Kopete Jabber Jingle under KDE3

Current status

Voice calls between two Kopete clients or between a Kopete client and a Psi client are possible. Voice calls between a Kopete client and Google's gtalk are also possible.

Anyway, the support is experimental, and can lead to crash if something goes wrong. This is why it is not enabled by default in the stable release.

Please note that the development is currently on hold.

Download

This is included in the Kopete 0.12 releases. get it from http://kopete.kde.org/releases.php You need to add the --enable-jingle flag to the compilation to enable it.

Required Dependencies

Introduction of libjingle require new dependencies to Kopete. Here the list:

  1. oRTP 0.7.1 Any version other than0.7.1 will not work!
  2. expat
  3. glib-2.0 (if you don't have it already for MSN webcam)
  4. speex (>=1.1.6 or 1.0.5 (the versions that have speex_encode_int ))

Optional Dependencies

iLBC

Unofficial packages and other build tips

Unofficial and unstable Fedora Core 4 packages of oRTP and speex can be found here. Unofficial builds of kde-network for Fedora Core 4 with this branch of kopete can be foundhere.

On Mandriva 2006, you could have problems with oRTP : ./configure will not find the library. If you are using bash, you must enter :

PKG_CONFIG_PATH=/usr/local/lib/pkgconfig export PKG_CONFIG_PATH

before ./configure

Concerning SUSE (10.0): glib-2.0 might be in a different location as well (e.g. /opt/gnome/lib). Add this path to PKG_CONFIG_PATH as well.

Todo list

Make libjingle compile in Kopete source
Finish configure checks.
Fix crashing when asking for a voice conversation. (It doesn't reject the call anymore, but a crash can still happen)
Trying a voice conversation using imported Psi classes.
Implement Entities Capabilities support JEP-0115
Remove imported Psi classes and use our own.
Starting to replace some components of libjingle.
Port to libiris native tasks
Etc....


Future: For KDE4

Evaluate if Phonon is suitable for our needs.

Developers

Michaël Larouche (IRC: DarkShock, Jabber: [email protected], Email: michael.larouche at kdemail.net), Olivier Goffart (IRC: Gof)
An Empty Report Form
 

Generate business quality reports from your data


Kugar uses XML to merge your data with your template, creating reports that can be embedded in your documents. It is also possible to embed the generator within custom application.


Kugar is discontinued in the KOffice2 series and will be replaced by Kexi and its report generator in the future.

If a tip does not work in a particular distro, please add a note to that effect, or better still, give the command that would do the same job. The root konsole tip, for instance probably fails on *buntu because a sudo command would be required. I don't have a *buntu install to test this. --annew 06:56, 22 September 2008 (UTC)

I am not sure, that it is a good idea to have any mention af the KDE3 version of Konsole on this page. I believe it will confuse users more than it will help. Would it not be better to move that part to a separate page? --Claus chr 4 August 2009

KDE 3 Tips removed. KDE 4 is now sufficiently stable for there to be no reason for KDE help to continue. --annew 15:53, 5 August 2009 (UTC)

These 3 are all about the same thing (Cyrille: not at all, it's three totaly different thing);

Cheers!

Da das mit firefox alles funktioniert meine Fragen: Woran liegt das? Ist Abhilfe in Sicht?

Welches OS bzw. Distri? Mit welcher Version tritt das auf? (Siehe Fenster > Hilfe > Über Konqueror) Bitte Einträge hier mit Namen kennzeichnen und in Englisch schreiben. Dies ist nicht der richtige Platz für Fragen. Siehe Getting_Help_(de). Gruß --Mark Ziegler 14:27, 8 October 2008 (UTC)

The Distribution is Sidux over which I installed KDE 4, which I regularly update. So it is the newest version on an acer travelmate 6463WLMi.

I will switch to "Getting help".

Wolfgang Romey

It would be very much appreciated if you could keep the discussion on this page in English, since it is the English page for Konqueror. We have several localized pages as well, and I'm sure Mark Ziegler would be very willing to assist you there. :) --Jucato

Changing default file manager

The feature System Settings -> Default Applications -> File Manager does not yet exist for the current stable version of KDE 4 (4.1) and will probably be in 4.2 only (unless it's a distribution patch). Please be sure to include only current stable or previous stable (KDE 3) information, not trunk/future features.

This no longer applies. The madman 22:08, 11 September 2009 (UTC)

File manager section

What was the reason for reverting the changes made to the file management section back? I found the information on this section to be lacking, which is why I changed it. Also, these lines:

Konqueror is also an able web browser, supporting java applets, javascript, CSS, and a variety of plugins.

Among its many talents is the ability to split windows, allowing access to a number of directories at one glance.

Have already been discussed at length in previous sections. I think it would at least be appropriate to include the fact that it uses the Dolphin KPart for file management, which would allow us to point to Dolphin's page instead of duplicating the file management features of the KPart in Konqueror's page.The madman 12:20, 13 September 2009 (UTC)

Check the History, get the name of the person who made that change (my edit is simply to correct the version number, as you did) and ask this on his talk page. He's more likely to see it there. --annew 12:46, 13 September 2009 (UTC)
Sorry, that was a mistake. I was translating your additions to danish, but somehow I must have pressed the wrong button in the wrong tab. I'll undo the mistake immediately. --Claus chr 14 September 2009
That's understandable. Thanks! The madman 05:36, 14 September 2009 (UTC)

Table of Contents

Is there any reason this particular page lacks a ToC? I'm going to add one. Feel free to revert the change if you disagree.

No idea why there wasn't one originally. A page of this length needs one IMO. I've also moved the navigation breadcrumbs back to the top of the page - they got displaced when the info panel was added. --annew 15:12, 16 September 2009 (UTC)

Historic page

This page is of historic interest only. The content of the page is obsolete.


 

The whole of your data at your fingertips

Features

Kerry is a front-end for Beagle, the search tool that indexes all your data, making the data inside documents as easy to find as file names.


  • You decide which directories you want indexed
  • Indexing can be done in the background
  • After initial indexing, it is almost unnoticeable
  • Indexing can be paused while cpu-intensive tasks need the resources
  • Searching is case-insensitive
  • OR can be used for option searches
  • Phrases can be used, within quotes, e.g. "There be dragons"
  • Words or phrases can be excluded by using a minus, e.g. -cats
  • You can search by extension, using, for instance, ext:jpg


Visit the project's home page for more information.


The screenshot gallery gives a useful overview.

mysql

and expected it to spawn a daemon. It lasted years till I learned you start it like this:

/etc/init.d/mysql start

--ThorstenStaerk 12:30, 31 January 2009 (UTC)

+1 to archive Claus chr (talk) 10:06, 1 March 2024 (UTC)

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

Empty page.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

Empty page.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

This app is unmaintained and no longer released by the KDE community. Empty page.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

This app is unmaintained and no longer released by the KDE community. Translated page without English page.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.
Karbon14 importando un clipart
 Su aplicación de diseño vectorial escalable


  • Cree clip-arts y caricaturas escalables
  • Importe sus diagramas de Kivio o imágenes de KChart y añada detalles de diseño gráfico
  • Modifique clip-arts existentes para crear imágenes escalables de alta calidad



Añada formas y gradientes
 
Importe y trabaje en clip-arts

Vea más capturas de pantalla aquí

Consejos, Claves y Tutoriales

Information

Este sitio se encuentra en construcción

KControl was the system settings program for KDE 3. It has been replaced by the application System Settings in KDE SC 4.x.


KControl welcome screen

There are 50309 pages beginning with L-Z

About me

My articles

My boxes


Tutorial Factbox
Time to replay 20 min
Example Distro {{{distribution}}}
Type {{{type}}}
Happy readers {{{happyreaders}}}
Unhappy readers {{{unhappyreaders}}}


Ideas/Criticism on this wiki

  • file uploads on this wiki must be possible, or at least image embedding - like all editing, available to logged in users
  • let us not make tons of translations - with the Translate extension, translations are easily maintained, and Special:myLanguage makes them transparently available
  • after reading http://www.mediawiki.org/wiki/Manual:Short_URL, how did you accomplish the short URL and is this sustainable?
  • I would like to have boxes around
pre-tagged content
Use the templates {{Input|1=}} and {{Output|1=}} in preference to <pre>

as on http://www.staerk.de/thorsten/index.php/C_Programming_Tutorial#First_program

  • the pre-tagged text should be able to expand to a higher width than the KDE logo graphic - Using the templates, the full width of the page is available
  • pre-tagged content should scale, but does not as this example shows:
on a large-enough screen you should be able to see this line without scrolling, but you are not. - Make sure you are using the Chihuahua theme - I can see it all

new articles

Here are articles that I want to write.

AutoStart

Quieten a computer

You work in an office with colleagues and you do not want to disturb them with your computer making sound. You want to quieten your computer

controlling a cluster

You have a cluster of 16 servers and want to send commands to all servers at once? Not a problem with KDE 3.5. Use konsole and open 16 tabs, log in to each server on a special tab. Use one tab to send input to all tabs (right-click onto the tab -> send input to all sessions).

Problems I found:

  • sometimes you forget that you are sending the input to all servers, this can lead to unpredictable behavior :(
  • sometimes you change tabs and forget you have done this :(
  • it is tedious to open 16 tabs and log in on every one to a dedicated server
  • automated login via dcop does not work with KDE 4
  • the "tab" key on your keyboard for auto-completion may display different results on different servers
  • the cursor keys on your keyboard for command-repetition may display different results on different servers
  • forgetting to end the "send input to all sessions" mode may lead to unpredictable behavior
  • the commands may need different time to return on different hosts (especially downloading; if 16 servers download at the same time, the network delivers unpredictable response times)
  • you will not see if the sessions answer differently (e.g. error on only one server)
  • if you detach a tab, the input will continue to be sent there

KDE Questions

  • I have 3 soundcards at the moment: my webcam, my headset and my "normal" soundcard. How can I tell kmix to use one specifc?
    • systemsettings
  • Sidebar# mw internal links
  • Navigation
    • Special:MyLanguage/Welcome to KDE UserBase|ub-home
    • Special:myLanguage/Quick_Start|ub-start-contributing
    • recentchanges-url|recentchanges
  • ub-contributors
    • Special:MyLanguage/Tasks and Tools| ub-helpfiles
    • ub-helpfiles-modify-url | ub-helpfiles-modify
    • ub-helpfiles-new-content-url | ub-helpfiles-new-content
    • Special:myLanguage/PageLayout| ub-helpfiles-page-elements
    • Special:myLanguage/Typographical_Guidelines | ub-helpfiles-typographical-guidelines
    • Special:myLanguage/Toolbox| ub-helpfiles-markup
  • ub-translators
    • Special:MyLanguage/Translator_Account| ub-get-trans-account
    • Special:SupportedLanguages| ub-languages-represented
    • ub-helpfiles-languages-url | ub-helpfiles-languages
    • Special:LanguageStats | ub-trans-tool
    • ReadyForTranslation | ub-release-request
  • Troubleshooting
  • Welcome to KDE UserBaseThis page is for discussion about content. If you want to discuss technical issues concerning UserBase, please use Userbase Technical Issues

If you want to post a question, click on Start a new discussion below. Enter a subject that describes the topic, write your message in the large text box and click on Show preview. If everything looks good, click on Save page to create the new thread.

Previous discussions can be found under Contents. If you want to reply to a thread, click on Add a reply at the bottom of the thread, enter your reply and click on Save page. To reply to a specific post, click on More under the post and then Reply in the pop-up menu.

I imagine a newcomer looking at KDE. In "did you know" I tried to give him an idea what he can do where he had not even had the idea to ask for it. KTouch itself belongs to education of course, but the tip to look at it is something for the did you know section. --ThorstenStaerk 06:50, 14 September 2008 (UTC)

I am not willing to modifiy user pages, so I put your statements here and my answers.

  • file uploads on this wiki must be possible, or at least image embedding
It is possible. There are so many images in here. --Mark Ziegler 18:44, 4 October 2008 (UTC)
  • let us not make tons of translations
why not. Users often prefer their native language. Devs always talking in english, but this is UserBase. --Mark Ziegler 18:44, 4 October 2008 (UTC)
Everything is written on mentioned page. And it works for years now as you can see on version hints. --Mark Ziegler 18:44, 4 October 2008 (UTC)
  • I would like to have boxes around
pre-tagged content

as on http://www.staerk.de/thorsten/index.php/C_Programming_Tutorial#First_program

Design is always discussable. --Mark Ziegler 18:44, 4 October 2008 (UTC)
  • the pre-tagged text should be able to expand to a higher width than the KDE logo graphic
More design. --Mark Ziegler 18:44, 4 October 2008 (UTC)
  • pre-tagged content should scale, but does not as this example shows:
on a large-enough screen you should be able to see this line without scrolling, but you are not.
Design again. --Mark Ziegler 18:44, 4 October 2008 (UTC)
Get a nice one on myopenid.com btw. Is yahoo ID working? --Mark Ziegler 18:44, 4 October 2008 (UTC)
  • I like to see directly under a page how often it has been read. This is default for mediawiki.
Design again. --Mark Ziegler 18:44, 4 October 2008 (UTC)

I want to delete my KDE UserBase account

I want to delete my KDE UserBase account. Please help me, thank you. --Jackblackevo 11:03, 20 January 2010 (UTC)

I want to delete my KDE UserBase account. Please help me, thank you. --OpenID用户4 11:06, 20 January 2010 (UTC)


Plasma is one of the key technologies of KDE 4 (also known as the "Pillars of KDE"), and one of the most visible to users. As Plasma treats the user interface differently than a traditional desktop, there may be confusion as to what Plasma is, what it does, and how to perform common tasks.

This document attempts to address these problems by providing answers to the most common questions.

Information

The information presented here covers Plasma in KDE 4.1. For older versions you can turn to the KDE 4.0 specific page


General Questions

What does Plasma do?

Plasma provides the desktop interface for KDE 4, including the application launcher (start menu), the desktop and the desktop panel (often referred to simply as the task bar). However Plasma is more than just this familiar collection of utilities, it is a common framework for creating integrated interfaces. It is flexible enough to provide interfaces for mobile devices, media centres and desktop computers; to support the traditional desktop metaphor as well as well as designs that haven't yet been imagined.

What is wrong with the current desktop technology?

Today's desktops are static. Typically they are tied to a folder in which one can find icons (application launchers), or user-placed documents and folders. Along with pictures and images as backgrounds, the current desktop doesn't go any further, or work for the user. Plasma takes a different approach, engaging the user by creating a dynamic and highly customizable environment.

I don't think it's such a good idea...

With Plasma, you can let your desktop (and accompanying support elements) act like it always did. You can have a task bar, a background image, shortcuts, etc. If you want to, however, you can use tools provided by Plasma to take your experience further, letting your desktop take shape based on what you want and need.

How does Plasma work?

Plasma's components are widgets called Plasmoids. Plasmoids can take on a variety of functions, ranging from displaying your desktop and associated wallpaper, showing your laptop's battery level, displaying your plugged in devices, and drawing the taskbar: basically, they are small applications that live on the desktop. Plasmoids can be grouped together in "containers" called containments. On a default desktop, there are two main elements: the Panel and the desktop itself. Both are containments in the Plasma sense.

It doesn't sound too new... other operating systems have done that.

The key difference here is that plasmoids can interact together. You want a better view of your laptop battery in order to find out when you are running low? You just drag it away from the taskbar and put it on the desktop. Also, applets can be resized and rotated at will, thanks to the use of Scalable Vector Graphics (SVGs). As you can see, the desktop not only interacts with you, as the user, but also with itself in new and interesting ways. You are now able to control how your workspace behaves and what it displays, in a visually pleasing and user-friendly manner. Since Plasma is the sum of its plasmoids, every element, even the desktop itself, is a widget. This allows you to move your desktop anywhere with respect to the windows (back and forward). It is no longer rooted behind everything and becomes instead another element of real interaction.

Kicker and Kdesktop were working fine in KDE 3! Why did you have to change that?

Especially regarding kicker, there was the important issue of maintainability. The code was in place since the KDE 2 days, and it was difficult to add new features without breaking others. In the end, to proceed forward the only viable option was to start anew from scratch.

I can't find my favorite <insert feature here>!

Don't forget that Plasma is still in heavy development and that KDE 3 was an extremely polished codebase: it took seven years to get to that, while Plasma is much younger. With time, the Plasma developers plan on reintroducing features that are missing and fix regressions. As KDE progresses through the KDE4 cycle, Plasma will improve with it.

Why on earth did you decide to change the way the desktop operates?

The idea of a Desktop folder is fundamentally a broken concept. It assumes that everything you will access there resides on a single physical directory on your disk. It may be convenient, but at the same time it greatly limits what you can do. For example, you can't use custom layouts for different desktops, as everything would be read from the directory. Also, quite often a desktop structured like that becomes a dumping ground for files and folders, without any other function.

I heard there are no more icons on the desktop in KDE 4.1...

That is not entirely correct. You can have icons and launchers (shortcuts) by dragging them from Dolphin or the K-menu. What has changed is that the desktop will no longer display the contents of the Desktop folder. However, you can show an arbitrary number of folders (local or remote) on your desktop view, instead of being forced to display only the contents of the "Desktop" folder. To do so, a new applet has been introduced, the Folder View applet.

What is the Folder View applet?

The Folder View applet, like its name says, is used to display items (folders, files) from a directory. Such a directory can be either a local one residing on your computer, but also a remote FTP, SSH, or SMB share. In the future, it will even contain results from Nepomuk searches and tagging.

You can choose to view either all files, or filter for specific patterns using regular expressions (there is discussion on using filters based on file types for future versions of KDE).

This applet also supports basic file management properties (moving, copying, cutting and pasting for example), and you can have as many as you want on your desktop.

In KDE 4.2 you will be also able to use the Folder View as your desktop, replicating the "old style" paradigm.

What's the deal with Kickoff (the new K menu)?

During the development of KDE 4.0, different approaches for a K menu (application launcher) were tried. Some projects, like Raptor, were ambitious but there was no way they could be completed on time. At the time, one developer ported SUSE Linux's application launcher (Kickoff) to the new KDE architecture. As it was the most ready and feature complete (not to mention the product of usability testing) it was chosen to be the default menu. If you don't like it, the traditional K-menu is available as well - right-click onto the K Menu to find an option "traditional style". Also, some alternative menu systems have been announced (Lancelot, Raptor), but at the time of writing they're still in development.

What is KRunner?

KRunner is the versatile mini-command line you can activate by pushing "Alt-F2" or by selecting "Run Command" from the desktop contextual menu. It can search for applications, bookmarks, even sessions basing on your input, show system activity and even do simple arithmetic calculations.

KRunner's functionality can be extended through the use of plugins ("runners").

What are the "cashews"?

What is commonly referred as "cashew" is the Plasma logo you can find on the default desktop, in the upper right corner, and on right hand side of the panel. By clicking on them, you can access other configuration options, such as panel configuration and the Zooming User Interface (ZUI). Some of these, like the panel cashew, only appear if the widgets aren't locked (see below).

Please provide an option to disable the upper right cashew.

Although putting an option to disable the cashew for desktops sounds reasonable, from a coding point of view it would introduce unnecessary complexity and would break the design. What has been suggested is, since the desktop itself (a containment) is handled by plugins, to write a plugin that would draw the desktop without the cashew itself. Currently some work ("blank desktop" plugin) is already present in KDE SVN. With containment type switching expected by KDE 4.2, it is not unreasonable to see alternative desktop types developed by then.

What is the Zooming User Interface (ZUI)?

The Zooming User Interface, or ZUI, is another component of Plasma. It enables the user to group different groups of plasmoids together, and to quickly switch between one and another using a zoom-and-pan approach. Notice that at the time, although significant improvements have been made in KDE 4.1, this feature is still under heavy development and may be fully functional only with later KDE 4.x releases.

How does the ZUI work?

Suppose you have three groups of plasmoids (such as widgets, application launchers, etc.) which you want arranged in specific combinations depending on what you want to do. You first group them according to your tastes, then you can switch between them by zooming out (getting a preview of all the groups) and then back in on the specific group you want to use. Notice that it is different from traditional X11 virtual desktop switching, as there is a higher degree of flexibility by using this approach, as the groups can be totally different from each other.

A very good example of this behavior is shown by this image courtesy of Half-Left from #kde on freenode.

Why can't I use the ZUI from Dashboard view?

That feature is a work-in-progress. We're looking into it, but can't yet say how and when it will be finished.

On multi screen setups, the ZUI operates on all screens, the Dashboard just on one. Why is that?

The workflows are different. When zooming out, the user wants to get an overview, therefore activities on all screens are zoomed out. Whereas when using the Dashboard, the user usually wants to access specific functionality and might not want to interrupt his or her workflow on other activities.

Configuration

Can I place icons on the desktop?

Of course you can. Dragging an icon from Dolphin or Konqueror to the desktop will work. Notice that dragging on the desktop will not actually create a file there, just a link to it.

To display the contents of your Desktop folder, or any other folder, use the Folder View applet. Just drag a folder on the desktop and choose to create a Folder View.

I am using two screens, and I used to have kicker over the two displays. Can I do that with Plasma?

No. The reason is that having a panel over two displays adds a great deal of complexity, especially when the two displays have different resolution. As a result of this added complexity, this feature would not be guaranteed to work in all cases. As a result it was not implemented.

How can I add applets to the panel?

Method 1: Open the Add Widgets dialog in the Plasma cashew (upper right corner of the screen) then select the widget of your liking and drag it directly (don't double click or use the Add Widget button) to the panel.

Method 2: Drag an applet from the desktop to the panel. This is also shown briefly on a video on Lydia Pintscher's blog.

Can I move the applets on the panel?

Just before KDE 4.1 RC1, a change has been introduced in Plasma to allow movement of the applets on the panel. To do so, open up the panel controller (by clicking on the cashew or by right clicking on the panel and selecting "Panel Settings") and hover the mouse cursor over the applets. Its shape will turn into four arrows, and you'll be able to rearrange the applets as you wish.

Lydia Pintscher's blog has a video showing movement in action. Another one is available on Aikurn's blog. Aikurn has also made an annotated video.

How do I move, rotate or resize an applet on the desktop?

First of all, hover over the applet you want to resize. The applet handle will appear.

The applet handle takes care of resize, rotate and move.

  • To move an applet: Click on the handle, then drag the applet around.
  • To rotate an applet: Click on the curved arrow then drag to rotate
  • To resize an applet: Click on the square icon and then drag to resize the applet. You can constrain the resize operation to the applet's aspect ratio by holding down the Ctrl key.

How can I change the height and the size of the panel?

Click on the panel cashew (the small icon on the right side of the panel), then click and drag, adjusting panel size and position to your choosing. Click again on the cashew (or on the red X) to close the panel configuration interface.

This video shows how to configure and move a panel.

How can I remove a panel?

Click on the panel cashew and select "Remove this Panel". Alternatively you can right click on the panel itself and choose "Remove this Panel".

I heard that you can use OS X's widgets with Plasma. Is this true?

Yes, Plasma can use OS X's widgets, but only the HTML ones.

My widgets are hidden under the windows. How can I show them?

You can bring all the widgets to the front by pushing Ctrl-F12, which will bring the Plasma Dashboard to the front.

How can I lock the positions of the widgets?

Method 1: Right click on an empty area of the desktop and select "Lock Widgets" from the contextual menu. If you want to reverse that, right click again and select "Unlock Widgets". The same option is available if you right-click on the panel.

Method 2: Select "Lock Widgets" from the Plasma cashew on the upper right corner or from the panel controller.

How do I remove widgets?

If they're on the panel, right click on the widget and select "Remove this...". If the widgets are on the desktop, you have different options:

  • If you hover over them, clicking the red X on the applet handle will remove them;
  • If you use the Add Widget dialog, you can click on the minus symbol icon next to the widget name to remove it.

How do I switch between Kickoff and the old style menu?

Right click on the menu icon and select "Switch to Classic Menu Style" (if using Kickoff) or "Switch to Kickoff Menu Style" (if using the classic menu). Alternatively, you can add either type of menu using the Add Applets dialog.

Aikurn has a video showing how to switch between the different styles.

How can I add/remove an activity?

Adding an activity: Zoom out from your current desktop view by clicking on the desktop view cashew (the icon in the top right corner) and selecting Zoom out. Clicking again on the cashew will show a new button, "Add Activity". Click on it to create a new desktop view.

Note: The "Add Activity", "Zoom in", and "Zoom Out" buttons are a little buggy in 4.1.0 and may disappear in certain situations. restarting plasma will bring them back.

This video shows how to add activities and move between them.

Removing an activity: Zoom out from your current desktop view, make sure it's not the current activity (otherwise select another one), then right-click on the activity you want to remove and choose the appropriate option.

Note: You must Unlock Widgets (Ctrl+L) before you can remove any activities.

Are there any keyboard shortcuts for Plasma?

In addition to the mouse, there is a number of shortcuts available:

  • Add widgets: Ctrl-A
  • Lock widgets: Ctrl-L
  • Zoom out: Ctrl- -
  • Zoom in: Ctrl- = or Ctrl-+
  • Next applet: Ctrl-N
  • Previous applet: Ctrl-P
  • Add activity: Shift-Ctrl-A
  • Next activity: Shift-Ctrl-N
  • Previous activity: Shift-Ctrl-P
  • Applet settings: Ctrl-S
  • Containment settings: Shift-Ctrl-S
  • Remove applet: Ctrl-R

Unfortunately, changing these shortcuts is not possible in KDE 4.1, but it is planned for KDE 4.2.

Can the Dashboard show widgets other than those on my desktop?

As of KDE 4.1.0 it can, but currently (as of 4.2) there is no user interface available to configure this feature. An explanation of how to configure this manually can be found here.

Theming

I don't like the default look of the panel and other Plasma components. Can I change that?

Yes, the ability to change the look of Plasma was planned since the beginning. Plasma can use "themes", which are essentially a number of SVG images and files specifying the colors, to change its appearance. Some themes have already appeared on popular sites like kde-look.org.

Is there a GUI option available to change the theme?

Yes. Right click on your current desktop, select "Desktop Settings" and you will find an option to change the theme in the dialog that will appear. You can also download new themes directly from there.

Step by step instructions (including screenshots) are available on Aikurn's blog.

Troubleshooting

My panel is gone, how do I get it back?

kquitapp plasma; rm $KDEHOME/share/config/plasma-appletsrc; plasma

This deletes your plasma settings, so you'll get the default configuration back. The panel-vanishing-on-crash issue was fixed just after 4.0.0's release. If running all the 3 commands at once doesn't work, try typing them in manually and wait a few seconds before running the next command.

(Note that the $KDEHOME environment variable may not be set. Try ~/.kde (Fedora, Kubuntu Intrepid, Debian, upstream default) or ~/.kde4 (OpenSUSE, Kubuntu Hardy and several others).)

Some GTK+ applications show wrong system tray icon sizes.

That is unfortunately a problem in the Freedesktop.org system tray specification, which does not define the sizes for system tray icons properly.

I experience extreme slowness when using Plasma with the NVIDIA binary driver.

This is NVIDIA's fault entirely, due to their driver not supporting correctly the XRender X11 extension, and it also affects other parts of KDE such as Konsole. See this blog entry on how to report issues upstream to NVIDIA. This page contains a few suggestions on how to improve performance until an updated driver is released.

NVIDIA has recently released a beta driver (version 177.xx) that may improve performance with Plasma and KDE4 in general.

Folder View and other plasmoids look badly rendered with an ATI video card and the open source radeon driver.

To work around this issue, you have to change the 2D acceleration method from XAA (X Acceleration Architecture) to the newer EXA. As this involves editing your xorg.conf file, bear in mind that such a modification may damage your system. Do it at your own risk.

To make the switch, edit your xorg.conf file (make a backup just in case) and locate the Device section for your graphics card. Add the line

Option "AccelMethod" "EXA"

before the "EndSection" line. If there is already a line with AccelMethod, change it from XAA to EXA. Save the file and restart the X server.

Notice that EXA is still marked as unstable, and that some other applications such as some KDE3 programs may render incorrectly.

Hints & Tips

Some alternatives for those who like a sparse desktop -

1 - you can remove the panel entirely. Open applications would be available using the ALT+TAB cycling.

2 - Remove the panel and add a short one at the top of the screen, to hold only the task manager

3 - Create a panel containing the task manager and use autohide.


Glossary

See the Glossary page.

Thanks

  • Daniel Laidig & Simon St.James - thanks for the umeet IRC logs!
  • Marco Martin - thanks for the information on panels!
  • Sebas - thanks for letting me use information from your blog entries!
  • Half-Left - great example of ZUI usage!
  • Aikurn - Excellent videos!
  • Marcelo Magno T. Sales - for giving panel Tips on a mailing list

Contributors

  • Luca Beltrame - current mantainer
  • Joseph M. Gaffney
  • Chani
  • Dipesh
  • Maninalift
  • All the anyonymous contributors



Back to the Introduction page

Note: the information presented here covers Plasma in the KDE 4.0.x versions.

Introduction

Plasma is one of the key technologies of KDE 4 (also known as the "Pillars of KDE"), and one of the most visible to users. As Plasma treats the user interface differently than a traditional desktop, there may be confusion on what Plasma is, what it does, and how to perform common tasks.

This document attempts to address these problems by providing answers to the most common questions.

General Questions

What does Plasma do?

Plasma is the component that is "in charge" of the desktop interface; the desktop, panel (often referred simply as the task bar), and related elements. However, Plasma goes a bit further than these common pieces to the interface puzzle. The "Desktop" has not changed much since originally conceived; it typically consists of shortcuts, a panel, and icons for currently running applications. Plasma aims to change that, incorporating semantic application elements, and bringing cooperating technologies to the user's fingertips in a way that is visually appealing while easing work flow.

What is wrong with the current desktop technology?

Today's desktops are static. Typically they are tied to a folder in which one can find icons (application launchers), or user-placed documents and folders. Along with pictures and images as backgrounds, the current desktop doesn't go any further, or work for the user. Plasma takes a different approach, engaging the user by creating a dynamic and highly customizable environment.

I don't think it's such a good idea...

With Plasma, you can let your desktop (and accompanying support elements) act like it always did. You can have a task bar, a background image, shortcuts, etc. If you want to, however, you can use tools provided by Plasma to take your experience further, letting your desktop take shape based on what you want and need.

How does Plasma work?

Plasma's components are widgets called Plasmoids. Plasmoids can take on a variety of functions, ranging from displaying your desktop and associated wallpaper, showing your laptop's battery level, displaying your plugged in devices, and drawing the taskbar. Widgets can be grouped together in "containers" called containments.

It doesn't sound too new... other operating systems have done that.

The key difference here is that plasmoids can interact together. You want a better view of your laptop battery in order to find out when you are running low? You just drag it away from the taskbar and put it on the desktop. Also, applets can be resized and rotated at will, thanks to the use of Scalable Vector Graphics (SVGs). As you can see, the desktop not only interacts with you, as the user, but also with itself in new and interesting ways. You are now able to control how your workspace behaves and what it displays, in a visually pleasing and user-friendly manner. Since Plasma is the sum of its plasmoids, every element, even the desktop itself, is a widget. This allows you to move your desktop anywhere with respect to the windows (back and forward). It is no longer rooted behind everything and becomes instead another element of real interaction.

Kicker and Kdesktop were working fine in KDE 3! Why did you have to change that?

Especially regarding kicker, there was the important issue of maintainability. The code was in place since the KDE 2 days, and it was difficult to add new features without breaking others. In the end, to proceed forward the only viable option was to start anew from scratch.

I can't find my favorite <insert feature here>!

Don't forget that Plasma is still in its infancy (it's brand new, after all) and that KDE 3 was an extremely polished codebase: it took seven years to get to that, while Plasma had about 18 months to get to its current status. With time, the Plasma developers plan on reintroducing features that are missing and fix regressions. As KDE progresses through the KDE4 cycle, Plasma will improve with it.

Why on earth did you decide to change the way the desktop operates?

The idea of a Desktop folder is fundamentally a broken concept. It assumes that everything you will access there resides on a single physical directory on your disk. It may be convenient, but at the same time it greatly limits what you can do. For example, you can't use custom layouts for different desktops, as everything would be read from the directory. Also, quite often a desktop structured like that becomes a dumping ground for files and folders, without any other function. That said, you can have icons on the desktop in Plasma.

What's the deal with the K menu? It's big and ugly!

During the development of KDE 4.0, different approaches for a K menu (application launcher) were tried. Some projects, like Raptor, were ambitious but there was no way they could be completed on time. At the time, one developer ported SUSE Linux's application launcher (Kickoff) to the new KDE architecture. As it was the most ready and feature complete (not to mention the product of usability testing) it was chosen to be the default menu in KDE 4.0. However, this does not mean that there aren't alternatives: projects such as the aforementioned Raptor or Lancelot are being actively developed. There is also a "traditional" K-menu available.

What is the Zooming User Interface (ZUI)?

The Zooming User Interface, or ZUI, is another component of Plasma. It enables the user to group different groups of plasmoids together, and to quickly switch between one and another using a zoom-and-pan approach. Notice that at the time of writing this feature is still under heavy development and may be fully functional only with later KDE 4.x releases.

How does the ZUI work?

Suppose you have three groups of plasmoids (such as widgets, application launchers, etc.) which you want arranged in specific combinations depending on what you want to do. You first group them according to your tastes, then you can switch between them by zooming out (getting a preview of all the groups) and then back in on the specific group you want to use. Notice that it is different from traditional X11 virtual desktop switching, as there is a higher degree of flexibility by using this approach, as the groups can be totally different from each other.

Configuration

Can I place icons on the desktop?

Of course you can. Dragging an icon from Dolphin or Konqueror to the desktop will work. There is also legacy support for the existing Desktop folders, which means that the contents of your existing Desktop folder will be automatically displayed.

I am using two screens, and I used to have kicker over the two displays. Can I do that with Plasma?

No. The reason is that having a panel over two displays adds a great deal of complexity, especially when the two displays have different resolution. As a result of this added complexity, this feature would not be guaranteed to work in all cases. As a result it was not implemented.

How can I add applets to the panel?

Open the Add Widgets dialog in the Plasma toolbox (upper right corner of the screen) then select the widget of your liking and drag it directly (don't double click or use the Add Widget button) to the panel. It should embed gracefully. If it doesn't, there is probably some bug in the widget itself.

I heard that you can use OS X's widgets with Plasma. Is this true?

There is some code in place already, however as widgets rely on WebKit, it won't be available until Qt 4.4 (which incorporates it), and therefore unlikely before KDE 4.1.

My widgets are hidden under the windows. How can I show them?

You can bring all the widgets to the front by pushing Ctrl-F12, which will bring the Plasma Dashboard to the front.

How can I lock the positions of the widgets?

Right click on an empty area of the desktop and select "Lock Widgets" from the contextual menu. If you want to reverse that, right click again and select "Unlock Widgets".

How do I remove widgets?

If they're on the panel, right click on the widget and select "Remove this...". If the widgets are on the desktop, you have different options:

  • If you hover over them, clicking the red X will remove them;
  • If you use the Add Widget dialog, you can click on the minus symbol icon next to the widget name to remove it.

How can I change the height of the panel?

From KDE 4.0.3 onwards, you just need to right-click on the Panel, select "Panel Settings" and then choose whatever size you would like to have.

Theming

I don't like the default look of the panel and other Plasma components. Can I change that?

Yes, the ability to change the look of Plasma was planned since the beginning. Plasma can use "themes", which are essentially a number of SVG images and files specifying the colors, to change its appearance. Some themes have already appeared on popular sites like kde-look.org.

Is there a GUI option available to change the theme?

Not yet, but it is planned for the future.

I still want to change the theme! What do I do?

First of all, obtain a theme (kde-look.org is a good place to look). The second, important point is that Plasma must not be running when you make the modifications or they will be overwritten. So you must quit it before with:

kquitapp plasma

Notice that doing so will also kill the desktop until Plasma is restarted, so keep a terminal window (for example Konsole) open while you do the editing in order to restart Plasma after you're done. Then, create the $KDEHOME/share/apps/desktoptheme (where $KDEHOME is the name of your .kde or .kde4 directory, depending on your installation) directory and unpack the theme there. After that is done, edit $KDEHOME/share/config/plasmarc (make a backup copy just in case) and locate the section named "[Theme]". Change "default" to the name of your downloaded theme (see instructions from the theme's author) and then start Plasma:

plasma

Troubleshooting

My panel is gone, how do I get it back?

kquitapp plasma; rm $KDEHOME/share/config/plasma-appletsrc; plasma

This deletes your plasma settings, so you'll get the default configuration back. The panel-vanishing-on-crash issue was fixed just after 4.0.0's release. If running all the 3 commands at once doesn't work, try typing them in manually and wait a few seconds before running the next command.

(Note that the $KDEHOME environment variable may not be set. Try ~/.kde (Fedora, Kubuntu Intrepid, Debian, upstream default) or ~/.kde4 (OpenSUSE, Kubuntu Hardy and several others).)

Some GTK+ applications (such as the IM client Pidgin) do not behave well in Plasma.

That is unfortunately a bug in the GTK+ graphics toolkit which is exposed by the way Plasma operates. A bug report has been opened in the GTK+ bug tracker. Recently, a patch for Plasma (KDE 4.0.0) has been posted in KDE bug tracker and it has also been incorporated in the 4.0.x branch.

I use the NVIDIA binary driver on Linux and scrolling is really slow! Is it a fault of Plasma?

No, it is a bug in the NVIDIA binary driver. Update the driver to version 169.07 or newer and the problem should be solved.

Glossary

  • Containment: A container for different plasmoids. The desktop and the panel are examples of containments.
  • Panel: The place where the K-menu, taskbar, system tray and other componenents reside. Often called taskbar.
  • Plasmoid: A component of Plasma. Often referred as widget, or applet.

Thanks

Daniel Laidig & Simon St.James - thanks for the umeet IRC logs!

Contributors

|

A reminder to whoever edits pages

This page refers to KDE 4.1. Please don't include descriptions about features present in SVN. A new page will be made once 4.2 hits at least beta stage. --Einar 11:34, 1 October 2008 (UTC) |}


This page has a lot of good information but it is laid out as a FAQ. Consequently it is rather long and unstructured. I think that it would be good to have a shorter, structured entry linking to other entries for specifics (eg KRunner, desktop containments).

Perhaps this page could be kept but moved to Plasma_FAQ.

I have started creating smaller articles on parts of plasma, such as Plasma application launchers.

- maninalift

It used to be a FAQ, actually. It was historically developed as a means to stop the trolls by giving answers to common questions. I wouldn't mind restructuring the document, however I can do big edits only in weekends.

--Einar 18:02, 10 September 2008 (UTC)

Fedora has finally got 4.1 onto the mirrors, so there are going to be a lot of questions about Plasma, as more people try it for the first time.

I was totally baffled when I first saw it, so I gathered together a list of things that I had intended to be an Introduction to Plasma page - not as it stands, but to use for inspiration. I have it on googledocs.

Would it be helpful at all to give you access to that? I'll need your email addresses, if so (send to annew at kde dot org). --annew 11:02, 11 September 2008 (UTC)


Hi, I think it would be nice to mention something about placing application shortcuts in the panel (aka like quicklaunch applet used to do). is it possible, if yes, how to do it? :) (I think the current solution is to use 3rd party quicklauncher plasmoid?)

--mxttie 11:00, 22 September 2008 (UTC)


Einar and maninalift are already re-working the plasma page. If you want to help them you can reach them via their talk pages, from the links above. --annew 11:38, 22 September 2008 (UTC)

I already built a skeleton of a page to serve as an introduction to Plasma, not linked yet because it's very sketchy, but unfortunately the UserBase downtime prevented me from working on it when I had the time --Einar 17:23, 22 September 2008 (UTC)

I made a HOWTO on the forum for configuring the panel, see here. Einar mentioned it could be added to userbase. But first i'd like it to be proof-read. What do you think? --Neverendingo 15:18, 16 October 2008 (UTC)

Link added to Tutorials. --Mark Ziegler 15:51, 16 October 2008 (UTC)
  1. 2.6 points to th zui demo, not a video showing panel configuration. --88.97.17.41 10:35, 26 October 2008 (UTC)

Changing Plasma "front page"

During the last meeting of the Community Working Group, I presented a sort of template for all application pages (see User:Jucato and Konversation). I'd like to apply that to this Plasma page as well. But that will entail a major reorganization of all Plasma-related pages. So, following the contribution guidelines, I'm giving a heads up notice and will wait for comments for a week. I'll also try to get in touch with the people who made major contributions to this page. --Jucato

Warning

{{{1}}}

Displays an information box. Parameters

  1. Text of the main body
  2. (optional) Title of the box (default: Warning)

Example: {{Warning|This is a warning}} gives

Warning

This is a warning

--Einar 18:06, 10 September 2008 (UTC)

Between running Flash in Firefox/Konqueror, the latest betas of Amarok 2.0, Miro, and Kaffeine (kde3 version) I am constantly losing sound in KDE4.1.1. I've found the only way to get it back is to reset. I've seen some of these mega tutorials about how you can fix sound once and for all in Linux, but they don't seem KDE specific. Isn't phonon supposed to handle this? I understand it isn't finished yet. Can we get some advice on what settings we should run on this page? --Axiom 23:56, 10 September 2008 (UTC)

Note

{{{1}}}

Displays an information box. Parameters

  1. Text of the main body
  2. (optional) Title of the box (default: Note)

Example: {{Note|This is a note}} gives

Note

This is a note

{|style="text-align:center"
|[[Image:Krename-filename.png|thumb|265px|Krename - Filename screen]]
|}
There is a hint on that page itself. --Mark Ziegler 18:06, 22 September 2008 (UTC)

Will this page continued? --Mark Ziegler 18:10, 22 September 2008 (UTC)

Yes, it needs love and attention :-) Feel free to add as you wish and I'll try to get some time in on it later this week --annew 19:29, 22 September 2008 (UTC)

Autohide should be updated. 4.2 is released and we can now autohide panels.


I changed the formatting several places: Most web addresses are now hidden, and the two command lines have been indented to make them stand out.

I also modified the text a few places:

  • Auto-hide Panels: added a note on how to do it i 4.3
  • Obtain network access behind Fritzbox routers: The bug is reported as fixed - the text now reflects this.
  • Show the application name instead of the description in the K - menu: Text now has a short mention of the Kickoff Menu Style and how to change to Classic Style.

I am unsure about the bluetooth section. Is it still correct? --Claus chr 27 September 2009

I don't know, and there seems to be no-one on #kde at the moment that can tell me. I'll try to find out.--annew 12:10, 27 September 2009 (UTC)

I'm puzzled by a couple of things on this page. In the kcontrol paragraph, it says "Included, at least in KDE 4.2.1". I didn't put that there, and systemsettings has been included since 4.0. I'm inclined to replace that with a comment pointing to the icon for systemsettings, so that it's easily recognised. What do you think?--annew 12:10, 27 September 2009 (UTC)

The other thing that puzzles me is the reference to kpersonalizer. In 7 years of using KDE I've not come across this. Is/Was it distro-specific? Do you know anything about it? --annew 12:10, 27 September 2009 (UTC)

I agree, that these section are odd. I think, You should definitely correct the section on kcontrol. I haven't come across kpersonalizer either and know nothin about it. --Claus chr


The section on Drag'n'Drop claims, that if you drop an image on the desktop, you get three options: Previewer, PhotoFrame or icon. When I try this I only get the latter two. Is this a distro thing? I tested it with SUSE 11.2 Milestone 8 and KDE 4.3.1. --Claus chr 6 November 2009

It's possible, of course. I'll try to find out from the Fedora packagers. --annew 13:14, 6 November 2009 (UTC)
I'm told that it's very likely a matter of whether you have kdeplasma-addons installed. I'd better add that. Thanks for pointing it out.--annew 19:53, 6 November 2009 (UTC)
I made the change, but now the supposition is being questioned. I'll watch the thread and if I get any explanation I'll post it here and update the page. --annew 10:46, 7 November 2009 (UTC)
  • Selected language from User Profile is not stored after log off / time out. Is it possible to fetch language from OpenID provider?
  • Watching sites is not working
  • SmihaelSee my profile page (sl) on Wikipedia.

Some of my KDE related articles on Slovene Wikipedia, that may be interesting:

It is indeed. Try them - both work. I'll add that to the tutorial. I wonder how many other goodies you can discover? --annew 17:55, 26 September 2008 (UTC)

I regularly use a few files with Kate. I can use Krunner to launch each by typing "kate 'filename'" (only single quotes actually entered to allow for spaces in file names). Krunner remembers file names recently used, and because my most common ones begin with different letters, I can launch them by typing, for example, "kate 'f" and then tapping the End and Enter keys on the keyboard. If other files begin the same way, it may require a few more letters of the file name, but it isn't necessary to type out the whole file name. My files are not all in the same folder, either. --Algot Runeman 17:40, 17 January 2011 (UTC)

Have the methods of Krunner changed? Experimenting with the unit conversion process in KDE 4.7 Kubuntu, I wasn't able to reproduce the examples. To convert feet to meters worked (= 6 feet) or (= 6 feet/meter) or (= 6 feet/yard) --Algot Runeman 18:11, August 2011 (UTC)

Works like a charm in KDE 4.6.3 (Mageia). Kubuntu 11.10 Live DVD shows the same behavior as you've mentioned. libkunitconversion was not changed this cycle, thus the problem is in Runner itself. Can you report it on bugs.kde.org?

P.S. Please use liquid threads, do not edit the page itself.--Yurchor 07:22, 15 August 2011 (BST)

Why would it not be fair? This isn't a point-scoring exercise. If people are coming from the world of Windows they are being told what applications KDE can offer to fill the same need. Nothing more than that. I do consider it a very sensible page to add. --annew 19:06, 28 September 2008 (UTC)
I asked because of hesitation about adding non-KDE alternatives into the third column, e.g. I use Gimp and FF. At least, vlc and psi are both Qt based and look good in KDE out of the box.
Of course, since this is a KDE site, we are going to advocate and prioritize KDE applications as alternatives to Windows or OS X software. So putting the GIMP or Firefox, or even VLC and Psi even if they are Qt, is a bit inappropriate. We can leave it to distributions to indicate that. But this is KDE, so we will naturally cite KDE apps.
As for "third party" Windows apps, the thing is that in the Windows world, the distinction between "official" and "third party" apps are blurred. Either an app is a Windows app or it isn't, that is, either it's an app that runs or Windows or it isn't a Windows app. To summarize: KDE apps only in the KDE column (it is labeled "KDE" after all), and any Windows or OS X app in their appropriate columns. --Jucato
To be fair, I would add other Open Source applications(Qt or not) in their own column, but there isn't enough space to do that, 4 columns is the limit. This wiki eats way too much horizontal space. --ZeroUm 13:43, 6 October 2008 (UTC)
I totally agree. Just because you're using KDE does not mean you should only use KDE applications. And honestly, expecting KDE alone to be able to match every commercial application is a bit too ambitious. I really think there should be a column for "Other Free Software," and unfortunately the layout is a problem. -Alec 16:48, 27 October 2008 (UTC)
This isn't about "only using KDE applications" nor is it about "expecting KDE alone to be able to match every commercial application." This page is about KDE apps that serve the same purpose as Windows or OS X apps of the same category. It is about what KDE can offer for that particular type of job, not a "Free Software equivalent/replacement". Whether or not the particular KDE app can actually serve as a replacement is beyond the point. The point is that we're listing that it exists.
This is also about preventing "feature creep". This is a KDE wiki. Our primary focus is KDE. This is not a general "free software/open source software/Linux distribution" wiki. It is not about being antagonistic to or leaving out other toolkits or desktop environments. But there are already so many sources and documentation out there about that subject and so little about KDE, it wouldn't make sense to duplicate that in here. Linux distributions or Linux guides in general already have that sort of information. KDE really only has one such list, and it partly outdated. (See Applications for Migrates)
That said, if someone is willing to put another column without breaking the layout and without losing focus on the fact that this is a KDE page, I guess I'd be ok with that. But my opinion still remains that it shouldn't. --Jucato
Keep in mind, though, that nowadays, KDE runs on Windows and OSX, so leaving Linux out is unfair! :P On a more serious note, KDE4 is attracting some GNOME users' attention, who might be interested in the KDE alternatives to their GTK+ apps. -Alec 04:35, 28 October 2008 (UTC)

Related thoughts: Some packages are known by a different name in their KDE4 guise. I hear people saying that if package xyz is not available they will not use KDE4, when it's entirely possible that a revamped xyz is now known as pqr. I feel that there's a need for a page dealing with this, but I am at a loss as to how to gather the info. --annew 20:18, 26 October 2008 (UTC)

The line lengths are something of a problem in the yes and no sections. We need to avoid clumsy orphans, and I tried to avoid unbalance, which resulted in going for shorter lines. I experimented with width settings and removing the breaks, but I never got a result that looked better. You can experiment then cancel the changes and put your findings here. If we all agree that different settings are better that's fine. --annew 09:16, 30 September 2008 (UTC)
I removed two linebreaks and added some links. For me it looks better now. --Mark Ziegler 12:13, 30 September 2008 (UTC)

Page UserBase (English)

At the bottom I found the sentence: You can either in with an existing OpenID or create a regular account. This should be, I think, You can either log in with etc. I did not change it because I am not sure if that is what it should be.

You are absolutely correct - please go ahead and change it. Thanks for spotting it. --annew 19:35, 10 May 2010 (UTC)
  • Stats== Top 10 contributors of the last week ==

Last 7 days (Top 10)

Top 20 contributors of last 10 years

Last 3,700 days (Top 20)

Graphs

Edits over the past 4 days:


Daily Edits, for the past month:


Daily Edits, for the last 3 months:


Active translators:


New registrations, by month, over 1 year:


Bonjour à tout les Français ! Contribuez, le libre en vaut la peine.

New sections 5.3 & 5.4 on English page --annew 15:21, 3 February 2009 (UTC)

  • Stats (eo)== 10 plej verkemaj kontribuantoj de la lasta semajno ==

Last 7 days (Top 10)

10-pintaj artikoloj kaj diskutoj

left

70%

Plej legataj artikoloj


left

70%

Plej diskutataj artikoloj


This document attempts to address these problems by providing answers to the most common questions.

Information

The information presented here covers Plasma in KDE 4.2. For older versions you can turn to the KDE 4.1 specific page


General Questions

What does Plasma do?

Plasma provides the desktop interface for KDE 4, including the application launcher (start menu), the desktop and the desktop panel (often referred to simply as the task bar). However Plasma is more than just this familiar collection of utilities, it is a common framework for creating integrated interfaces. It is flexible enough to provide interfaces for mobile devices, media centres and desktop computers; to support the traditional desktop metaphor as well as well as designs that haven't yet been imagined.

What is wrong with the current desktop technology?

Today's desktops are static. Typically they are tied to a folder in which one can find icons (application launchers), or user-placed documents and folders. Along with pictures and images as backgrounds, the current desktop doesn't go any further, or work for the user. Plasma takes a different approach, engaging the user by creating a dynamic and highly customizable environment.

I don't think it's such a good idea...

With Plasma, you can let your desktop (and accompanying support elements) act like it always did. You can have a task bar, a background image, shortcuts, etc. If you want to, however, you can use tools provided by Plasma to take your experience further, letting your desktop take shape based on what you want and need.

How does Plasma work?

Plasma's components are widgets called Plasmoids. Plasmoids can take on a variety of functions, ranging from displaying your desktop and associated wallpaper, showing your laptop's battery level, displaying your plugged in devices, and drawing the taskbar: basically, they are small applications that live on the desktop. Plasmoids can be grouped together in "containers" called containments. On a default desktop, there are two main elements: the Panel and the desktop itself. Both are containments in the Plasma sense.

It doesn't sound too new... other operating systems have done that.

The key difference here is that plasmoids can interact together. You want a better view of your laptop battery in order to find out when you are running low? You just drag it away from the taskbar and put it on the desktop. Also, applets can be resized and rotated at will, thanks to the use of Scalable Vector Graphics (SVGs). As you can see, the desktop not only interacts with you, as the user, but also with itself in new and interesting ways. You are now able to control how your workspace behaves and what it displays, in a visually pleasing and user-friendly manner. Since Plasma is the sum of its plasmoids, every element, even the desktop itself, is a widget. This allows you to move your desktop anywhere with respect to the windows (back and forward). It is no longer rooted behind everything and becomes instead another element of real interaction.

Kicker and Kdesktop were working fine in KDE 3. Why did you have to change that?

Especially regarding kicker, there was the important issue of maintainability. The code was in place since the KDE 2 days, and it was difficult to add new features without breaking others. In the end, to proceed forward the only viable option was to start anew from scratch.

I can't find my favorite <insert feature here>!

Don't forget that Plasma is still in heavy development and that KDE 3 was an extremely polished codebase: it took seven years to get to that, while Plasma is much younger. With time, the Plasma developers plan on reintroducing features that are missing and fix regressions. As KDE progresses through the KDE4 cycle, Plasma will improve with it.

Why was the way the desktop operates changed?

The idea of a Desktop folder is fundamentally a broken concept. It assumes that everything you will access there resides on a single physical directory on your disk. It may be convenient, but at the same time it greatly limits what you can do. For example, you can't use custom layouts for different desktops, as everything would be read from the directory. Also, quite often a desktop structured like that becomes a dumping ground for files and folders, without any other function.

I heard there are no more icons on the desktop...

That is not entirely correct. You can have icons and launchers (shortcuts) by dragging them from Dolphin or the K-menu. What has changed is that the desktop will no longer display the contents of the Desktop folder. However, you can show an arbitrary number of folders (local or remote) on your desktop view, instead of being forced to display only the contents of the "Desktop" folder. To do so, the Folder View applet comes into play.

Also, should you wish, you can replicate the "icons on desktop" paradigm with minimal effort.

What is the Folder View applet?

The Folder View applet, like its name says, is used to display items (folders, files) from a directory. Such a directory can be either a local one residing on your computer, but also a remote FTP, SSH, or SMB share. In the future, it will even contain results from Nepomuk searches and tagging.

You can choose to view either all files, or filter either by specific regular expressions (e.g., all files with a certain extension) or by file type (for example, just images).

This applet also supports basic file management properties (moving, copying, cutting and pasting for example), and you can have as many as you want on your desktop.

Lastly, you can use one Folder View as the whole desktop, effectively replicating the "old style" paradigm.


What's the deal with Kickoff (the new K Menu) ?

During the development of KDE 4.0, different approaches for a K menu (application launcher) were tried. Some projects, like Raptor, were ambitious but there was no way they could be completed on time. At the time, one developer ported SUSE Linux's application launcher (Kickoff) to the new KDE architecture. As it was the most ready and feature complete (not to mention the product of usability testing) it was chosen to be the default menu. If you don't like it, the traditional K-menu is available as well - right-click onto the K Menu to find an option "traditional style". Also, some alternative menu systems have been announced (Lancelot, Raptor), and some, such as Lancelot, are ready for daily usage.

What is KRunner?

KRunner is the versatile mini-command line you can activate by pushing "Alt-F2" or by selecting "Run Command" from the desktop contextual menu. It can search for applications, bookmarks, even sessions basing on your input, show system activity and even do simple arithmetic calculations.

KRunner's functionality can be extended through the use of plugins ("runners").

What are the "cashews"?

What is commonly referred as "cashew" is the Plasma logo you can find on the default desktop, on the upper right corner, and on the panel, on the right hand side (left hand side if you use a Right-To-Left language). By clicking on them, you can access other configuration options, such as panel configuration and the Zooming User Interface (ZUI). Some of these, like the panel cashew, only appear if the widgets aren't locked (see below).

Please provide an option to disable the upper right cashew.

Although putting an option to disable the cashew for desktops sounds reasonable, from a coding point of view it would introduce unnecessary complexity and would break the design. What has been suggested is, since the destkop itself (a containment) is handled by plugins, to write a plugin that would draw the desktop without the cashew itself. As a matter of fact, some distributions ship already a "Desktop without cashew" plugin.

What is the Zooming User Interface (ZUI)?

The Zooming User Interface, or ZUI, is another component of Plasma. It enables the user to group different groups of plasmoids together, and to quickly switch between one and another using a zoom-and-pan approach. Notice that at the time, although significant improvements have been made, this feature is still under heavy development and may be fully functional only with later KDE 4.x releases.

How does the ZUI work?

Suppose you have three groups of plasmoids (such as widgets, application launchers, etc.) which you want arranged in specific combinations depending on what you want to do. You first group them according to your tastes, then you can switch between them by zooming out (getting a preview of all the groups) and then back in on the specific group you want to use. Notice that it is different from traditional X11 virtual desktop switching, as there is a higher degree of flexibility by using this approach, as the groups can be totally different from each other.

A very good example of this behavior is shown by this image courtesy of Half-Left from #kde on freenode.

That said, you can tie virtual desktops to ZUI activities, although it is an experimental feature (see below).

Why can't I use the ZUI from Dashboard view?

That feature is a work-in-progress. We're looking into it, but can't yet say how and when it will be finished.

On multi screen setups, the ZUI operates on all screens, the Dashboard just on one. Why is that?

The workflows are different. When zooming out, the user wants to get an overview, therefore activities on all screens are zoomed out. Whereas when using the Dashboard, the user usually wants to access specific functionality and might not want to interrupt his or her workflow on other activities.

Configuration

Can I place icons on the desktop?

Of course you can. Dragging an icon from Dolphin or Konqueror to the desktop will work. Notice that dragging on the desktop will not actually create a file there, just a link to it.

To display the contents of your Desktop folder, or any other folder, use the Folder View applet.

Alternatively, right-click on an empty area of the desktop, select "Appearance settings" and in the dialog that will pop up locate the "Desktop Activity" text. Click on the "type" combo box and select "Folder View". Click OK and you will have a Folder View applet as desktop (showing the contents of the Desktop folder by default), like the "old style" paradigm.

There is a screencast made by KDE Forums user Primoz available, which shows all the desktop-related settings.

I am using two screens, and I used to have kicker over the two displays. Can I do that with Plasma?

No. The reason is that having a panel over two displays adds a great deal of complexity, especially when the two displays have different resolution. As a result of this added complexity, this feature would not be guaranteed to work in all cases, hence it was not implemented.

How can I add applets to the panel?

Method 1: Open the Add Widgets dialog in the Plasma cashew (upper right corner of the screen) then select the widget of your liking and drag it directly (don't double click or use the Add Widget button) to the panel.

Method 2: Drag an applet from the desktop to the panel.

Method 3: Click on the cashew on the panel, and select "Add widgets". Once you have selected the applet, it will be automatically added to the panel.

Can I move the applets on the panel?

To do so, open up the panel controller (by clicking on the cashew or by right clicking on the panel and selecting "Panel Settings") and hover the mouse cursor over the applets. Its shape will turn into four arrows, and you'll be able to rearrange the applets as you wish.

Lydia Pintscher's blog has a video showing movement in action. Another one is available on Aikurn's blog. Aikurn has also made an annotated video.

How do I move, rotate or resize an applet on the desktop?

First of all, hover over the applet you want to resize. The applet handle will appear.

The applet handle takes care of resize, rotate and move.

  • To move an applet: Click on the handle, then drag the applet around.
  • To rotate an applet: Click on the curved arrow then drag to rotate
  • To resize an applet: Click on the square icon and then drag to resize the applet. You can constrain the resize operation to the applet's aspect ratio by holding down the Ctrl key.

How can I change the height and the size of the panel?

Click on the panel cashew (the small icon on the right side of the panel) to open the panel configuration interface. By clicking on "Screen Edge", you can position the panel on any of the edges of the screen. Clicking on height and dragging increases or decreases the size of the panel.

The arrows on the sides of the panel define its size: there are two, which define "minimum" and "maximum" sizes. The maximum size is the size at which the panel can expand when items are added, while the minimum size is the minimum size the panel can have. If they are set differently, the panel will readjust its size depending on the contents.

Under "More Options" there are additional options to align the panel and configure its behavior.

KDE Forums user TeaAge has made a screencast which explores the various panel configuration options.

Can I auto-hide the panel?

Open the panel controller, select "More Options", then click on the relevant option.

How can I remove a panel?

Click on the panel cashew and select "Remove this Panel". Alternatively you can right click on the panel itself and choose "Remove this Panel".

I heard that you can use OS X's widgets with Plasma. Is this true?

Yes, Plasma can use OS X's widgets. Work has been done to implement also Javascript-based widgets (reverse engineered due to Apple's licence).

My widgets are hidden under the windows. How can I show them?

You can bring all the widgets to the front by pushing Ctrl-F12, which will bring the Plasma Dashboard to the front. When you are done, you can either push the Esc key or select the "Hide Dashboard" option from the cashew.

How can I lock the positions of the widgets?

Method 1: Right click on an empty area of the desktop and select "Lock Widgets" from the contextual menu. If you want to reverse that, right click again and select "Unlock Widgets". The same option is available if you right-click on the panel.

Method 2: Select "Lock Widgets" from the Plasma cashew on the upper right corner or from the panel controller.

How do I remove widgets?

If they're on the panel, right click on the widget and select "Remove this...". If the widgets are on the desktop, you have different options:

  • If you hover over them, clicking the X on the applet handle will remove them;
  • If you use the Add Widget dialog, you can click on the minus symbol icon next to the widget name to remove it.

How do I switch between Kickoff and the old style menu?

Right click on the menu icon and select "Switch to Classic Menu Style" (if using Kickoff) or "Switch to Kickoff Menu Style" (if using the classic menu). Alternatively, you can add either type of menu using the Add Applets dialog.

Aikurn has a video showing how to switch between the different styles.

How can I add/remove an activity?

Adding an activity: Zoom out from your current desktop view by clicking on the desktop view cashew (the icon in the top right corner) and selecting Zoom out. You see a toolbar under your current desktop. Click on "Add Activity" to create a new desktop view.

Removing an activity: Zoom out from your current desktop view and select the red cross from the toolbar that will appear to remove the activity.

Note

You must Unlock Widgets (Ctrl+L) before you can remove any activities.


KDE Forums user Fengshaun has made a screencast showing ZUI usage.

Are there any keyboard shortcuts for Plasma?

In addition to the mouse, there is a number of shortcuts available:

  • Lock widgets: Ctrl-L
  • Zoom out: Ctrl- -
  • Zoom in: Ctrl- = or Ctrl-+
  • Next applet: Ctrl-N
  • Previous applet: Ctrl-P
  • Add activity: Shift-Ctrl-A
  • Next activity: Shift-Ctrl-N
  • Previous activity: Shift-Ctrl-P
  • Applet settings: Ctrl-S
  • Remove applet: Ctrl-R

Unfortunately, changing these shortcuts is not possible yet.

How can I associate a keyboard shortcut with an applet?

Simply select an applet's settings (the wrench icon on the applet handle) and then click on "Kyeboard Shortcut". You will then be able to define a keyboard shortcut for your applet. Notice that some applets do not offer this feature (generally the ones that have no configuration).

Can the Dashboard show widgets other than those on my desktop?

As of KDE 4.1.0 it can, but currently (as of 4.2) there is no user interface available to configure this feature. An explanation of how to configure this manually can be found here.

How can I use virtual desktops as activities ?

Notice: This feature is experimental and has no GUI option for it. It involves editing configuration files, so you may want to make backups before screwing your Plasma configuration.

That said, ensure that Plasma is not running: if you are in KDE, this can be accomplished by opening a terminal and writing

kquitapp plasma

That will shut Plasma down nicely, and of course your desktop will disappear (but the terminal will still be open)

Then, edit the file $KDEHOME/share/config/plasmarc ($KDEHOME is either .kde or .kde4, depending on your distribution). Inside, locate the [General] section (or create it if it doesn't exist). There, write

perVirtualDesktopViews=true

ave the file and restart Plasma.

Theming

I don't like the default look of the panel and other Plasma components. Can I change that?

Yes, the ability to change the look of Plasma was planned since the beginning. Plasma can use "themes", which are essentially a number of SVG images and files specifying the colors, to change its appearance. A number of themes is already available on kde-look.org.

How can I change my Plasma theme?

Right click on your current desktop, select "Appearance Settings" (alternatively, you can select the same option from the desktop cashew) and you will find an option to change the theme in the dialog that will appear. You can also download new themes directly from there, using Get Hot New Stuff (GHNS).

Step by step instructions, although made for KDE 4.1, (including screenshots) are available on Aikurn's blog.

Troubleshooting

My panel is gone, how do I get it back?

kquitapp plasma; rm $KDEHOME/share/config/plasma-appletsrc; plasma

This deletes your plasma settings, so you'll get the default configuration back. If running all the 3 commands at once doesn't work, try typing them in manually and wait a few seconds before running the next command.

(Note that the $KDEHOME environment variable may not be set. Try ~/.kde (Fedora, Kubuntu Intrepid, Debian, upstream default) or ~/.kde4 (OpenSUSE, Kubuntu Hardy and several others).)

Some GTK+ applications show wrong system tray icon sizes.

That is unfortunately a problem in the Freedesktop.org system tray specification, which does not define the sizes for system tray icons properly.

I experience extreme slowness when using Plasma with the NVIDIA binary driver.

This is NVIDIA's fault entirely, due to their driver not supporting correctly the XRender X11 extension, and it also affects other parts of KDE such as Konsole. See this blog entry on how to report issues upstream to NVIDIA. This page contains a few suggestions on how to improve performance until an updated driver is released.

NVIDIA has recently released a beta driver (version 180.xx) that may improve performance with Plasma and KDE4 in general. However, there have been reports of large memory leaks when using these drivers.

Folder View and other plasmoids look badly rendered with an ATI video card and the open source radeon driver.

To work around this issue, you have to change the 2D acceleration method from XAA (X Acceleration Architecture) to the newer EXA. As this involves editing your xorg.conf file, bear in mind that such a modification may damage your system. Do it at your own risk.

To make the switch, edit your xorg.conf file (make a backup just in case) and locate the Device section for your graphics card. Add the line

Option "AccelMethod" "EXA"

before the "EndSection" line. If there is already a line with AccelMethod, change it from XAA to EXA. Save the file and restart the X server.

Notice that EXA is still marked as unstable, and that some other applications such as some KDE3 programs may render incorrectly.

Hints & Tips

Turning off the new job notification system

Plasma uses a different way (as opposed to the past releases of KDE to show job progress (for example, a download). For those who do not like it, there is a configuration file option to revert to the old behavior (KDE 4.1 or earlier). Make sure plasma is not running and edit $KDEHOME/share/config/plasma-appletsrc and add the following lines:

[AppletGlobals][plasma_applet_systemtray]
ShowJobs=false
ShowNotifications=false

Restart Plasma to see the changes in action.

Disabling ARGB visuals

For many of its effects, Plasma makes use of the so-called "ARGB visuals". For older video cards, this can mean a severe performance hit. To disable ARGB visuals and increase performance, you need to set the KDE_SKIP_ARGB_VISUALS environment variable to 1 (KDE_SKIP_ARGB_VISUALS=1) before Plasma starts. You can do so by putting a line setting this variable in /etc/profile or in ~/.profile.

Right-click the panel when your task bar is full

To make some changes to the panel you need to right-click on it - and if you have open applications that may not be easy, The workaround for this problem is to use the panel cashew to bring up the panel settings, then you can right-click anywhere on the panel, including on application tabs, and the command will go to the panel, not the application.

Re-arrange the application tabs on your task bar

Right-click on an empty part of the task bar (or use the method described above) and select Task Manager Settings. In the 'Sorting' combo-box, select 'Manual'. 'OK' to close it. Now you can re-arrange your task icons by holding down Alt and dragging the tabs to their new order. (If you use this alt-drag while the panel config panel is open the whole group of application tabs will move as one.)

Miscellaneous tips

Some alternatives for those who like a sparse desktop:

1 - you can remove the panel entirely. Open applications would be available using the ALT+TAB cycling.

2 - Remove the panel and add a short one at the top of the screen, to hold only the task manager

3 - Create a panel containing the task manager and use autohide.

Glossary

See the Glossary page.

Thanks

  • Daniel Laidig & Simon St.James - thanks for the umeet IRC logs!
  • Marco Martin - thanks for the information on panels!
  • Sebas - thanks for letting me use information from your blog entries!
  • Half-Left - great example of ZUI usage!
  • Aikurn - Excellent videos!
  • Marcelo Magno T. Sales - for giving panel Tips on a mailing list

Contributors

  • Luca Beltrame - current maintainer
  • Joseph M. Gaffney
  • Chani
  • Dipesh
  • Maninalift
  • All the anyonymous contributors



Back to the Introduction page
  • Lancelot screen silicon.pngLancelot screen-shot. Silicon plasma theme, monochrome icons, Courirer system font, 1280X800 screen resolution, KDE 4.1.82.
  • Userbase Technical IssuesI would like to post presentation material to this wiki. It runs using W3C Slidy-inspired scripting, so my question is this: how can I upload a Java/ECMAscript to the wiki and link to it from my presentation pages (multiple slides in a single page) ?
Sorry, but the running of scripts on the wiki is not allowed, for security reasons. However, we do welcome input. What is the subject of your presentation? Is it possible to give a brief outline on a wiki page, then link to your own web-space to view the presentation?
Oh, and by the way, please do log in and sign your talk comments :-) It's not so important for minor edits, but if you intend significant input it's good to be able to contact you via your own talk page. --annew 19:19, 16 December 2008 (UTC)

Note for translators

The category of translated templates have been changed to [[Category:Template/xx]], where xx is the language code.


Use language specific category for translated templates

This page is for English templates and for templates without language specific information. Please remember to categorize translated and other language specific templates in a localized template category, like this: [[Category:Template/xx]]
  • Lokalize
  • Lokalize
  • Lokalize-scr-1.png
  • SteveireSteve, I've uploaded the 64px icon for kjots, which fits in Tutorials, but it looks too big in KJots/Tips. The hi-48 px version is still in the gallery if you want to change it, but you may need to adapt your links so that appropriate sizes are shown.
  • SheedyFrédéric Sheedy

Member of KDE-FR Translation Team

Email: [email protected]

How to use this template

If the techbase page has the same name as the userbase page, simply put {{TechbaseLink}} in the source of the page.


Sending and receiving mail
Encryption
Spell-checking


Plasma is one of the key technologies of KDE 4 (also known as the "Pillars of KDE"), and one of the most visible to users. As Plasma treats the user interface differently than a traditional desktop, there may be confusion as to what Plasma is, what it does, and how to perform common tasks.

This document attempts to address these problems by providing answers to the most common questions.

Information

The information presented here covers Plasma in KDE 4.2. For older versions you can turn to the KDE 4.1 specific page or the KDE 4.0 one


General Questions

What does Plasma do?

Plasma provides the desktop interface for KDE 4, including the application launcher (start menu), the desktop and the desktop panel (often referred to simply as the task bar). However Plasma is more than just this familiar collection of utilities, it is a common framework for creating integrated interfaces. It is flexible enough to provide interfaces for mobile devices, media centres and desktop computers; to support the traditional desktop metaphor as well as well as designs that haven't yet been imagined.

What is wrong with the current desktop technology?

Today's desktops are static. Typically they are tied to a folder in which one can find icons (application launchers), or user-placed documents and folders. Along with pictures and images as backgrounds, the current desktop doesn't go any further, or work for the user. Plasma takes a different approach, engaging the user by creating a dynamic and highly customizable environment.

I don't think it's such a good idea...

With Plasma, you can let your desktop (and accompanying support elements) act like it always did. You can have a task bar, a background image, shortcuts, etc. If you want to, however, you can use tools provided by Plasma to take your experience further, letting your desktop take shape based on what you want and need.

How does Plasma work?

Plasma's components are widgets called Plasmoids. Plasmoids can take on a variety of functions, ranging from displaying your desktop and associated wallpaper, showing your laptop's battery level, displaying your plugged in devices, and drawing the taskbar: basically, they are small applications that live on the desktop. Plasmoids can be grouped together in "containers" called containments. On a default desktop, there are two main elements: the Panel and the desktop itself. Both are containments in the Plasma sense.

It doesn't sound too new... other operating systems have done that.

The key difference here is that plasmoids can interact together. You want a better view of your laptop battery in order to find out when you are running low? You just drag it away from the taskbar and put it on the desktop. Also, applets can be resized and rotated at will, thanks to the use of Scalable Vector Graphics (SVGs). As you can see, the desktop not only interacts with you, as the user, but also with itself in new and interesting ways. You are now able to control how your workspace behaves and what it displays, in a visually pleasing and user-friendly manner. Since Plasma is the sum of its plasmoids, every element, even the desktop itself, is a widget. This allows you to move your desktop anywhere with respect to the windows (back and forward). It is no longer rooted behind everything and becomes instead another element of real interaction.

Kicker and Kdesktop were working fine in KDE 3. Why did you have to change that?

Especially regarding kicker, there was the important issue of maintainability. The code was in place since the KDE 2 days, and it was difficult to add new features without breaking others. In the end, to proceed forward the only viable option was to start anew from scratch.

I can't find my favorite <insert feature here>!

Don't forget that Plasma is still in heavy development and that KDE 3 was an extremely polished codebase: it took seven years to get to that, while Plasma is much younger. With time, the Plasma developers plan on reintroducing features that are missing and fix regressions. As KDE progresses through the KDE4 cycle, Plasma will improve with it.

Why was the way the desktop operates changed?

The idea of a Desktop folder is fundamentally a broken concept. It assumes that everything you will access there resides on a single physical directory on your disk. It may be convenient, but at the same time it greatly limits what you can do. For example, you can't use custom layouts for different desktops, as everything would be read from the directory. Also, quite often a desktop structured like that becomes a dumping ground for files and folders, without any other function.

I heard there are no more icons on the desktop...

That is not entirely correct. You can have icons and launchers (shortcuts) by dragging them from Dolphin or the K-menu. What has changed is that the desktop will no longer display the contents of the Desktop folder. However, you can show an arbitrary number of folders (local or remote) on your desktop view, instead of being forced to display only the contents of the "Desktop" folder. To do so, the Folder View applet comes into play.

Also, should you wish, you can replicate the "icons on desktop" paradigm with minimal effort.

What is the Folder View applet?

The Folder View applet, like its name says, is used to display items (folders, files) from a directory. Such a directory can be either a local one residing on your computer, but also a remote FTP, SSH, or SMB share. In the future, it will even contain results from Nepomuk searches and tagging.

You can choose to view either all files, or filter either by specific regular expressions (e.g., all files with a certain extension) or by file type (for example, just images).

This applet also supports basic file management properties (moving, copying, cutting and pasting for example), and you can have as many as you want on your desktop.

Lastly, you can use one Folder View as the whole desktop, effectively replicating the "old style" paradigm.


What's the deal with Kickoff (the new K Menu) ?

During the development of KDE 4.0, different approaches for a K menu (application launcher) were tried. Some projects, like Raptor, were ambitious but there was no way they could be completed on time. At the time, one developer ported SUSE Linux's application launcher (Kickoff) to the new KDE architecture. As it was the most ready and feature complete (not to mention the product of usability testing) it was chosen to be the default menu. If you don't like it, the traditional K-menu is available as well - right-click onto the K Menu to find an option "traditional style". Also, some alternative menu systems have been announced (Lancelot, Raptor), and some, such as Lancelot, are ready for daily usage.

What is KRunner?

KRunner is the versatile mini-command line you can activate by pushing "Alt-F2" or by selecting "Run Command" from the desktop contextual menu. It can search for applications, bookmarks, even sessions basing on your input, show system activity and even do simple arithmetic calculations.

KRunner's functionality can be extended through the use of plugins ("runners").

What are the "cashews"?

What is commonly referred as "cashew" is the Plasma logo you can find on the default desktop, on the upper right corner, and on the panel, on the right hand side (left hand side if you use a Right-To-Left language). By clicking on them, you can access other configuration options, such as panel configuration and the Zooming User Interface (ZUI). Some of these, like the panel cashew, only appear if the widgets aren't locked (see below).

Please provide an option to disable the upper right cashew.

Although putting an option to disable the cashew for desktops sounds reasonable, from a coding point of view it would introduce unnecessary complexity and would break the design. What has been suggested is, since the destkop itself (a containment) is handled by plugins, to write a plugin that would draw the desktop without the cashew itself. As a matter of fact, some distributions ship already a "Desktop without cashew" plugin.

What is the Zooming User Interface (ZUI)?

The Zooming User Interface, or ZUI, is another component of Plasma. It enables the user to group different groups of plasmoids together, and to quickly switch between one and another using a zoom-and-pan approach. Notice that at the time, although significant improvements have been made, this feature is still under heavy development and may be fully functional only with later KDE 4.x releases.

How does the ZUI work?

Suppose you have three groups of plasmoids (such as widgets, application launchers, etc.) which you want arranged in specific combinations depending on what you want to do. You first group them according to your tastes, then you can switch between them by zooming out (getting a preview of all the groups) and then back in on the specific group you want to use. Notice that it is different from traditional X11 virtual desktop switching, as there is a higher degree of flexibility by using this approach, as the groups can be totally different from each other.

A very good example of this behavior is shown by this image courtesy of Half-Left from #kde on freenode.

That said, you can tie virtual desktops to ZUI activities, although it is an experimental feature (see below).

Why can't I use the ZUI from Dashboard view?

That feature is a work-in-progress. We're looking into it, but can't yet say how and when it will be finished.

On multi screen setups, the ZUI operates on all screens, the Dashboard just on one. Why is that?

The workflows are different. When zooming out, the user wants to get an overview, therefore activities on all screens are zoomed out. Whereas when using the Dashboard, the user usually wants to access specific functionality and might not want to interrupt his or her workflow on other activities.

Configuration

Can I place icons on the desktop?

Of course you can. Dragging an icon from Dolphin or Konqueror to the desktop will work. Notice that dragging on the desktop will not actually create a file there, just a link to it.

To display the contents of your Desktop folder, or any other folder, use the Folder View applet.

Alternatively, right-click on an empty area of the desktop, select "Appearance settings" and in the dialog that will pop up locate the "Desktop Activity" text. Click on the "type" combo box and select "Folder View". Click OK and you will have a Folder View applet as desktop (showing the contents of the Desktop folder by default), like the "old style" paradigm.

There is a screencast made by KDE Forums user Primoz available, which shows all the desktop-related settings.

I am using two screens, and I used to have kicker over the two displays. Can I do that with Plasma?

No. The reason is that having a panel over two displays adds a great deal of complexity, especially when the two displays have different resolution. As a result of this added complexity, this feature would not be guaranteed to work in all cases, hence it was not implemented.

How can I add applets to the panel?

Method 1: Open the Add Widgets dialog in the Plasma cashew (upper right corner of the screen) then select the widget of your liking and drag it directly (don't double click or use the Add Widget button) to the panel.

Method 2: Drag an applet from the desktop to the panel.

Method 3: Click on the cashew on the panel, and select "Add widgets". Once you have selected the applet, it will be automatically added to the panel.

Can I move the applets on the panel?

To do so, open up the panel controller (by clicking on the cashew or by right clicking on the panel and selecting "Panel Settings") and hover the mouse cursor over the applets. Its shape will turn into four arrows, and you'll be able to rearrange the applets as you wish.

Lydia Pintscher's blog has a video showing movement in action. Another one is available on Aikurn's blog. Aikurn has also made an annotated video.

How do I move, rotate or resize an applet on the desktop?

First of all, hover over the applet you want to resize. The applet handle will appear.

The applet handle takes care of resize, rotate and move.

  • To move an applet: Click on the handle, then drag the applet around.
  • To rotate an applet: Click on the curved arrow then drag to rotate
  • To resize an applet: Click on the square icon and then drag to resize the applet. You can constrain the resize operation to the applet's aspect ratio by holding down the Ctrl key.

How can I change the height and the size of the panel?

Click on the panel cashew (the small icon on the right side of the panel) to open the panel configuration interface. By clicking on "Screen Edge", you can position the panel on any of the edges of the screen. Clicking on height and dragging increases or decreases the size of the panel.

The arrows on the sides of the panel define its size: there are two, which define "minimum" and "maximum" sizes. The maximum size is the size at which the panel can expand when items are added, while the minimum size is the minimum size the panel can have. If they are set differently, the panel will readjust its size depending on the contents.

Under "More Options" there are additional options to align the panel and configure its behavior.

KDE Forums user TeaAge has made a screencast which explores the various panel configuration options.

Can I auto-hide the panel?

Open the panel controller, select "More Options", then click on the relevant option.

How can I remove a panel?

Click on the panel cashew and select "Remove this Panel". Alternatively you can right click on the panel itself and choose "Remove this Panel".

General Panel Configuration Help

This forum page gives an illustrated guide to configuring the panel.

I heard that you can use OS X's widgets with Plasma. Is this true?

Yes, Plasma can use OS X's widgets. Work has been done to implement also Javascript-based widgets (reverse engineered due to Apple's license).

My widgets are hidden under the windows. How can I show them?

You can bring all the widgets to the front by pushing Ctrl-F12, which will bring the Plasma Dashboard to the front. When you are done, you can either push the Esc key or select the "Hide Dashboard" option from the cashew.

How can I lock the positions of the widgets?

Method 1: Right click on an empty area of the desktop and select "Lock Widgets" from the contextual menu. If you want to reverse that, right click again and select "Unlock Widgets". The same option is available if you right-click on the panel.

Method 2: Select "Lock Widgets" from the Plasma cashew on the upper right corner or from the panel controller.

How do I remove widgets?

If they're on the panel, right click on the widget and select "Remove this...". If the widgets are on the desktop, you have different options:

  • If you hover over them, clicking the X on the applet handle will remove them;
  • If you use the Add Widget dialog, you can click on the minus symbol icon next to the widget name to remove it.

How do I switch between Kickoff and the old style menu?

Right click on the menu icon and select "Switch to Classic Menu Style" (if using Kickoff) or "Switch to Kickoff Menu Style" (if using the classic menu). Alternatively, you can add either type of menu using the Add Applets dialog.

Aikurn has a video showing how to switch between the different styles.

How can I add/remove an activity?

Adding an activity: Zoom out from your current desktop view by clicking on the desktop view cashew (the icon in the top right corner) and selecting Zoom out. You see a toolbar under your current desktop. Click on "Add Activity" to create a new desktop view.

Removing an activity: Zoom out from your current desktop view and select the red cross from the toolbar that will appear to remove the activity.

Note: You must Unlock Widgets (Ctrl+L) before you can remove any activities.

KDE Forums user Fengshaun has made a screencast showing ZUI usage.

How can I quickly move between Activities?

The ZUI method is rather slow, so a better way is to use an Activity Bar. A short how-to here explains exactly what you need to do.

Are there any keyboard shortcuts for Plasma?

In addition to the mouse, there is a number of shortcuts available:

  • Lock widgets: Ctrl-L
  • Zoom out: Ctrl- -
  • Zoom in: Ctrl- = or Ctrl-+
  • Next applet: Ctrl-N
  • Previous applet: Ctrl-P
  • Add activity: Shift-Ctrl-A
  • Next activity: Shift-Ctrl-N
  • Previous activity: Shift-Ctrl-P
  • Applet settings: Ctrl-S
  • Remove applet: Ctrl-R

Unfortunately, changing these shortcuts is not possible yet.

How can I associate a keyboard shortcut with an applet?

Simply select an applet's settings (the wrench icon on the applet handle) and then click on "Kyeboard Shortcut". You will then be able to define a keyboard shortcut for your applet. Notice that some applets do not offer this feature (generally the ones that have no configuration).

Can the Dashboard show widgets other than those on my desktop?

As of KDE 4.1.0 it can, but currently (as of 4.2) there is no user interface available to configure this feature. An explanation of how to configure this manually can be found here.

How can I use virtual desktops as activities ?

Notice: This feature is experimental and has no GUI option for it. It involves editing configuration files, so you may want to make backups before screwing your Plasma configuration.

That said, ensure that Plasma is not running: if you are in KDE, this can be accomplished by opening a terminal and writing

kquitapp plasma

That will shut Plasma down nicely, and of course your desktop will disappear (but the terminal will still be open)

Then, edit the file $KDEHOME/share/config/plasmarc ($KDEHOME is either .kde or .kde4, depending on your distribution). Inside, locate the [General] section (or create it if it doesn't exist). There, write

perVirtualDesktopViews=true

save the file and restart Plasma.

Notifications take up too much screen - can I get rid of them?

First, stop plasma with

kquitapp plasma 

Then open up `kde4-config --localprefix`/share/config/plasma-appletsrc and put this somewhere in there:


[AppletGlobals][plasma_applet_systemtray]
ShowJobs=false
ShowNotifications=false

Start Plasma again and voila.

Theming

I don't like the default look of the panel and other Plasma components. Can I change that?

Yes, the ability to change the look of Plasma was planned since the beginning. Plasma can use "themes", which are essentially a number of SVG images and files specifying the colors, to change its appearance. A number of themes is already available on kde-look.org.

How can I change my Plasma theme?

Right click on your current desktop, select "Appearance Settings" (alternatively, you can select the same option from the desktop cashew) and you will find an option to change the theme in the dialog that will appear. You can also download new themes directly from there, using Get Hot New Stuff (GHNS).

Step by step instructions, although made for KDE 4.1, (including screenshots) are available on Aikurn's blog.

Is there support for advanced visual effects (transparency, etc.) without using compositing?

In an effort to keep the codebase clean of workarounds (if not even hacks), the Plasma developers have decided that features that require compositing to work will not have a composite-less version. The main reasoning is that in the past (KDE 3.5.x), such approaches were one of the causes of the unmaintainability of the code, and also because supporting those features is actually pushing graphics card developers to write better graphics drivers.

Troubleshooting

Plasma crashed, how can I bring my desktop back?

Normally Plasma automatically restarts in the event of a crash. Should this not happen, open KRunner by pushing Alt-F2 (it should be still running) and write "plasma". Plasma will be restarted.

My panel is gone, how do I get it back?

kquitapp plasma; rm $KDEHOME/share/config/plasma-appletsrc; plasma

This deletes your plasma settings, so you'll get the default configuration back. If running all the 3 commands at once doesn't work, try typing them in manually and wait a few seconds before running the next command.

(Note that the $KDEHOME environment variable may not be set. Try ~/.kde (Fedora, Kubuntu Intrepid, Debian, upstream default) or ~/.kde4 (OpenSUSE, Kubuntu Hardy and several others).)

Some GTK+ applications show wrong system tray icon sizes.

That is unfortunately a problem in the Freedesktop.org system tray specification, which does not define the sizes for system tray icons properly.

I experience extreme slowness when using Plasma with the NVIDIA binary driver.

This is NVIDIA's fault entirely, due to their driver not supporting correctly the XRender X11 extension, and it also affects other parts of KDE such as Konsole. See this blog entry on how to report issues upstream to NVIDIA. This page contains a few suggestions on how to improve performance until an updated driver is released.

NVIDIA has released the 18x.xx series driver that can improve performance dramatically with Plasma and KDE4 in general.

Users who have a NVIDIA 6 or 7 series card should add the following lines to their xorg.conf in the "Screen" section, which may improve performance. You don't need to add these lines if you have a 8/9 or above series NVIDIA card, since they're enabled by default.

Option "PixmapCacheSize" "5000000"
Option "AllowSHMPixmaps" "0"

There are some other options you can try, which may improve things if you get poor Desktop Effects performance.

Go to SystemSettings>Desktop>Desktop Effects>Advanced, you will see "OpenGL Options", make sure "Bilinear" or "Nearest (fastest)" is set as the "Texture Filter" option. You can also try turning off "Use VSync" there as well.

Folder View and other plasmoids look badly rendered with an ATI video card and the open source radeon driver.

To work around this issue, you have to change the 2D acceleration method from XAA (X Acceleration Architecture) to the newer EXA. As this involves editing your xorg.conf file, bear in mind that such a modification may damage your system. Do it at your own risk.

To make the switch, edit your xorg.conf file (make a backup just in case) and locate the Device section for your graphics card. Add the line

Option "AccelMethod" "EXA"

before the "EndSection" line. If there is already a line with AccelMethod, change it from XAA to EXA. Save the file and restart the X server.

Notice that EXA is still marked as unstable, and that some other applications such as some KDE3 programs may render incorrectly.

Hints & Tips

Turning off the new job notification system

Plasma uses a different way (as opposed to the past releases of KDE to show job progress (for example, a download). For those who do not like it, there is a configuration file option to revert to the old behavior (KDE 4.1 or earlier). Make sure plasma is not running and edit $KDEHOME/share/config/plasma-appletsrc and add the following lines:

[AppletGlobals][plasma_applet_systemtray]
ShowJobs=false
ShowNotifications=false

Restart Plasma to see the changes in action.

Disabling ARGB visuals

For many of its effects, Plasma makes use of the so-called "ARGB visuals". For older video cards, this can mean a severe performance hit. To disable ARGB visuals and increase performance, you need to set the KDE_SKIP_ARGB_VISUALS environment variable to 1 (KDE_SKIP_ARGB_VISUALS=1) before Plasma starts. You can do so by putting a line setting this variable in /etc/profile or in ~/.profile.

Right-click the panel when your task bar is full

To make some changes to the panel you need to right-click on it - and if you have open applications that may not be easy, The workaround for this problem is to use the panel cashew to bring up the panel settings, then you can right-click anywhere on the panel, including on application tabs, and the command will go to the panel, not the application.

Re-arrange the application tabs on your task bar

Right-click on an empty part of the task bar (or use the method described above) and select Task Manager Settings. In the 'Sorting' combo-box, select 'Manual'. 'OK' to close it. Now you can re-arrange your task icons by holding down Alt and dragging the tabs to their new order. (If you use this alt-drag while the panel config panel is open the whole group of application tabs will move as one.)

Watch some Screencasts

This forum page has links to screencasts that will help you understand Desktop Settings, Panel Settings and the Zooming User Interface (a.k.a. the Cashew).

Miscellaneous tips

Some alternatives for those who like a sparse desktop:

1 - you can remove the panel entirely. Open applications would be available using the ALT+TAB cycling.

2 - Remove the panel and add a short one at the top of the screen, to hold only the task manager

3 - Create a panel containing the task manager and use autohide.

Glossary

See the Glossary page.

Thanks

  • Daniel Laidig & Simon St.James - thanks for the umeet IRC logs!
  • Marco Martin - thanks for the information on panels!
  • Sebas - thanks for letting me use information from your blog entries!
  • Half-Left - great example of ZUI usage!
  • Aikurn - Excellent videos!
  • Marcelo Magno T. Sales - for giving panel Tips on a mailing list

Contributors

  • Luca Beltrame - current maintainer
  • Joseph M. Gaffney
  • Chani
  • Dipesh
  • Maninalift
  • All the anyonymous contributors



Back to the Introduction page
  • Plasma/FAQ/4.2This page is currently for discussion of the entry or Plasma 4.2. Talk or 4.1 can be accessed from the link below.
Talk:Plasma/4.1

The Plasma/FAQ contains several references to the Dashboard, but no explanation of it, which is a bit confusing. It would be great, if someone could write a bit about it, either on the Plasma page or here, where ever it seem more appropriate, and perhaps also a short definition in Glossary with a link. --Claus chr 3 August 2009

  • Umbrello
  • Mgraesslin/KWinKWin is the window manager of the KDE workspace. This application is responsible for placing and managing windows, managing virtual desktops and many important actions like the shortcut alt+tab to change the active window.


Shortcuts

KWin's global shortcuts can be configured via "Systemsettings -> Keyboard & Mouse -> Global Keyboard Shortcuts". There you have to select KWin in "KDE component". The following table lists the most important shortcuts with their default settings.

Shortcut Action
Ctrl+F1 Switch to desktop 1
Ctrl+F2 Switch to desktop 2
Ctrl+F3 Switch to desktop 3
Ctrl+F4 Switch to desktop 4
Alt+Tab Walk through windows
Alt+Shift+Tab Walk through windows (reverse)
Alt+F3 Window Operations Menu
Alt+F4 Close window
Ctrl+Alt+Esc Kill window
Ctrl+Alt+A Activate window demanding attention
Ctrl+Print Desktop screenshot to clipboard
Alt+Print Window screenshot to clipboard
Alt+Shift+F12 Suspend compositing
Ctrl+F8 Show desktop grid
Ctrl+F9 Toggle present windows (current desktop)
Ctrl+F10 Toggle present windows (all desktops)
Ctrl+F11 Desktop cube

Manage windows

The following sections will present many mouse and key combinations. That is always the default configuration. Each of these combination can be changed. That is described in section configuration.

Change size

The size of a window can be changed most easily with the maximize button. This button is by default the second button from right side in the titel bar. By clicking it with the left mouse button the window will be both horizontally and vertically maximized or the original size is restored. By clicking the button with the middle mouse button the window will be vertically maximized and by clicking with the right mouse button the window will be horizontally maximized. By double clicking the title bar with the left mouse button the window will be maximized as well.

If the window is not maximized the window size can be changed individually. Therefore you move the mouse to the window border. Now a size-change mouse cursor will be shown. By pressing the left mouse button and simultaneous moving of the mouse (dragging) the size of the window will be changed. If it is difficult to reach one of the borders, you can press the alt-key in combination with the right mouse button to change the size. There is also a option in the useraction menu available.

Move

A window can be moved via the title bar. Therefore you have to click with the left mouse button on any place of the title bar and move the mouse while keeping the mouse button pressed. If you cannot reach parts of the window, because the title bar borders to the top of the screen you can use the combination of alt and left mouse button on any place of the window and move the window by moving the mouse. Another possibility is to use the desktop grid effect or the pager to move the window.

The useraction menu offers the possibility to move the window as well. In that case you can move the window by just moving the mouse without pressing a key or mouse button. The moving ends as soon as there is an event such as a mouse click or enter key.


Minimizing

A window can be hidden by clicking the minimize button. This is by default the third button from the right in the title bar. The window can be minimized as well by clicking the entry in the tasks applet or by using the useraction menu. The window can be unminimized via walk through windows (alt+tab) or via the entry in the tasks applet. If compositing is activated the (un)minimizing will be animated.

Shade

The function shade reduces a window to the title bar. By default this function is only available via the useraction menu. Since KDE 4.2 there is a button available which can be added to Oxygen/Ozone window decoration.

Keep window above/below others

KWin is able to keep a window always above/below all other windows. That is, there is a window which always covers other windows or is always covered by other windows, no matter which window is the active one. The option can be find in the submenu "Advanced" of the useraction menu.

Move window to different desktop

It is possible to move single windows to different virtual desktops. Therefore there is a submenu "To desktop" in the useraction menu containing an entry for each desktop and one for keeping the window on all desktops. If active desktop borders are activated the window can be moved to a different desktop by just moving the window to the border of the screen. It is also possible to move a window to a different desktop by moving its pictograph in the pager or using the desktop grid effect.

Walk through windows

Via shortcut alt+tab or alt+shift+tab you can walk through the window list. By pressing the tab key again the next entry in the list will be selected. You can even use your mouse to select an item in the list. This is even possible in animated effects like CoverSwitch.

If compositing is activated by default the boxswitch effect is used to animate walk through windows. This effect displays window thumbnails instead of a window list. There are more effects available and it is also possible to deselect the effect at all.

I added them, currently in the English version --Sordon 09:09, 18 February 2009 (UTC)

Translation of Desktop and Panel

Shouldn't we generally use the word 'Arbeitsfläche' instead of 'Desktop' and also 'Kontrollleiste' instead of 'Taskleiste'? I'm asking because these are the translations that are used in KDE 4.2 German version. --Sordon 09:09, 18 February 2009 (UTC)

Translation of widget and plugin

Should widget and plugin always be translated as Miniprogramm as it done in the German version of KDE? --Sordon 23:10, 18 February 2009 (UTC)

Current German translations

There are 337 pages (partly) translated to German. These are:

Proposed for Deletion

This page has been proposed for deletion for the following reason:

Empty page.

Please use the discussion section of this page to voice your opinion on this.

Então, você instalou KDE pela primeira vez, ou então está retornando ao KDE de uma longa viagem em outro lugar. Ou ainda você está planejando usar o KDE, mas não sabe direito o que ele é e quer descobrir o que é essa coisa que está olhando pra você da tela de seu computador?

Comunidade Internacional

KDE é nosso, cortesia de Wade Olson
KDE é nosso, cortesia de Wade Olson

KDE é mais do que apenas programas, é também uma comunidade de programadores, tradutores, contribuidores, artistas, escritores, distribuidores e usuários em volta do globo. a Tecnologia internacional do time KDE tem como meta criar o melhor programa para seu computador, e não apenas Contribuidores, mas também usuários e fãs podem ser achados em quase qualquer estado, de qualquer pais, dando ajuda, falando das novidades, ou apenas utilizando o KDE.

(Imagem cortesia de Wade Olson)

Desktop Environment

KDE, ou K Desktop Environment, como o nome sugere, iniciou sua vida como um gerenciador de desktops. Os programas cresceram, e o KDE agora é um time internacional que cria aplicações abertas e gratuitas. O que isso significa é que existem muitos programas trabalhando juntos para dar a você a melhor experiência computacional possível. Isso significa que você não pode usar um programa do KDE se você não usa o desktop do KDE? De forma alguma. com a ajuda de uma ou duas bibliotecas as aplicações podem ser usadas em todos os desktops, inclusive Windows e OS X.

KDE oferece uma variedade de programas para satisfazer as necessidades dos usuários. de um simples e poderoso editor de texto até tocadores de áudio/vídeo de ultima geração, até as mais sofisticadas IDE`s ( programas de desenvolvimento de software ), além do mais, as aplicações KDE seguem uma estrita linha de look`n feel em todos os programas, dando um efeito confortável ao utilizar qualquer programa. KDE tem várias outras qualidades que fazem dele um centro de trabalho de ponta, como:

  • Um desktop bonito e moderno
  • Sistema de configuração flexível, deixando você personalizar os aplicativos sem editar arquivos de configuração na mão.
  • Transparência de rede, acessando facilmente arquivos em outras redes e computadores como se estivessem no seu PC.
  • Ecossistema de programas contendo mais de milhares de aplicativos.
  • Traduzido em 60 idiomas.


Informação

Você pode ler mais sobre o projeto KDE, sua história, sua proposta, seu desenvolvimento no site do KDE, na sessão o que "O Que é KDE"


Programas Livres

KDE não é qualquer software. É Programa Livre, do ponto de vista do usuário, isso é um fato importante, mesmo sem ir fundo na parte técnica ou as considerações legais. Porquê? Porquê com software livre, você pode utilizar o KDE sempre que quiser e de qualquer forma que pensar. sem chaves de ativação e limites na instalação, e você é livre para compartilhar com os outros também! então, não apenas você tem em suas mãos um software poderoso, mas você também dá a sua família e amigos a oportunidade de terem também.

Informação

Curioso sobre Programas Livres? Leia mais na Free Software Foundation website.


Tem Mais!

E Não para por aí.! KDE tem muito para ofertar! aqui estão alguns outros pontos que podem estar interessados:

  • Outras Plataformas - Os aplicativos KDE estão funcionando também para Windows, Mac OS X e portáteis como o Nokia N810.
  • Office e ferramentas de produtividade - KDE também serve para deixar você produtivo e organizado.
  • Framework para desenvolvimento de aplicações - Sempre sonhou em escrever o próximo programa de dominação global? KDE pode te ajudar com isso.


Voltar para a Página introdutória

I've followed the project for a while, running KDE-Windows under Windows XP (it's amazing that it works at all, that it works pretty well is astounding!)

Wiki woes

2011-11-14: I'm frustrated as heck trying to get information about KDE, but I am going to do something about the wiki part of it instead of (OK, as well as ☺) ) just bitching. Most of the work is taking place on my techbase page, but some of it applies here, like bugs in the Chihuahua skin and the philosophical why have two overlapping wikis.

userbase interwiki issues

interwiki prefixes let you link between wikis. (That first link is an example of one, [[mediawikiwiki:Some link generates an external link to an article on mediawiki.or. But the interwiki prefixes on userbase have some problems:

  • It should be easy to link from one wiki to another, using [techbase:Getting Started], but it isn't set up.
  • There is a bug prefix, e.g., but why is it language="ᨅᨔ ᨕᨘᨁᨗ" so that it only works for that language?!
  • Why is there an empty bugs prefix, e.g.1234 ?
  • techbase and userbase have different interwiki maps, e.g. techbase has no wikipedia prefix, but userbase does e.g. wikipedia:Git, though userbase does?!


Better Modify a Page

2011-11-28 The Modify a Page#Workflow section is inconsistent. See /Improved Modify a page

Kubuntu on my PC

2009-2010 desktop

April 2009 I went and installed Kubuntu 9.04 on a spare partition of my Falcon Northwest 2005-vintage Rolls Royce AMD 3000 desktop. Lots of struggle, documented in /Kubuntu 9.04 setup and problems.

That PC had a built-in sound card and a fancy Audigy ZS. KDE System Settings > Multimedia and ALSA were always confused about them. The Audigy ZS stuttered and screeched. I figured out how to switch them around, details in /Multiple audio devices

I then overwrite the first GB of my hard drive, oops, details on that repair at /Disk recovery; the Windows part of it is at /Windows reinstall.

2011 new desktop

Upgrading Kubuntu to 9.10, 10.04, 10.10, 11.04 all went fine on my aging desktop, steady improvements though 1 GB is no longer enough. One day its graphics displayed wonky and the next the power supply sparked and smoked. I inserted my hard drive into another AMD+ATI PC, an HP Pavilion a1012x. When I tell it to boot off the second drive it boots right up into Kubuntu and everything works fine!

... Except the new PC has two CD drives and disks don't automount or offer to play, see /CD drive woes


Subpages of User:Claus chr/DPL

  • Tinman321== IRL ==
  • Name: Nikita Lyalin
  • Birth: 04.10.1988
  • Location: Yekaterinburg, Urals, Russia

Contacts

  • E-Mail: tinman321 at gmail dot com
  • JID: tinman321 at gmail dot com
  • Phone: +7 909 016 72 83

Links


A bit about me

Im a 17 year old student from germany, whoes most loved hobby is programming and Linux in general. For my age I have discovered lots of things already and won't stop doing so in the near future.

I have a project at sourceforge.net(mkproject.sourceforge.net) which is focused on the idea of rapid development and getting started fast into linux development.

I like to contribute to a community and LOVE KDE as a Desktop though I also miss some functionalities and application which I had under GNOME (i.e. gnome-do).

I have a blog at blogger also about development and recent stuff around my work.


My currently used OS's are openSUSE(for development and contributing and bug hunting) as dual boot with Debian GNU/LINUX(as a stable system I can go back to if I have trouble running the others) and Ubuntu for my eeepc 901.


Currently Im still working on my mkproject-app but aside i would like to get more involved around KDE and QT development as I want to do this later for a living.

Talk:Plasma/FAQ/4.1

UserBase es una colección de paginas dedicadas a ayudar a los usuarios de todo el mundo a obtener la mejor experiencia al usar KDE.

Aquí encontrarás

* Páginas dedicadas a las aplicaciones - Explora caracteristicas que nisiquiera sabías que existían
* Preguntas Más Comunes  Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)
* Guias y Tutoriales - Como hacer las cosas y resolver problemas.
* Trucos y Consejos - Para hacer tu vida más fácil y agradable


Lo que NO encontrarás

* Páginas tecnicas, en su mayoria utilizadas por los desarrolladores - Aunque encontrará muchos enlaces a http://techbase.kde.org/
* Documentación "oficial" - La puede encontrar en kde.org o en las páginas de inicio de la aplicación
* Itinerario de eventos - La puede encontrar Aquí


Listo para contribuir ?

Necesitará abrir una cuenta OpenID para poder acceder. Una vez que este hecho, lea las Directrices de contribución para orientarse en qué hacer.

Porfavor recuerde las directrices anteriores, si tiene algún contenido que considere deba ser centrado en el usuario, pero no estrictamente dentro de esas directrices, por favor consulte con la comunidad del grupo de trabajo en community-wg en kde.org

Bienvenido a nuestra magnífica comunidad !



Volver a la Página de introducción

I followed instructions to create a bootable SD card,

 zcat blah.bootable.gz > /dev/sdX

This is dangerous because it overwrites the partition, but I had done it before, I knew there was nothing on my SD card and /dev/sda is my SD card.

But /dev/sda is my hard drive. The whole thing.

I checked with df and the size looked wrong, then I read my notes (should have done that first) and I was overwriting the wrong disk. Ctrl-C!

Then I tested the .gz file and it was corrupt, so I thought nothing had been written. My computer worked fine.

The next day I got an error coming out of standby about not reading C:\$MFT or something. So I decided to reboot. Big mistake, I should have read partition tables, backed up some key files, and prepared for disaster.

Rule 1: do what you can while it's working.

Errors shutting down, then could not reboot, bad disk.

Failed recovery

I couldn't find my Windows XP CD-ROM, even though Falcon Northwest make a big deal. Of course my Windows XP is so dramatically different thanks to all the updates and service packs that the original disk has been useless for System File Checking and file recovery and such. I had always meant to follow instructions to slipstream a new boot CD-ROM, where you make a fresh Windows CD-ROM that contains the latest files, but never did.

Rule 2 You need a boot disk around.

Falcon Northwest provided me a personalized Recovery Disk, I inserted this and nothing happened. Zero feedback.

Into Kubuntu Live CD

I had built a Kubuntu Live CD. That booted fine.

The Kubuntu Live CD startup menu has "check disk" menu choice is useless, it just checks the CD-ROM. BUG: it is badly named.

So I ran the Live CD environment, and that worked fine. I'm updating this web page from the Live CD. Hooray for free software that is happy for the world to make bootable CDs.

Create a recovery disk/USB?

There are lots of dedicated "recovery CD" distributions. Distrowatch lists dozens, and the search leaves out the GParted distribution.

The problem is, I'm running from my only CD drive, so I can't burn another CD. Besides, I don't want to waste another CD blank. I have gigabytes of space on my USB flash drive and SD memory card.

BUG: All the distributions I checked have crap guides to creating a bootable USB. Some even talk about making a floppy. The functionality and documentation for making a bootable USB needs to be separated from all these distributions.

Use what I have

But I'm already running Linux. Kubuntu has the parted partition editor and the NTFS tools.

BUG: all the online web recovery instructions are crap. They tell you how to make a recovery CD or floppy or whatever, tell you to stick it in the machine and reboot, but fail to tell you what to do next. I guess they assume you'll walk through their beautiful menu system. It is stupid and short-sighted not to mirror help and guidelines on a web site. You should never have to create physical media and boot from it just to read documentation.

The first four pages of Google results for "linux partition recovery tutorial" are either sites trying to sell me something or yet another guide to creating a recovery CD. I gave up finding any explanation of what to do.

Find your hard drive

You have to find the UNIX device name for your disk, like hdb ("hard disk B") or sda ("SCSCI disk A" but also "Secure Digital" memory card). Then tools can access your disk using its entry in the special /dev directory. That's how I was able to scribble all over my hard drive in the first place.

Unfortunately, the /dev directory has lots of devices in it.

Another approach is to look for boot messages where the Linux kernel finds hardware devices. In a Linux console, enter

 dmesg | grep disk
 dmesg | grep drive

one of those should identify promising disk devices, or enter

 dmesg | less

to read the whole boot thing (which might have hints about the state of the drive).

The best approach I've found is the somewhat undocumented one of looking in the special file /proc/partitions:

 cat /proc/partitions

This identifies the partitions on the various devices, and their blocks. I guess if your hard drive was really badly trashed, it wouldn't have any partitions.

All these confirmed my hunch that /dev/sda is my poor hard drive. The good news is /proc/partitions showed my sda1 and sda2

Run parted

Now start parted. I should probably start this as the root user, using sudo

$ parted
Using /dev/sdb

that's wrong, I need to select /dev/sda.

 (parted) help
 ...  lots of commands
 (parted) select /dev/sda
 Error: Error opening /dev/sda: Permission denied

so I do have to be root.

$ parted
GNU Parted 1.8.8
Using /dev/sda   (good, now I'm root it picks sda as I can write to it)
Welcome to GNU Parted! Type 'help' to view a list of commands.
 
(parted) check
Partition number? 1
Error: \8. is 512k, but it has 15994 clusters (63976k).
Ignore/Cancel? i
Fatal: Bad FAT: cluster 12 is cross-linked for \0.8.  You should run dosfsck or scandisk.

there you go! Let's see if the Linux partition is OK at least.

(parted) check
Partition number? 1
 Error: Partition doesn't exist.

Damn.

 (parted) print
Model: ATA ST3120026AS (scsi)
Disk /dev/sda: 120GB
Sector size (logical/physical): 512B/512B
Partition Table: msdos
 
Number  Start   End     Size    Type     File system  Flags
 1      17.4kB  2031MB  2031MB  primary  fat32        boot, lba

damn. That's completely wrong, I should have an enormous Windows partition. My original destructive zcat bootable scribbled a new partition table on the front of my disk that's completely wrong.

How bad is it

So as a result of scribbling over the front of the disk I have

  1. probably trashed the special loader (called grub? maybe) that let me boot from Windows or Linux
  2. probably trashed the Windows boot code, I'm not sure if it's in the first partition or somewhere else (the MBR "Master Boot Record" ?)
  3. probably trashed a big chunk of my NTFS Windows partition
  4. somehow completely messed up my Linux setup. With firefishe's advice I had set up the second half of the disk with root, swap, and home, now it's nowhere to be seen :-(

parted has a rescue command that will try to locate and revive partitions, but I thought there's a backup somewhere on the disk with partition information. The "MBR" again?? But since the first partition table looks OK, the program trusts it.

Recovering partitions

So now I'm back to trying to find out more about disk repair.

Fortunately I made notes when I created the partition setup.

/dev/sda1  ntfs  Size 90025 MB (83.8 GB) hopefully untouched
/dev/sda2 ext3 Mount / Format? checked  Size 20003 MB Used 495 MB
/dev/sda3 ext4 Mount /home Format? checked  Size 8003 MB Used unknown
/dev/sda4 swap Mount [blank] Format? [blank] Size 1998 MB Used unknown


Rather than guess at partitions with parted's rescue, testdisk sounded promising. But it's not on the Kubuntu live CD.

I tried using aptitude to install it, but that didn't work on the LiveCD. So I downloaded it. There's a Ubuntu package available, navigate to the Jaunty version, get the URL of the amd64-bit version. I have no idea how you can install new software to a read-only CD-ROM, so I did this in the temporary directory

cd /tmp
wget http://ubuntu.cs.utah.edu/ubuntu/pool/universe/t/testdisk/testdisk_6.10-1_amd64.deb

then

sudo dpkg -i testdisk_6.10-1_amd64.deb

to install.

testdisk to the rescue!

Praise be, this has a pretty good intro, so I walked through that while running

sudo testdisk

and then turned on its expert mode and went slowly.

Like every other tool testdisk initially found only the bad small partition:

Disk /dev/sda - 120 GB / 111 GiB - CHS 14593 255 63
Current partition structure:
     Partition                  Start        End    Size in sectors
 
Warning: Incorrect number of heads/cylinder 63 (FAT) != 255 (HD)
Warning: Incorrect number of sectors per track 62 (FAT) != 63 (HD)
 1 * FAT32 LBA                0   0 35   246 237 22    3966909 [LIVE]

But then its quick analyze command found my various Linux partitions!

And then, I pressed Enter then chose [Deep analyze], which went back through my disk slowly. Glory be, this found evidence of the bigger partition!

Disk /dev/sda - 120 GB / 111 GiB - CHS 14593 255 63
     Partition               Start        End    Size in sectors
D FAT32                    0   0 35   246 254 63    3968021 [LIVE]
P HPFS - NTFS              0   1  1 10944 254 63  175831362 [Windows XP]
D Linux                 1902   0  1  4419 254 63   40451670
 * Linux                10945   0  1 13376 254 63   39070080
D Linux                12139   2  1 14571 254 63   39086019</span
 P Linux                13377   0  1 14349 254 63   15631245
 P Linux Swap           14350   0  1 14592 254 63    3903795

wahoo! There's my Windows XP partition! It also found two extra bogus partitions, but by matching the size ("sector" is 1/2 kB) and using the info testdisk prints as you choose each partition, I figured out the proper partitions whose Start follows the End of the previous, and used the left and right arrow keys to enable the good partitions as shown, and delete the bad ones.

Press Enter, confirm writing the new thing. I'm not sure about the geometry errors.

Then it immediately displayed information about my NTFS partition:

Boot sector
Status: Bad
 
Backup boot sector
Status: OK
 
Sectors are not identical.
 
A valid NTFS Boot sector must be present in order to access
any data; even if the partition is not bootable.

so I chose its [Backup BS] to copy the backup boot sector.

I tried [Repair MFT] to check the NTFS Master File Table, but that requires rebooting.

One last check of the format (using the Advanced menu, confusing), and I exited and prepared to reboot!

Testdisk glitches

Quit for previous menu is odd

[Quit] everywhere to return to previous menu is very confusing. It should support [Esc]ape key, and the command should be [Back]

Analyze forces a Quick search

Also, if you choose analyze, you have a [Quick search] option, so there's no way to return to the main menu. You have to start a quick search. If you stop that, it'll be half-way through finding the partitions, so it looks as if it's lost all the information I've carefully brought back.

It's crazy that the only way I can see the current MBR is by choosing "Advanced".

So the main menu should have a "Current status" that shows

  1. what's on the disk MBR and partition info
  2. indicator if what testdisk has in memory is different (because you haven't written it yet)
  3. if not, show what's in its idea of the MBR and partitions is
  4. any other info it has or hasn't written to disk.

Ctrl-C

I tried to copy some text to here with Shift+Ctrl+C, and accidentally pressed Ctrl+C and testdisk immediately exited. Please trap Ctrl+C and ask "Are you sure?"

give user-friendly MB/KB size

When people are looking for partitions, they probably know the size in kB or kibibytes, but not in sectors. So maybe in parentheses give a user-friendly size like 5,203 KB or 12,304 MB.

Add partition is confusing

This is weird. First, I thought this would add the partition that testdisk had found that I've highlighted with the cursor keys, since D(eleted) is the opposite of Add.

Then, when I really did want to add a partition, the information line has no explanation

  D No partition             0   0  1  1020 251 62   15952104

and I can't choose a particular partition type with the cursor, it highlights a row of three at a time!!

List under [Analyze] > [Boot] is confusing

I re-entered TestDisk to view some files on my corrupted partition. I remembered this feature was called [List], but I had trouble finding it. I finally found it under [Analyze] > [Boot] , but the help for [Boot] is "Boot sector recovery". There's no indication that the [Boot] screen also has a "[List] directories and files, copy data from NTFS" feature.

Back to booting

I told TestDisk that Linux was my boot partition, however booting from the hard drive was still a complete failure, it just hangs forever. I have my partitions, but I've lost any knowledge of booting. So I had to boot the Kubuntu LiveCD again.

Kubuntu had installed the grub boot menu that gives me a choice of whether to boot Windows or Kubuntu, so all I need to do is create another one of those.

As usual there are tons of guides to restoring grub, and they're all crap out-of-date stuff that mostly explain nothing. E.g. my hard drive is /dev/sda, but grub turns this into hd0. And unlike TestDisk there's no way to know what the heck you just did or verify what you put on the disk. It's a shot in the dark.

https://help.ubuntu.com/community/RecoveringUbuntuAfterInstallingWindows is probably the best instructions, so I followed that.

Linux boot back

Now my hard drive boots into Kubuntu, but seems to ignore windows.

grub woes

The grub command is very poorly explained. I want a program to tell me what the current boot menu in my MBR looks like without rebooting. Does grub do this? Who knows. It seems to show a typical boot menu, but maybe that's coming from my Linux drive. Who knows?

Windows partition corrupt

Kubuntu automatically mounted my NTFS partition as it did before using the NTFS-3G driver:

 /dev/sda1 on /media/WindowsCdrive type fuseblk (rw,nosuid,nodev,allow_other,blksize=4096)

but that was giving me tons of

ls: cannot access /media/WindowsCdrive/AUTOEXEC.BAT: No such file or directory
ls: cannot access /media/WindowsCdrive/boot.ini: No such file or directory

as well as a directory listing. Strange, since I was able to navigate in TestDisk to some of these files in "My Documents".

  • fsck doesn't work yet for ntfs-3g mounts.
  • Can I run Windows' chkdsk command under Wine?
  • I found my Windows XP CD-ROM and booted into its Recovery Console, but that doesn't acknowledge I have a hard drive at all. It's supposed to ask what Windows installation I want to work with, but doesn't.

I asked about my problems on the NTFS-3G forum.

Back up the partition

I bought a Toshiba 400GB External USB 2.0 Hard Drive Model: HDDR400E03X , so I can just dump the entire NTFS partition onto it, insert it into a Windows laptop, and run chkdsk on it.

But how to "dump"? I think the command is

 dd if=/dev/sda1 of=/dev/sdc2 conv=noerror,sync

but I'm unclear how to create the NTFS partition.

Repartition USB hard drive

My hard drive according to TestDisk is

CHS 14593 255 63
1 * HPFS - NTFS              0   1  1 10944 254 63  175831362 [Windows XP]

TestDisk thinks the Toshiba has the same heads/sectors, so each "cylinder" is the same. fdisk -l thinks the Toshiba is

   Device Boot      Start         End      Blocks   Id  System
/dev/sdc1               1       48641   390708801    c  W95 FAT32 (LBA)
  • Clonezilla can clone partitions, but it's yet another boot CD to burn and a layer of software above.
  • ntfsclone from NTFS tools can clone NTFS, but the doc doesn't make it clear whether it can clone to another partition.
  • parted has a cp command, but the features page indicates that this doesn't work to create or copy NTFS partitions.

So I guess I'll create an NTFS partition on windows. I used parted to resize the FAT32 partition smaller to make room:

(parted) unit cyl
(parted) resize 1 0 20000
(parted) print
Model: Toshiba External USB HDD (scsi)
Disk /dev/sdc: 48641cyl
Number  Start  End       Size      Type     File system  Flags
 1      0cyl   19999cyl  19999cyl  primary  fat32        lba

(parted seems to count from 0, not from 1.)

Now to create an NTFS partition like

1      32256B         90025689599B   90025657344B  primary  ntfs         boot

on Windows, I called it partition X:. 90025657344 bytes is 87915681 kiB. I guess I'll round up to 86GiB for safety. That was a stupid idea because it makes it hard to copy back.

Backing up

From Kubuntu,

dd if=/dev/sda1 of=/dev/sdc2 options blah blah

worked fine.

Then reinserted disk in Windows. Explorer convinced the drive is broken; but from the command line I was able to run

chkdsk /f X:

lots of errors but it all looked pretty good.

Reinserted in Kubuntu, realized it was too big to copy back plus I want to make yet another backup for safety.

Permissions messed up

Reinserted in Windows to reduce file size. But first, a weird problem. Computer Management > Disk Management shows X: drive "86.00GB, Healthy (Active, Primary Partition)", 20GB free.

But Windows Explorer thinks X:\ is not accessible, access denied. Finally figured out that the ACL for it only allows administrator access!!

Compared with C security

Authenticated Users
Special permissions Allow grayed out
SYSTEM
Full Control, Modify, Read & Execute, List folder contents, Read, Write all Allow
Administrators (Machine Name\Administrators)
same as SYSTEM
Users
Read & execute, List folder contents, Read

C: Advanced security

Administrators (Machine Name\Administrators)
Full Control apply to this folder, subfolders, and fileto
SYSTEM
same as Administrators
Users (Machine Name\Users)
Read & execute apply to this folder, subfolders, and files
Authenticated Users
Special apply to Subfolders and files only
Authenticated Users
Create folders/append data, apply to This folder only.


Compared with new NTFS partition' security

Authenticated Users
Modify, Read & execute, List folder contents, Read, Write
SYSTEM
Full Control, Modify, Read & Execute, List folder contents, Read, Write
Administrators (Machine Name\Administrators)
same as SYSTEM

new empty NTFS partition's Advanced security:

Administrators (Machine Name\Administrators)
Full Control
SYSTEM
Full Control
Authenticated Users
Modify
Users (Machine Name\Users)
Read & execute

all applying to this folder and subfolders.


Started applying permissions to X: but got errors as it trundled through sub-folders setting permissions for SYSTEM:

cygwin\bin\get , \cygwin\etc\passwd , \cygwin\etc\profile.mytemp, \cygwin\etc\sshd_config, \cygwin\etc\ssh_host_dsa_key, more ssh, \cygwin\home;
\cygwin\lib\perl5\5.8\CPAN\Config.pm{,~}, \cygwin\lib\perl5\5.8\{Auto, Bundle, \cygwin\auto, \cygwin\file, \cygwin\HTML}, site_perl\Date blah blah more 5.8 perl stuff
\cygwin\usr\local\bin\mergebox.pl, \cygwin\usr\local\src

Reset it to make Advanced security match "empty NTFS partition" (i.e. not quite the same settings for Authenticated Users as on the laptop C: drive. Same errors.

This is probably why I can't access the drive from Recovery Console.

Make another backup partition...

Just to be safe I backed up again. I want to make an exact copy of /dev/sda1, but parted is hella confusing because

  • the first partition doesn't actually start at the very start, it starts many bytes in to skip the boot record stuff
  • parted indiscriminately rounds without telling you, e.g. "Each cylinder is 8225kB", actually each cylinder is 8225280 bytes.
  • parted's math still doesn't work out. 10944 cylinders with geometry of 255 heads on 63 512 byte sectors is 90,017,464,320 bytes, but parted says my original partition is 90,025,657,344 bytes, quite a bit bigger. Arghhhh.
Number  Start     End       Size      Type     File system  Flags
1      0cyl      10944cyl  10944cyl  primary  ntfs         boot 
Number  Start          End            Size          Type     File system  Flags
1      32256B         90025689599B   90025657344B  primary  ntfs         boot 

I guess I'll work in bytes. Remove the existing end of Toshiba

(parted) rm 3

create new partition starting at the same place but with an end that's exactly the right size in bytes.

(parted) mkpart primary ntfs 256847642624B 346873299967B

check

Number  Start          End            Size           Type     File system  Flags
1      32256B         164505599999B  164505567744B  primary  fat32        lba
2      164505845760B  256847642623B  92341796864B   primary  ntfs         boot
3      256847642624B  346873299967B  90025657344B   primary  ntfs

partition 3 is exactly the right size.

Now make the remaining space another partition:

(parted) mkpartfs primary fat32 346873299968B 400085844479B
Number  Start          End            Size           Type     File system  Flags
1      32256B         164505599999B  164505567744B  primary  fat32        lba
2      164505845760B  256847642623B  92341796864B   primary  ntfs         boot
3      256847642624B  346873299967B  90025657344B   primary  ntfs
4      346873299968B  400085844479B  53212544512B   primary  fat32        lba

Now we can repeat the dd. parted has its own

 cp [FROM-DEVICE] FROM-NUMBER TO-NUMBER   copy file system to another partition

command, but stick to dd. From a guide, try bigger block size and force all blocks to be read and written:

sudo dd if=/dev/sda1 of=/dev/sdc3 bs=64M conv=sync,noerror

Goals

This aim of this page is to provide information for users, distros, packagers and developers for what is needed to be done for a better experience for people using Firefox in the KDE. Of course KDE has is one well known and good featured Browser Konqueror. But still many users prefer Firefox or use both browsers for different reasons. Some, who have just switched from Windows prefer a familiar browser. Others miss features which Firefox or some of his add-ons have.

However using Firefox in a KDE environment causes is not an overall pleasant experience, because it is not well integrated. There have been efforts and from time to time there are announcements of a qt-port of Firefox, but there does not seem to be a road map or any other signs that this will happen soon.

So this page will provide information for anyone who is interested about what is already possible and can be done by users themselves, packagers or by distros who want to provide a better KDE experience. The aim of this page is also to attract potential developers by collecting all the information what is needed to be done and what is already has been done in order to make their job easier. May be this page can also help to raise funds or to find sponsors by just raising awareness or by active search if someone is up to this effort.

This page was created by a user, so do not expect me to do the magic. There is a need for a coordinated effort and some help.

Join in and help

So here are some ideas who YOU can be part of the magic: - Follow related bug reports, forum entries or blogs and provide useful information there and here. - Create a new bug/ wish-reports on Firefox, KDE or at your favourite distro if necessary, link them here and back. - Check out if person who is assigned to the report is really the right person - Get in contact with the people responsible for KDE Firefox integration in distros - Ask for further details, so that a profile of what is needed to be done can be provide on the bug reports and here. - Create a better layout and a style sheet for this page so that the following information can be collected in a useful way - Subscribe related bug or wish reports to the mailinglist (see below) or point me (my email)

Issues with the KDE Firefox integration If you have issues or additional information to already described issues please add them to the list or correct the existing information. Please follow the scheme below for naming your issues. Please relate to a KDE4-implementation and Firefox3, because it is unlikely that these issues will be solved there. You can however point to solutions which were made for KDE3 or older versions which may help others to do something similar on the current version.

So here are some ideas who YOU can be part of the magic: - Follow related bug reports, forum entries or blogs and provide useful information there and here. - Create a new bug/ wish-reports on Firefox, KDE or at your favourite distro if necessary, link them here and back. - Check out if person who is assigned to the report is really the right person - Get in contact with the people responsible for KDE Firefox integration in distros - Ask for further details, so that a profile of what is needed to be done can be provide on the bug reports and here. - Create a better layout and a style sheet for this page so that the following information can be collected in a useful way - Subscribe related bug or wish reports to the mailinglist (see below) or point me (my email)

General Resources

Mozilla Wiki on plattform integration, also providing information on some KDE related issues.

Freedesktop, may be useful to find out about issues, which are relevant for Gnome and other desktop environments.

Two mailing lists were created: One for collecting all the information spread over different bug-/wish-reports at different places. Please point me to related reports, I will subscribe them. You can subscribe to the list to keep your self up-to-date here[LINK]. The other list [LINK] was made for users and developers to coordinate and discuss the related issues of KDE Firefox integration centrally.

Template for issue description

  • Short problem description
  • Detailed problem description
  • Solution already available (yes/no/if so more info, which distros have integrated in which version)?
  • Workaround for users available (->Links to resources)
  • What is needed to be done (on KDE side/ Firefox side/ possible Firefox plugin, Freedesktop spec?)
  • Links to bug reports concerning the Problem in KDE, Firefox, distros
  • If existing, link to information about related Gnome problem.
  • Who is working on the problem?

Kwallet-Integration missing

  • Firefox should use Kwallet as its password-manager
  • Gnome and KDE are working on Freedesktop-specification for password-managers
  • wish


Bookmarks

Download-Manager

  • Firefox should use KDEs download-manager
  • Until that works Firefox should open Dolphin in its download-manager (when opening the folder where the file was saved).
  • Workaround at the moment: Install http://flashgot.net/ extensions which redirects downloads to KGet

Feeds

  • Firefox should allow to save feeds in Akregator

Proxy settings

File dialogue

  • Firefox should use KDEs native file dialogues

Notifications

  • Firefox should use KDEs notification system

-> Initial Extension available -> https://addons.mozilla.org/de/firefox/addon/12196

Fileassociations for Add-ons

  • Add-ons in Dolphin should be associated with Firefox, Thunderbird and other mozillabased programms which use them.

Cookies

Firefox should save the cookies in the same file and use the same settings on (dis)allowing them for a certain page

Look and Feel


http://www.miradlo.net/bloggt/software/firefox-307-abonniert-keine-feeds-in-den-akregator http://forum.kde.org/how-to-integrate-firefox-into-kde-t-17786.html http://forum.kde.org/firefox-integration-t-40569.html http://forum.kde.org/whats-your-favourite-kde-distro-t-13339-2.html#pid58685

Okular should embedding in Firefox

Location: Saratov, Russian Federation

Feedback:



I belong to the KDE french l10n team since ... 2006 (I guess so).

KDE-fr website: http://fr.kde.org/ KDE-fr l10n website: http://fr.i18n.kde.org/

Happy KDE4 ;)

Cheers!

警告

要聯繫我,請在我的討論頁留言,這樣我能收到系統發的郵件哦,啊親


Warning

if u want to contact with me, leave a message on talk page

心之所在

我本一心向明月,奈何明月照沟渠

为什么中文要分简体/繁体,烦躁,万恶的汉字简化~

http://ikde.org

http://www.twitter.com/qiibeta

qiibeta#gmail.com

簡體中文頁面翻譯完後我會處理修正成繁體中文的。「-」

Special:PageTranslation

Translation_Workflow

英文字体排印

简体中文翻译进度

繁体中文翻译进度

查看userbase中文页面访问统计,搜索zh

Ubuntu 简体中文小组工作指南

old style


useless pages

Welcome_to_KDE_UserBase/zh (abandoned)

Unfortunately I can't delete pages created under the new translation system
Thanks to Nikerabbit's work at the WebWorld sprint, that is now deleted


Konqueror (zh TW)

discussion


I have been in touch with the Kopete devs. They plan to completely update their website 'soon'. I propose that we do nothing more about Kopete until that happens, then we can start a complete re-write. The current info was taken from wiki.kde.org, and was out of date even when I imported it. I'll keep an eye out for the kopete site update and alert you when I start to make changes worth translating. No point in making work for you :-) --annew 10:35, 23 October 2009 (UTC)

     ok.--Qiii2006 06:07, 24 October 2009 (UTC)

We are exploring ways of making life easier for translators, based on a sandbox wiki for now. I'd like to invite you to join us in testing and evaluation. If you will mail me at [email protected] I'll tell you all about it. --annew 14:14, 8 November 2009 (UTC)


Please read and add your comments to http://userbase.kde.org/Talk:Category_Translation. Thanks --annew 19:19, 2 January 2010 (UTC)


http://userbase.kde.org/Akonadi http://userbase.kde.org/PageLayout http://userbase.kde.org/Toolbox_(zh_CN)


Sorry, but I've lost your email address again. If you could drop me a line (address above) I'll send on to you the message I'm sending to Claus and Yurchor.--annew 19:21, 18 January 2010 (UTC)


Category Translation 简体中文 to 正體中文

Sorry to have caused a problem. It seems that mediawiki doesn't like you to use '-' as a placeholder in a table. Replacing them with spaces has cured it.--annew 17:26, 25 January 2010 (UTC)

Forgot to mention, too - on the translation discussion page Claus suggested that we maintain the language code on the links, to avoid confusion. Unless it causes a problem, could you do that, please? --annew 18:24, 25 January 2010 (UTC)

Ok, I have added zh_CN and zh_TW.--Qiii2006 04:28, 26 January 2010 (UTC)



Hello, 我刚刚加入了译者组,请多多指教。我有不少的翻译英文的经验,但是翻译KDE的docs还是新手,你是我们的team leader,关于我从哪里开始翻译,请问你有什么好的建议吗?谢谢:)

lins, 7-21-2011

Po uruchomieniu Dolphina przez menu z literką K (od tej pory będę nazywał je K-menu), zobaczymy katalog startowy. Domyślnie jest to katalog domowy użytkownika. Jest to miejsce w systemie, gdzie zazwyczaj znajdują się wszystkie pliki użytkownika. Można zapisywać pliki gdziekolwiek, ale wszystkie aplikację są skonfigurowane tak, by proponować ten katalog, lub jego podkatalogi, jako miejsce do zapisania danych. Stosowanie się do tej konwencji ułatwia potem znajdowanie rzeczy na dysku.

Żeby otworzyć plik, lub wejść do podkatalogu, wystarczy raz kliknąć na nim. Nie trzeba klikać 2 razy, jak w Windowsie (chociaż, jeśli ktoś uważa, że wygodniej będzie mu klikać 2 razy, da się to zmienić w ustawieniach).

Zaznaczanie plików - w KDE, jeśli klikniemy na coś, to się wykonuje. Dlatego pojawi się problem - co zrobić, kiedy nie chcemy otwierać pliku, tylko go zaznaczyć ? Odpowiedź jest prosta - nad każdą ikonką, gdy najedziemy na nią kursorem myszy, pojawi się mały zielony znaczek "+".

Jeśli klikniemy na niego, zamiast na ikonę pliku, plik zostanie dodany do zaznaczenia. Można dzięki temu szybko zaznaczyć wiele plików, oczywiście zaznaczanie przez branie w ramkę również działa.

Zaznaczenie wielu plików na raz wygląda tak:

Na tym rysunku widać również, jak można odznaczać pliki - kiedy plik jest zaznaczony, i kursor myszy znajduje się nad nim, zamiast znaczka z zielonym plusem pojawia się znaczek z "-". Kiedy na niego klikniemy, plik zostaje odznaczony.


Dostosowywanie Dolphina.

  • Grupowanie plików:

Czasami, mamy w jakimś katalogu wiele plików, ale w danej chwili interesują nas tylko obrazki, albo pliki z muzyką. Albo po prostu lubimy mieć porządek w katalogu. Jest prosty sposób, by to osiągnąć, bez tworzeninowych podktalogów.

W menu View, jest opcja "Show in groups". Po włączeniu jej nasz katalog wygląda tak:

  • Dzielenie widoku:

Można również podzielić okno Doplhina na 2 części.

W KDE 4 Dolphin startuje, kiedy klikniemy na dowolnym folderze, może być także uruchomiony z menu K.


D3lphin jest forkiem Dolphin dla KDE 3. Ma mniejsze możliwości niż w KDE 4. Jest także mniej znany, bo w KDE3 domyślnym menadżerem plików był Konqueror. Ten fork nie jest wspierany przez KDE ani przez autora.

Work completed. Please let me know if you find any problems --annew 09:01, 8 August 2009 (UTC)
thanks for your work--Qiii2006 11:10, 8 August 2009 (UTC)

Over the last few days I've done a lot of work on categorising pages because I wanted to add an extension that uses them. I have now discovered that the extension is unsuitable for userbase, so that work is useless. Please don't waste your valuable time in adding the category marks to your translations.--annew 13:08, 26 November 2009 (UTC)

I see--Qiii2006 11:20, 27 November 2009 (UTC)

mfitzp has done some work on a couple of userbase issues, and other wikis could benefit from that. One is a fix for the mediawiki search bug, and the other deals with the problem that trailing slashes cause. Details are at http://userbase.kde.org/Userbase_Technical_Issues#Tasks_for_userbase-admin_group

Please let me know if this gets propagated to the other wikis :-) --annew 14:29, 22 August 2009 (UTC)

I have reverted the changes.

Creating a screencast is easy - all you need is a steady hand and a lot of patience. If you want to help out with Plasma screencasts, here are some guidelines:

  • Use a resolution of 640×480 to produce GIF files with the same dimensions as the original screencasts.
  • Make your desktop look like the ones in the other screencasts. This includes panel height, widgets, desktop style, icons in the system tray and wallpaper.

Hint: Most are default settings. In later screencasts I've increased the panel height slightly to make the system tray look nicer (shows both top and bottom borders).

  • No unnecessary mouse movements. In the beginning and at the end the mouse pointer should be completely still for about 1 second.
  • Smooth mouse movements, not too fast. When clicking it's sometimes nice to hold down the button a little bit longer than usual before releasing.
  • Use left click when possible.
  • Redo until you're 99.9 % satisfied.
  • Follow the name convention: Plasma_howto-[section]-[item].png. See the name of the other screencasts.

For information about how to record the screencasts and some tips, see Record screencasts to animated GIF files.

Suggestions for new HowTos

  • ...


Animations that should be redone

Don't forget to state why it needs to be redone!

  • ...

Comments

How to use this template

If the techbase page has the same name as the userbase page, simply put {{TechbaseLink}} in the source of the page.


ich möchte -von Zeit zu Zeit- hier meine Erfahrungen mit KDE-Anwendungen vorstellen, um ein wenig zu der fantastischen Arbeit der Entwickler beizutragen. Bin immer noch Neuling, aber schon seit 1999? mit Linux-Derivaten (hobbymäßig) beschäftigt; u.a. SuSE (ab 6.4), Knoppix (ab 3.4), Freespire... und bin endlich bei (K)ubuntu gelandet. Ich --(benutze)-- benutzte

Kubuntu Hardy Heron

8.04-3, erschließe immer mehr Anwendungen, die fast nicht mehr ;-) abstürzen.

Vorstellen möchte ich Euch zuerst Basket, auch als Erweiterung von Kontact integrierbar, das die KNotes eigentlich überflüssig macht (obwohl ich sie gerne benutzte; das Bessere ist halt der Feind des Guten ;-) ).

Hier ein Bildschirmabzug davon:

-->

(2009-er Stand; lang, lang ist's her; ich bin Kubuntu aber immer noch treu geblieben)

Die Versionsgeschichte, die ich mitmachte:

*  Kubuntu Lucid Lynx (10.04)
*  Kubuntu Precise Pangolin (12.04)

Kubuntu Trusty Tahr (14.04)

* Momentan (7/'14) steige ich gerade von Precise auf Trusty um, wobei ich mir die frühere 
   /home-Partition nur durch Verknüpfungen in die neue Installation hereingeholt habe;
    alle Programme aber neu installiere
 * Liste meiner 'Standard-Programme', die ich in jeder Distro nachinstalliert habe
 * BasKet
 * DigiKam
 * LibreCAD
 * LibreOffice (mittlerweile dabei)
 * AmaroK  (mittlerweile dabei)
 * Apache2-Web-Server (LAMP-Installation)
 * MoinMoin-Wiki, in Apache laufend mit mod-wsgi-Interface (schneller)
 * Krita
 * TLP   Stromsparen, Ladeschwellen der Akkus für längere Lebensdauer setzen (ppa:linrunner)
 * FileLight
 * VLC
 * FreeFileSync (ppa: http://ppa.launchpad.net/freefilesync/ffs/ubuntu/ trusty main)
 * JOSM (ppa: https://josm.openstreetmap.de/apt/ trusty main)
 * Oracle-Java8 (ppa: http://ppa.launchpad.net/webupd8team/java/ubuntu/ trusty main)
Alles in Allem bin ich immer wieder überrrascht, wie gut Quelloffene Software mittlerweile sein kann!
Also, viel Spaß mit KDE und Kubuntu!


Plasma er en af de centrale teknologier i KDE SC 4 (også kendt som "KDE's grundsten"), og en af de mest synlige for brugere. Da Plasma behandler brugere anderledes end traditionelle skriveborde, så kan der være forvirring om, hvad Plasma er, hvad den gør og hvordan man udfører almindelige opgaver.

Dette dokument forsøger at svare på de mest almindelige spørgsmål.

Information

Oplysningerne her dækker Plasma i KDE 4.3. For ældre versioner se siden for KDE 4.2, siden for KDE 4.1 eller siden for KDE 4.0


Overordnede spørgsmål

Hvad gør Plasma?

Plasma er skrivebordsgrænsefladen til KDE SC 4 med programstarteren (startmenuen), skrivebordet og skrivebordspanelet (ofte kaldet task bar'en). Plasma er dog mere end denne samling af velkendte komponenter; den er en almen ramme til at opbygge integrerede grænseflader i. Den er fleksibel nok til lave grænseflader til mobile enheder, mediecentre og stationære computere og til at understøtte den traditionelle skrivebordsmetafor såvel som design, der endnu ikke er blevet udtænkt.

Hvad er der galt med den nuværende skrivebords teknologi?

Traditionelle skriveborde er statiske. De er typisk bundet til en mappe i hvilken man finder ikoner (programstartere) og dokumenter og mapper lavet af brugeren. Ud over at vise fotos eller billeder som baggrund gør det traditionelle skrivebord ikke meget for brugeren. Plasma har en anderledes tilgang; den kommer brugeren i møde ved at skabe dynamiske rammer, som kan tilpasses den enkelte.

Det tror jeg ikke er nogen god ide

Plasma lader dig arbejde som du altid har gjort. Du kan have en task bar, et baggrundsbillede, genveje osv. Du kan også bruge Plasmas redskaber til at forme skrivebordet efter dine egne ønsker og behov, hvis du vil.

Hvordan fungerer Plasma?

Plasma er opbygget af widgets kaldet Plasmoider. Plasmoider kan have mange funktioner; de kan vise dit skrivebord med tilhørende wallpaper, overvåge din bærbares batteriniveau, fremvise tilsluttede enheder og håndtere task bar'en. I bund og grund er plasmoider små programmer, som lever på skrivebordet. De kan samles i "beholdere" kaldet containments. Standardskrivebordet består af to komponenter, Panelet og selve skrivebordet. De er begge Plasma containments.

Det lyder ikke så nyt... andre styresystemer har gjort det samme.

Den vigtige forskel er, at plasmoider kan samarbejde. Vil du have en tydeligere oversigt over batteritilstanden for din bærbare? Du trækker bare ikonen fra task bar'en ud på skrivebordet. Appletter kan forstørres, formindskes og drejes som du ønsker det takket være den Skalerbare Vektor Grafik (SVG). Skrivebordets komponenter kan samarbejde med dig, men også med hinanden på nye og interessante måder. Du kan nu kontrollere, hvordan din arbejdsflade opfører sig og hvad den fremviser på en visuelt behagelig og brugervenlig måde. Da Plasme er summen af sine plasmoider, så er ethvert element - selv skrivebordet - et widget. Derfor er skrivebordet ikke længere låst fast bag alt andet, men bliver endnu et element, som du kan arbejde med.

Kicker og Kdesktop fungerede fint i KDE 3. Hvorfor skulle de ændres?

Især med hensyn til Kicker er der problemer med vedligeholdelse. Den har eksisteret siden KDE 2, og det var svært at føje nye ting til uden at ødelægge noget andet. For overhovedet at kunne udvikle KDE's akrivebord var det nødvendigt at starte helt forfra.

Jeg kan ikke finde min elskede <indsæt komponent her>!

Glem ikke, at Plasma-skrivebordet stadig er under udvikling og at KDE 3 var et utroligt veludviklet produkt. Det tog syv år at komme så langt; Plasma er meget yngre. Med tiden vil Plasmas udviklere genindføre de manglende komponenter. I takt med at KDE SC 4 udvikles vil Plasma blive forbedret.

Hvorfor ændrede I den måde skrivebordet virker på?

Ideen med en Skrivebords mappe er grundlæggende forfejlet. Den antage, at alt hvad du har brug for befinder sig i en fysisk mappe på din harddisk. Det kan være bekvemt, men det sætter samtidig stærke begrænsninger for, hvad du kan gøre. For eksempel kan du ikke have forskellige layout's for forskellige skriveborde, da alt findes i den samme mappe. Desuden bliver et skrivebord med denne struktur ofte til en losseplads for filer og mapper uden nogen anden funktion.

Jeg har hørt, at der ikke længere er ikoner på skrivebordet

Det er ikke helt korrekt. Du kan trække ikoner og startere (genveje) fra Dolphin eller K-menuen ud på skrivebordet. Det nye er, at skrivebordet ikke længere vil vise indholdet af mappen Skrivebord. Nu kan du femvise et vilkårligt antal mapper (lokale eller fra netværket) på skrivebordet istedet for kun at vise mappen Skrivebord. Til dette bruges Folder View appletter.

Hvis du vil kan du også let efterligne den traditionelle "ikon på skrivebord" tænkemåde.

Hvad er Folder View appletten?

Folder View appletten bruges, som navnet siger, til at vise mapper og filer i en overmappe. Sådan en overmappe kan enten være en lokal mappe på din egen computer, eller det kan være en netværksmappe, som tilgås gennem FTP, SSH eller SMB. I fremtiden vil et Folder View også kunne vise resultater fra en Nepomuk søgning eller taggede objekter.

Du kan vælge at se alle filer, eller du kan filtrere indholdet med et regulært mønster (fx alle filer med en given endelse) eller efter filtype (fx kun billeder).

Folder View appletter kan også bruges til basal filhåndtering (fx flytning, kopiering, klipning og indsætning), og du kan have så mange som du vil på skrivebordet.

Endelig kan du bruge et Folder View som hele skrivebordet, og på den måde i praksis genindføre den gammeldags tænkemåde.


Hvad er det for noget med Kickoff (den nye K Menu)?

Under udviklingen af KDE 4.0 blev forskellige tilgange til en K menu afprøvet. Nogle projekter var ambitiøse, men kunne umuligt gøres færdige i tide. På den tid blev SUSE Linux's startmenu (Kickoff) overført til KDE's nye skrivebords-arkitektur. Da den var længst fremme, klar til brug og testet for brugbarhed, så blev den valgt som standard startmenu. Hvis du ikke bryder dig om den, så er den traditionelle K Menu stadig tilgængelig - højre-klik på K Menuen og vælg "Skift til klassisk menustil". Der er også andre menuer på vej, og nogle af dem som Lancelot er klar til daglig brug.

Hvad er KRunner?

KRunner er en alsidig kommandolinje, som du kan aktivere ved at taste "Alt-F2" eller ved at vælge "Kør kommando..." fra popup-menuen på skrivebordet. Den kan lede efter programmer, bogmærker og endda sessioner, vise systemaktivitet og udføre almindelige aritmetiske beregninger.

KRunner's funktionalitet kan udvides ved hjælp af plugins ("runners").

Hvad er "cashew'erne"?

Det der ofte omtales som "cashew"'er er de Plasma logoer, som du finder i det øverste, højre hjørne af standard skrivebordet og i den højre side af panelet. Ved at klikke på dem får du adgang til forskellige indstillinger, så som konfigurationen af panelet og Zooming User Interface (ZUI). Nogle af disse cashewer vises kun, hvis widget'ene ikke er låset (se nedenfor).

Vær venlig at gøre det muligt at fjerne cashew'en i det øverste højre hjørne

Det kan lyde ganske fornuftigt at gøre det muligt at slå cashew'en fra, men det er unødigt kompliceret teknisk set, og det strider mod designet. Da skrivebordet (et containment) selv håndteres af et plugin, så er det blevet foreslået, at man kunne konstruere et nyt plugin, som laver et skrivebord uden cashew. Det har nogle distributionerer faktisk allerede gjort.

Hvad er Zooming User Interface (ZUI)?

Zooming User Interface, or ZUI, er endnu en Plasma-komponent. Det lader brugere samle forskellige plasmoider i grupper og hurtigt skifte mellem dem ved en "zoom ind og ud" metode. Bemærk, at denne komponent stadig er under kraftig udvikling, og selv om betydelige fremskridt er blevet gjort, vil den først være fuldt funktionsdygtig i en senere version af KDE SC 4.

Hvordan virker ZUI?

Forestil dig, at du har tre grupper af plasmoider (så som widgets, programstartere osv.), som du har arrangeret i særlige kombinationer afhængigt af, hvordan du vil arbejde med dem. Når du har lavet grupperne, kan du skifte mellem dem ved at zoome ud for at se alle grupperne og derefter zoome ind på den gruppe, som du nu vil arbejde med. Bemærk, at det er anderledes end at skifte mellem de traditionelle X11 virtuelle skriveborde; ZUI er meget mere fleksibel, da grupperne kan være helt forskellige fra hinanden.

Et godt eksempel på denne opførsel er vist på dette billede lavet af Half-Left fra #kde på freenode.

Man kan kombinere virtuelle skriveborde med ZUI, med det er endnu på eksperimentel basis.

Hvorfor kan jeg ikke bruge ZUI fra Instrumentbræt visningen?

Vi arbejder på sagen, med den er under konstruktion, og vi kan ikke sige hvornår eller om den bliver færdig.

Hvis man har flere skærme, så virker ZUI på dem alle men Instrumentbræt kun på en. Hvorfor det?

Arbejdsgangen er forskellig. Når man zoomer ud, så ønsker man et overblik; derfor zoomes aktiviteter på alle skærme ud. Når man bruger Instrumentbræt, vil man i reglen have adgang til en specifik funktionalitet og vil ikke forstyrres i sit arbejde med andre aktiviteter.

Konfiguration

Kan jeg placere ikoner på skrivebordet?

Selvfølgelig kan du det. Bare træk en ikon fra Dolphin eller Konqueror til skrivebordet. Bemærk, at du ikke opretter en fil her men blot en henvisning.

Brug en Folder View applet til at vise indholdet af din mappe Skrivebord.

Du kan også højre-klikke på et tomt område af skrivebordet, vælge "Desktop-opsætning" og i dialogen sætte "Desktop aktivitet" til "Folder View" og klik OK. Nu er hele skrivebordet en Folder View applet, som viser indholdet af mappen Skrivebord som standard, ligesom i gamle dage.

Tip Hvis dine widgets er låst, så skal du først låse dem op ved hjælp af højrekliks-menuen

Jeg bruger to skærme og er vant til at have Kicker over begge skærme. Kan jeg gøre det samme med Plasma?

Nej. Grunden er, at det er ret kompliceret at have et panel over to skærme, især når de har forskellig opløsning, På grund af det kunne vi ikke være sikre på at det ville virke i alle tilfælde, så det blev ikke implementeret.

Kan jeg placere panelet på kun en skærm?

Alle Plasma-paneler bor på én skærm. Hvis du ønsker paneler på flere skærme, så kan du tilføje dem og trække dem til din foretrukne placering ved at bruge panelkontrollen, som fremkommer når du klikker på panelets Plasma-ikonen i ulåst tilstand.

Hvordan kan jeg tilføje appletter til panelet?

Metode 1: Åbn "Tilføj Widgets" dialogen i Plasma cashew'en (skærmens øverste, højre hjørne), vælg en widget og træk den til panelet (du skal ikke dobbelt-klikke eller bruge "Tilføj Widgets" knappen i dialogen).

Metode 2: Træk en applet fra skrivebordet til panelet.

Metode 3: Klik på panelets cashew og vælg "Tilføj widgets". Når du har valgt en applet, vil den automatisk blive føjet til panelet.

Kan jeg flytte appletterne i panelet?

Ja, åbn panelindstillingerne (ved at klikke på panelets cashew eller højre-klikke på panelet og vælge Panleindstillinger) og hold markøren over en applet; markøren bliver nu til fire pile. Nu kan du arrangere appletterne som du vil.

Lydia Pintscher's blog har en video som viser, hvordan man flytter appletter. En anden video er på Aikurn's blog. Aikurn har også lavet en annoteret video.

Hvordan kan jeg ændre højden og størrelsen af panelet?

Klik på panelets cashew for at få adgang til at konfigurere panelet. Ved at klikke på "Skærmkant" kan du flytte panelet til enhver af skærmens kanter. Klik på "Højde" og træk for ændre panelets højde.

Pilene i højre ende af panelet definerer dets størrelse: der er to pile, som definere den maksimale og den minimale størrelse. Hvis de er forskellige, så vil panelet tilpasse sin størrelse imellem de to afhængigt af dets indhold.

Under "Mere opsætning" er der flere valgmuligheder for panelets position og opførsel.

Kan jeg automatisk skjule panelet?

Klik på panelets cashew, vælg Mere opsætning > Skjul automatisk.

Hvordan kan jeg fjerne et panel?

Klik på panelets cashew og vælg Flere indstillinger > Fjern panel, eller højre-klik på panelet og vælg Panel-indstillinger > Fjern panel.

Generel hjælp med Panel Konfiguration

Denne forumside giver en illustreret guide til konfiguration af panelet.

Er det sandt, at man kan bruge OS X's widgets i Plasma?

Ja, Plasma kan bruge OS X's widgets. Der arbejdes også på at implementere javascript-baserede appletter.

Hvordan kan jeg flytte, dreje eller ændre størrelse af appletter på skrivebordet?

Hold markøren over appletten indtil "applethåndtaget" viser sig. Nu kan du ændre størrelse på appletten og flytte og dreje den:

  • For at flytte en applet: Klik på håndtaget og træk det rundt.
  • For at dreje en applet: Træk i den buede pil
  • For at ændre størrelse på en applet: Træk størrelsesknappen (over den buede pil). Du kan bevare applettens proportioner ved at holde Ctrl tasten nede samtidigt.

Mine widgets bliver skjult under vinduerne, Hvordan kan jeg vise dem?

Du kan bringe alle widget'erne frem ved at taste Ctrl-F12, hvilket flytter Plasmas Instrumentbræt foran. Når du er færdig kan du enten taste Esc eller vælge "Skjul Instrumentbræt" fra cashew'en.

Hvordan kan jeg fastlåse widget'enes position

Metode 1: Højre-klik i et tomt område af skrivebordet og vælg "Lås widgets" fra kontekstmenuen. Fortryder du, så højre-klik igen og vælg "Lås widgets op". Du har de samme valgmuligheder, hvis du højre-klikker på panelet.

Metode 2: Vælg "Lås Widgets" i Plasma cashew'en i øverste, højre hjørne eller i panelindstillingerne.

Hvordan kan jeg fjerne widgets?

Et widget i panelet fjernes ved at højre-klikke det og vælge "Fjern..." (widget'ets navn vil stå der). Et widget på skrivebordet kan fjernes på flere måder:

  • Hold markøren over det indtil widgethåndtaget kommer frem og klik så på X.
  • I Tilføj Widgets dialogen kan du klikke på minus ikonet ved siden af widget'ets navn for at fjerne det.

Hvordan skifter jeg mellem Kickoff og den gammeldags menu?

Højre-klik på menuikonen og vælg "Skift til klassisk menustil" (hvis du bruger Kickoff) eller "Skift til Kickoff-menustil" (hvis du bruger den klassiske menu). Du kan også tilføje en menu af en given type ved hjælp af Tilføj Widgets dialogen.

Aikurn har en video, som viser hvordan man skifter mellem forskellige menustile.

Hvordan kan jeg tilføje/fjerne en aktivitet?

Tilføj en aktivitet: Zoom ud fra din aktuelle skrivebordsvisning ved at klikke på skrivebords-cashew'en (i det øverste, højre hjørne) og vælge "Zoom ud". Du vil se en værktøjslinje under det aktuelle skrivebord. Klik på "Tilføj Aktivitet" for at lave en ny skrivebordsvisning.

Fjern en aktivitet: Zoom out fra din aktuelle skrivebordsvisning og vælg det røde kryds fra værktøjslinjen, som fremkommer under skrivebordet.

Note: Du kan ikke have låste widgets i en aktivitet, som du vil fjerne. Vælg Lås Widgets op (Ctrl-L) før du fjerner en aktivitet.

KDE Forums bruger Fengshaun har lavet et screencast, som demonstrerer brug af ZUI.

Hvordan kan jeg hurtigt flytte mellem Aktiviteter

ZUI metodern er ret langsom; det er bedre at bruge en "Activity Bar". En kort gennemgang her forklarer, hvad du skal gøre.

Har Plasma nogle tastaturgenveje?

Der er et antal tastaturgenveje til rådighed:

  • Lås widgets: Ctrl-L
  • Zoom ud: Ctrl- -
  • Zoom ind: Ctrl- = or Ctrl-+
  • Næste applet: Ctrl-N
  • Forrige applet: Ctrl-P
  • Tilføj aktivitet: Shift-Ctrl-A
  • Næste aktivitet: Shift-Ctrl-N
  • Forrige aktivitet: Shift-Ctrl-P
  • Applet indstillinger: Ctrl-S
  • Fjern applet: Ctrl-R

Desværre er det endnu ikke muligt at ændre genvejene.

Hvordan kan jeg knytte en tastaturgenvej til en applet?

Vælg applettens indstillinger (svensknøgle ikonet i applettens håndtag) og klik på "Tastaturgenvej". Du vil nu kunne definere en tastaturgenvej til appletten. Bemærk, at nogle appletter ikke har denne mulighed (normalt dem, som ikke har indstillinger).

Kan Instrumentbrættet vise andre widgets end dem på mit skrivebord?

Ja, det kan det. For at indstille dette skal du klikke på skrivebords-cahhew'en og zoome ud. Vælg nu Indstil Plasme i den værktøjskasse, som fremkommer og sæt et hak ved Brug et separat instrumentbræt. Klik på OK, så vil dit instrumentbræt være forskelligt fra dit skrivebord.

Hvordan kan jeg bruge virtuelle skriveborde som aktiviteter?

Zoom ud ved hjælp af skrivebords-cashew'en. I den værktøjskasse som fremkommer, klikker du på Indstil Plasma og sætter et hak ved Forskellige aktiviteter for hvert skrivebord. Klik så på OK og du er klar.

Notifikationer fylder for meget på skærmen - kan jeg blive fri for dem?

For de, der ikke bryder sig om det, er der en nem måde at slå dem fra. Højreklik på statusfeltet ("i" ikonet) i statusområdet og vælg Indstillinger for statusområde.

Nu kan du slå statusmeddelelser fra programmer eller jobs (så som filoverførsler) fra ved at fjerne hakket i det relevante felt.

Temaer

Jeg kan ikke lide den måde panelet og andre Plasma komponenter ser ud. Kan jeg ændre det?

Ja, muligheden for at kunne ændre Plasmas udseende har været planlagt fra begyndelsen. Plasma kan bruge "temaer" til at ændre sit udseende. Et tema består hovedsagligt af et antal SVG billeder og filer, som specifiserer farver. Der er allerede flere temaer tilgængelige på [kde-look.org].

Hvordan kan jeg skifte mit Plasma tema?

Højre-klik på dit aktuelle skrivebord og vælg "Desktop-opsætning" (eller vælg samme punkt fra skrivebords cashew'en); ved punktet "Tema" kan du nu vælge et tema. Du kan også hente nye temaer ved hjælp af Hent smarte nye ting ved at klikke på "Nyt tema..." knappen.

Skridt for skridt instruktioner med skærmbilleder (lavet til KDE 4.1) findes på Aikurn's blog.

Understøttes grafiske effekter (som gennemsigtighed) uden compositing?

For ikke at komplicere kildekoden unødvendigt har Plasmas udviklere besluttet, at der ikke skal være compositing-frie udgaver af ting, som bruger compositing. Hovedårsagen er, at sådanne komplikationer tidligere (i KDE 3.5.x) var blandt årsagerne til, at kildekoden blev uhåndterlig. Desuden er eksistensen af ting, som kræver compositing en spore for grafikkort-udviklere til at skrive bedre grafikdrivere.

Fejlfinding

Plasma gik ned. Hvordan får jeg mit skrivebord tilbage?

Normalt vil Plasma genstarte automatisk efter et nedbrud. Hvis dette ikke sker, så kan du åben KRunner ved at taste Alt-F2 (den skulle stadig køre) og skrive "plasma"; så genstarter Plasma.

Mit panel er forsvundet. Hvordan får jeg det tilbage?

kquitapp plasma-desktop; rm $KDEHOME/share/config/plasma-desktop-appletsrc; plasma-desktop

Dette sletter dine Plasma indstillinger, så du får standard konfigurationen tilbage. Hvis det ikke virker at køre alle tre kommandoer samtidig, så prøv at skrive dem ind manuelt en ad gangen og vent et par sekunder mellem hver kommando.

(Bemærk, at $KDEHOME environment variablen måske ikke er sat. Prøv så ~/.ked (Fedora, Kubuntu Intrepid, Debian, upstream default) eller ~/.kde4 (OpenSUSE, Kubuntu Hardy og flere andre).)

Nogle GTK+ programmer har statusområde-ikoner med forkert størrelse

Det er desværre et problem med Freedesktop.org's specifikation af statusområder, som ikke definerer størrelsen af statusområde-ikoner ordentligt.

Plasma bliver ekstremt langsom, når jeg bruger den med NVIDIA's binære driver.

Det er alene NVIDIA's fejl og skyldes, at deres driver ikke understøtter XRender X11 udvidelsen korrekt; det påvirker også andre dele af KDE SC så som Konsole. Se på denne blog hvordan du rapporterer problemer til NVIDIA. Denne side indeholder et par forslag til, hvordan du forbedrer ydelsen indtil en opdateret driver bliver frigivet.

NVIDIA har udsendt drivere i serien 18x.xx, som kan give drastiske forbedringer af ydelsen med Plasma-skrivebordet og KDE SC 4 generelt.

For at forbedre ydelsen kan brugere, som har grafikkort i serierne NVIDIA 6 eller 7 tilføje følgende linje til deres xorg.conf i afsnittet "Screen". Du behøver ikke at tilføje linjerne, hvis dit NVIDIA kort er af serie 8/9 eller derover, da de er sat som standard.

Option "PixmapCacheSize" "5000000"
Option "AllowSHMPixmaps" "0"

Der er nogle andre tilvalg, som du kan prøve, hvis dine skrivebordseffekter virker dårligt.

Gå til Systemindstillinger > Skrivebord > Skrivebordseffekter > Avanceret, hvor du finder Indstillinger for OpenGL. Her sætter du Teksturfilter tilvalget til Bilineær eller Nærmeste (hurtigst). Du kan også slå Brug VSync fra.

Folder View og andre plasmoider bliver dårligt gengivet med et ATI videokort og open-source radeon driveren.

For at omgå dette problem må du ændre 2D accelerationsmetoden fra XAA (X Acceleration Architecture) til den nyere EXA. Da dette kræver, at du redigerer din xorg.conf fil, så tænk på, at sådan en ændring kan skade dit system. Gør det på egen risiko.

For at gennemføre ændringen skal du redigere din xorg.conf fil (lav en backup først for alle tilfældes skyld). Find Device afsnittet for dit grafikkort og tilføj linjen

Option "AccelMethod" "EXA"

før linjen "EndSection". Hvis der allerede er en linje med AccelMethod, så ret den fra XAA til EXA. Gem filen og genstart X serveren.

Bemærk, at EXA stadig er markeret som ustabil, og at nogle programmer så som KDE3 programmer kan blive ukorrekt vist.

Hints & Tips

Deaktiver ARGB visuals

Plasma bruger de såkaldte "ARGB visuals" til mange af sine effekter. For ældre videokort kan det betyde en alvorlig reduktion af ydelsen. For at slå ARGB visuals fra og øge ydelsen skal du sætte KDE_SKIP_ARGB_VISUALS environment variablen til 1 (KDE_SKIP_ARGB_VISUALS=1) før Plasma starter. Det kan du gøre ved at indføje en linje, som sætter denne variabel i /etc/profile eller i ~/.profile.

Højre-klik panelet, når din task-bar er fuld

For at ændre panelet skal du højreklikke på det, og hvis du har mange åbne programmer er det måske ikke så let. Du kommer omkring dette problem ved at bruge panel cashew'en til at åbne panelindstillingerne; så kan du højre-klikke på panelet (også på et program) og få kommandoen til at gå til panelet og ikke til programmet.

Flyt rundt på programfanerne på task-bar'en

Højre-klik på en tom del af task-bar'en (eller brug metoden beskrevet ovenfor) og vælg "Opsætning af taskmanager". I combo-boksen 'Sortering' vælger du 'Manuel' og dernæst OK. Nu kan du flytte rundt på task ikonerne ved at holde Alt-tasten nede og trække fanerne til deres nye position. (Hvis du bruger denne Alt-træk metode med panelkonfigurationen åben, så vil hele gruppen af programfaner blive flyttet samlet.)

Se nogle screencasts

Denne forum side har links til screencasts, som vil hjælpe dig til at forstå Desktop indstillinger, Panel indstillinger og Zooming User Interface.

Diverse tips

Som alternativ til de, der holder af et rent skrivebord:

1 - du kan fjerne panelet helt. Åbne appliketioner er stadig tilgængelige ved at bruge ALT-TAB metoden.

2 - du kan fjerne panelet og istedet tilføje et kort panel i toppen af skærmen, som kun indeholder task manageren.

3 - du kan have et panel, som indeholder task manageren og som bruger autohide.

Ordliste

Se Ordlisten .

Mere Hjælp

En side med screencasts, som hjælper dig med at forstå Plasma.

Tak

  • Daniel Laidig & Simon St.James - tak for umeet IRC log'ene!
  • Marco Martin - tak for information om paneler!
  • Sebas - tak for at lade mig bruge information fra din blog!
  • Half-Left - godt eksempel på brug af ZUI!
  • Aikurn - Glimrende videoer!
  • Marcelo Magno T. Sales - for at give Tips om panel i en mailing liste

Bidragsydere

  • Luca Beltrame - nuværende vedligeholder
  • Joseph M. Gaffney
  • Chani
  • Dipesh
  • Maninalift
  • Alle de anonyme bidragydere



Tilbage til introduktionssiden

Just another KDE user... nothing to see here, move along...

Stalk me on Twitter

Stalk me on Identi.ca



The Konqueror problem - the rollback doesn't show in the history, apparently. The person you need to talk to is Claus_chr --annew 12:52, 13 September 2009 (UTC)

File documents

I'm a member of the French Wikipedia community.

Please visit http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Utilisateur:Peter17 and my website : http://www.sitemai.fr.st

To contact me, please use my talk page.


附注

{{{1}}}



Displays an information box. Parameters

  1. Text of the main body
  2. (optional) Title of the box (default: Note)

Example: {{Note|This is a note}} gives

Note

This is a note

警告

{{{1}}}



Displays an information box. Parameters

  1. Text of the main body
  2. (optional) Title of the box (default: Warning)

Example: {{Warning/zh-cn|这是一个警告}} 给出

警告

这是一个警告
  • TutorialsI removed four links to off site pages, that no longer contain tutorials.
Maybe out of date now - keeping these things up to date is difficult.

Two Photo tutorials: pages still exist, but the tutorial content has been lost.

If those are the ones I'm thinking of, they were very good. I'll try to find the author and see whether we can get the content moved to userbase.

Two Screencast tutorials on Localize: Site seems to have been taken over by someone, screencasts are no longer there.

Not much we can do about that.

I also added three links to tutorials on KWord (allthough one of them hasn't been written yet).--Calus chr 25 September 2009

It's half-written :-) I'll try to finish it this weekend.--annew 18:27, 25 September 2009 (UTC)
I may not be able to finish it yet. I seem to have hit a but in frame-linking. I'll try to catch devs on IRC tomorrow to sort it out. --annew 18:17, 26 September 2009 (UTC)
I think I should remove that third KWord tutorial link. I still can't get the frame linking to work correctly, and last time I got a developer involved his KWord crashed when he tried it. I'll keep my draft, and watch developments. When this is fixed I'll re-add the link. --annew 10:57, 14 December 2009 (UTC)

This page used a template, KJots/Tips, that seems to have dissapeared. I took the links from my Danish translation of the template and added them. I am not sure about the exact wording, though, so I please feel free to improve.

It is propably just as well not to use the template on this page, as it would have caused misalignment of the columns. Claus chr 14:41, 13 December 2009 (UTC)

Yes, I think that was an experiment in embedding. I agree, better avoided. --annew 10:57, 14 December 2009 (UTC)

I hope this is the way to get answers. The instructions for asking questions are not clear to me.

This is actually intended for asking help in using UserBase - either finding information, or adding information. Your question should really be asked on userlists, such as the kdepim users list. However, the simple answer to this, assuming that you have a straightforward download of POP mail (the most usual way) is to copy the whole of /home/you/.kde/share/apps/kmail/ to your hard disk. If you may wish to transfer the mail to another computer you should read this page because other files will be needed. --annew 07:08, 14 May 2010 (UTC)
Do you intend moving the compile page to Techbase once it's finished? Rekonq have a similar page at http://techbase.kde.org/Projects/rekonq/Compiling_rekonq. It's linked within techbase from http://techbase.kde.org/Projects, and of course you would change the page link in userbase to the techbase page. Thanks --annew 16:42, 18 November 2009 (UTC)
  • LtWorfThanks for doing some work on the Kopete pages. As soon as we have finished the current round of checking which pages need updates, the next task is to improve the structure of UserBase. At that point pages such as the Webcam one is likely to be renamed http://userbase.kde.org/Applications/Internet/Kopete/Webcam_support. It shouldn't cause any problems, because anyone coming to it through an old link would be redirected. This will apply to all the Kopete subpages. --annew 10:41, 28 October 2009 (UTC)
How could I not welcome a Trekkie :-), especially my favourite character. Seriously, though, mediawiki does support tree-like directory structure. In fact the documentation recommends it. The problem is that new pages need creating with that structure built in, and we have not done that consistently - in fact few pages are sensibly structured. Think of a new user that's looking to see what multimedia applications are available. If he's a firefox user he may use middle-click to tabs, but there's a fair chance he'll just click.
I find it really annoying when I'm editing that there's no easy way back up one layer. There is a breadcrumb extension which I'd like to have installed, but that will use whatever structure we have, or don't have, for that matter, which would be a mess as it stands at the moment. That's why I want to work on structure as soon as I can get to it. In fact, though, the pages don't move. They are just re-directs, so I think the breadcrumbs will work perfectly but there is no danger of anyone not being able to access a page from the old address. --annew 15:42, 29 October 2009 (UTC)
  • LarnapmHi, I have a number of RSS feeds to my website which has a constant flow of culutre articles. I'd like to contribute but am unsure how to link my feed?

Can you help please. Thanks!

Make a draft of what you want to say about it, including putting the URL that you want to use for the feed, and I'll see what needs to be done, and explain it to you. --annew 12:54, 30 October 2009 (UTC)
  • Skanlite.png
  • Michael4910I use KDE since SuSE 8.2 back in 2003 and switched early to the KDE4 branch. I'd like to find more time to continue learning some C++, but until then I'm just a user ;-)

As the German translation of UserBase obviously needs some help I started some days ago to translate into my mother's tongue... Perhaps some self written content will follow...

You are very welcome. We are currently investigating some tools to make the life of translators easier. I'll be in touch with an update as we get nearer to going live. --annew 15:49, 8 November 2009 (UTC)

Windows XP can't boot lots of hardware, even old hardware!!!!

I thought this was because I had trashed the disk so badly, so I spent a lot of time backing up the Windows partition to a hard drive, running repair tools, etc. (I ran these User:Claus chr/Disk recovery tools from my Kubuntu live CD, the bootable recovery console on the Windows CD is a pathetic joke in comparison.)

Windows XP doesn't recognize SATA drives!

But it turns out disk corruption wasn't the problem. XP can't see my disk because it simply doesn't support SATA drives.

So I spent time building a newer "slipstreamed" XP boot CD-ROM, incorporating the MS XP updates. Of course, unlike Linux vendors that love people booting their operating system on any and all hardware, Microsoft hates the idea of you making a bootable Windows, they want you stuck with the 5 year-old CD-ROM with the holographic logo.

I had lots of problems doing this (see #nLite woes, discussed on the nLite/msfn forum http://www.msfn.org/board/cd-key-issue-xp-sp3-build-t136123-page-20.html

That didn't help. Even newer XPs just don't notice the hardware. Bastards.

Microsoft's approach to this is "Press F6 to interrupt booting and insert your manufacturer's floppy disk containing drivers. Even though my PC has a floppy disk drive, this is a f***ing nightmare:

  1. even in 1994, no manufacturer supplied floppy disks
  2. manufacturers instead provide huge multimegabyte programs to create floppy disks. Again, the ability to create a bootable disk or one that does something is considered highly valuable secret knowledge that must be hidden, rather than a simple "driver installer" package
  3. but those programs only run on Windows. I'm trying to start Windows! And unlike the unbelievable complete full-featured desktop on a Linux bootable CD, my Windows XP boot disk is ridiculously limited crap (because if it was any good, people would boot the CD, use the temporary Windows, and never complete the install)

So I had to "slipstream" the VIA motherboard SATA drivers. nLite can do this too, but it's very hit or miss.

Anyway, I finally built a Windows XP boot CD slipstreamed to Windows XP Service Pack 3 with the VIA SATA drivesr.

This booted! This recognized my hard drive! I was able to run chkdsk in the recovery console! I was able to run a repair install of Windows XP to my drive! Hallelujah!

Not so fast... After restarting, booting into Windows XP and entering my CD key (which I still had, taped to my Northwest Falcon binder), I had password errors.

nLite woes

I ran nLite on a Vista laptop to build new Windows boot CDs. These seemed to work, but they had this error.

Basically, you can't run nLite on Vista. Even though "all" it does is build a new CD-ROM from a legitimate Windows XP CD-ROM and Microsoft's own updates, it requires OS support that breaks between operating systems.

So I have to have a working XP to install. But my PC won't boot Windows.

Virtual Machine to the rescue

I installed Virtual Box 3, created a Win XP virtual machine, ran nLite in that, tested the .iso by making it the virtual machine's CD-ROM and repairing the virtual machine (that blew my fragile little mind), then burned the .iso to CD-RW and... it worked to repair my actual XP partition! thumbup.gif

Finally booting!

So at last I could boot into Windows XP. Some missing files, lots of updates, lots of missing bits and pieces.

The problems included:

Thunderbird woes

Nothing in C:\Documents and Settings\S Page\Local Settings\Application Data\Thunderbird\Profiles\1y6g4zic.default

so I copied everything from \\space\spage\spage559_Docs_Settings\S Page\Application Data\Thunderbird\Profiles\1y6g4zic.default , dated around 10/30/2008.

Start up errors

On most start-ups, Windows XP thinks it has to check C: for errors

Upon login as skierpage,

  • I get a window (or error?) from ATI\ATICUS~1\ATICUS~1.EXE.
  • I get one o more "Send error report?" dialogs. If I allow, my browser goes to"Blue screen error caused by a device or driver".


Can't Standby!

Start > Turn Off Computer > Standby is grayed out!

ATI/Uninstall errors

In desktop menu, "[ATI logo] Catalyst(TM) Control Center" does nothing.

In desktop menu > Properties > Settings > Advanced > Adapter , "Adapter Type" is empty, and everything under Adapter Information (Chip Type, DAC Type, Memory Size, etc.) is "<unavailable>"

When I run any of the ATI driver setup programs in C:\Falcon\Drivers\Video\ATI , the program silently exits.

I had problems with InstallShield uninstall directory somewhere, so I deleted it. Now uninstalls don't work.

In Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Event Viewer, MTC service fails to start.


ATI Uninstalls

Add/Remove Programs:

* ATI Catalyst Control Center [Change/Remove] gives

RUNDLL "Error loading C:\PROGRA~1\COMMON~1\INSTAL~1\PROFES~1\RunTime\09\01\Intel32\Ctor.dll"

* ATI Catalyst Registration, clicking [Remove] gives Windows Installer error about "resource... unavailable"

C:\DOCUME~1\SPAGE~1\LOCALS~1\Temp\_is9952\

* ATI - Software Uninstall Utility [Change/Remove] "Completely remove all ATI/AMD (Graphics/Chipset) software" option gives:

Please wait then RUNDLL "Error loading C:\PROGRA~1\COMMON~1\INSTAL~1\PROFES~1\RunTime\09\01\Intel32\Ctor.dll" then Please wait then Guide Plus+ for Windows "Error extracting support files: Access is denied."

All it seems to do is remove registry keys for ATI.

After copying saved C:\Program Files\Common Files\InstallShield, still has problems removing

  • ATI CCC (some missing data2.ca
  • ATI Catal
  • ATI Remote Wonder Error

"Error 1905.Module C:\Program Files\ATI Multimedia\RemCtrl\ATIRW.DLL failed to unregister. HRESULT -2147220472. Contact your support personnel." "(much the same, different DLL)" "Error 1905.Module C:\Program Files\ATI Multimedia\RemCtrl\Plug-Ins\GemstarRmtPgn.dll failed to unregister. HRESULT -2147220472. Contact your support personnel." "Error 1905.Module C:\Program Files\ATI Multimedia\RemCtrl\Plug-Ins\PowerPoint.dll failed to unregister. HRESULT -2147220472. Contact your support personnel." "Error 1905.Module C:\Program Files\ATI Multimedia\RemCtrl\Plug-Ins\WinAmp.dll failed to unregister. HRESULT -2147220472. Contact your support personnel." "Error 1905.Module C:\Program Files\ATI Multimedia\RemCtrl\Plug-Ins\MLRmtPgn.dll failed to unregister. HRESULT -2147220472. Contact your support personnel." "Error 1905.Module C:\Windows\system32\ATIRWRF.DLL failed to unregister. HRESULT -2147220472. Contact your support personnel." "Error 1905.Module C:\Windows\system32\ATIRWRF.DLL failed to unregister. HRESULT -2147220472. Contact your support personnel."

Was able to remove

Programs > GUIDE PLUS+ > GUIDE PLUS+(TM) System Update Wizard - ATI eventually failed to update patch...

After reboot

Running C:\Falcon\Drivers\Video\ATI\9_3_xp32_dd_ccc_wdm_enu\ Setup.exe still gave me choice to install two tiny drivers, still exited early on.

I was able to run the nested CCC Setup.exe program. Apart from complaining about a mismatched install.ini in C:\Program Files\ATI Technologies\ATI Catalyst Control Center (which it put there!), it seemed to install.

Ran C:\Falcon\Drivers\Video\ATI\9_3_xp32_dd_ccc_wdm_enu\Driver\AtiCimUn.exe and that

  • uninstalled DAO
  • configured (removed?) the ATI Catalyst Control Center I just installed
  • Ran InstallShield for GUIDE PLUS+, but got "Error extracting support file: Access is denied."

I just couldn't get past this so I deleted C:\Program Files\Gemstar myself.

In Safe Mode

In fact I'm running VGASafe (save?) weird video driver.

Couldn't install ATI_dd (driver only), it complained about no DirectX. Went through detailed instructions for trashing all remnants of ATI drivers, rebooted, didn't help...

VGASave -- no drivers!!!

I searched for this and found a note at Wolfxxx site about missing motherboard drivers. That might explain why I had no AGP in Device Manager and no Video either!

I should have checked more closely against drivers in C:\Falcon\Drivers\Motherboard\AMD\VIA\ downloaded VIA_HyperionPro_V524A driver package:

Update INF Files of VIA chipsets to load proper system drivers
VIA AGP Driver 4.60A
The AGP interface provides a fast connection between the core-logic and the graphics controller without using PCI bus bandwidth.
VIA PATA/SATA IDE Driver Package V2.80A
VIA PATA/SATA IDE Controller Driver
VIA V-RAID Driver Package V5.80a
VIA V-RAID Software for VIA RAID Controller
VIA V-RAID Config Utility V5.85
VIA V-RAID Config and Monitor Utility

Allowed some V-RAID thing to run at each windows startup (??)

vs. my drivers in C:\WINDOWS\system32\drivers

  • viaagp.sys VIA NT AGP Filter v 5.1.2600.5512 2008-04-14
  • viaide.sys Generic PCI IDE Bus Driver v 1.0.1.1 2008-04-14
  • viamraid.sys VIA AHCI RAID DRIVER FOR WIN XP/SRV2003 5.1.6000.581 2009-07-26
  • viasraid.sys VIA SATA RAID DRIVER FOR WIN XP 5.1.2600.210 2003-05-09



Other items in Add or Remove Programs

Removed Apple Mobile Device Support and Bonjour

?!? Why two "DAO" installs? This is something ATI installs.

I downloaded msicuu2.exe, "Windows Install Cleanup". Much to clean up...

  • all the old Javas I deleted
  • one of the two "DAO"s.

I had Google Updater errors, but I ran it and was able to update Picasa and Skype OK.

Event Viewer errors

I ws getting lots of errors from some MTC thingy.

2009-08-03 in System,

  • one:

The EMS Inter-Link driver V3.0 service failed to start due to the following error:

  • lots of:

The Application Management service terminated with the following error: The specified module could not be found.


Try to fix video woes - DISASTER

ATI wouldn't install, it didn't recognize its own card.

Again, more %&*$#@! driver crap. Windows XP doesn't seem to have the necessary drivers to see an AGP video card. It can talk basic video to it, but ATI's own installer doesn't see the card.

So I somehow installed a bunch more VIA AGP drivers.

Now my PC won't boot into Windows again! ARGHHHHHH

  • PageLayout
  • ShayonMImages are not allowed in UserBase profiles. Your image will be removed.--annew 08:49, 20 November 2009 (UTC)
NP - I had no reason to think that you had bad intentions :-) Don't forget to edit a page when you can think of something that should be there and isn't :-) --annew 16:34, 21 November 2009 (UTC)
  • Lancelot.png
  • Start-here-kde.png
  • System-run.png
  • PlasmaThese pages relate to the different sections and uses of Plasma, on the desktop or on the netbook.
  • Michael4910Over the last few days I've done a lot of work on categorising pages because I wanted to add an extension that uses them. I have now discovered that the extension is unsuitable for userbase, so that work is useless. Please don't waste your valuable time in adding the category marks to your translations.--annew 13:07, 26 November 2009 (UTC)
 OK, thanks for the hint. --Michael4910 13:25, 26 November 2009 (UTC)

Co je UserBase?

UserBase je kolekce stránek určených k získání nápovědy uživatelům aby kdykoli získaly dobré zkušenosti s KDE.

Na UserBase naleznete

* Stránky určené aplikacím - Objevte nové funkce o kterých jste nevěděli!
* Často kladené otázky (FAQs)
* Návody a příručky - dodělávání věcí,
a řešení problémů
* Tipy a triky - dělání života jednodušším
a více příjemným

Co zde nenaleznete

* Technické stránky, často využívány vývojáři - mnoho takových odkazů naleznete na http://techbase.kde.org/
* "Oficiální" dokumentaci - nalzenete ji na kde.org nebo na stránkách aplikací
* Rozvrhy akcí - naleznete je zde

Připraveni k přispívání?

Není podstatné zda jste registrovaní před přispíváním, ale vážíme si toho. Pokud se zaregistrujete dostanete svou diskusní stránku, která umožňuje kontakt s vámi. Buď můžete použít OpenID nebo si vytvořte normální účet.

Po registraci doporučujeme přečíst si Pokyny k přispívání (en) kde jste upozorněni na klasické otázky.

Zde naleznete pokyny pro stavbu a vzhled (en) stránky a pro pomoc se syntaxí se podívejte zde (en).

Mějte na paměti výše uvedených pokynů. Pokud máte jakýkoli obsah, který považujete za uživatelsky-centrický, ale není striktně v rámci těchto pokynů, obraťte se Společenství pracovní skupiny na community-wg at kde dot org.

Zpět k úvodní straně (en)

  • MultimediaThis page lists audio and video playing applications, together with utilities for creating audio and video disks, and controlling your sound channels.
  • OfficeThis page lists the components of a full office suite, a Personal Information Manage (PIM) and various supporting applications, including money and time management. All your productivity needs.
  • TutorialsLearn the less obvious functions of these applications
  • UtilitiesThese are small applications that keep your system in good order or make organisation of your files easier to manage
  • SecurityThese are small applications that enhance the security of your system
  • RalphMWUser:RalphMW/tabbing

User:RalphMW/Desktop_Effects


Misc

Note
Tip
Warning

Howto -> aGIF http://hanswchen.wordpress.com/2009/09/02/record-screencasts-to-animated-gif-files/

sorry - forgot to sign it :-)--annew 20:23, 8 December 2009 (UTC)

Information

Check out the list of KDE Websites for other articles, tips, and tutorials from online magazines, articles, and writers all over the world.


General System

Workspace

File Management

In Kontact

In Krunner

In KOffice

  • Basic Layout is a tutorial that creates a leaflet with various images and explaining text using KWords frames technology. Several text frames and image frames will be created and positioned on the page.
  • A Second Layout experiments with placing, grouping and moving images within a text area.
  • Using the Artistic Text Shape is a tutorial that shows how to get started with the artistic text shape that all KOffice applications provide.
  • KWord Manual Tutorial on basic concepts of working in a frame-based environment, and detailed guides for all your WP needs.

In Mail Systems

In Web Browsers

In Multimedia

Klipper

Development


Back to the Welcome page

Category removed to prevent indexing

But before you do, check for edits - a number of small changes were necessary --annew 14:12, 13 December 2009 (UTC)
  • WebsitesRe the rebranding: Generally I think it is a great success. In many cases it has resulted in translations, that work much better than previously. I take this as a sign that the distinction between the community and the software adds clarity to our writing.

In this particular page, however, there are a few instances of the converse:

The phrase "KDE Plasma Desktop" (which appear in other pages as well) is awkward to translate - especially when preceded by "Your". I take "Plasma Desktop" to refer to a single concept so that the "KDE Plasma Desktop" is the "Plasma Desktop" of KDE (SC), but preceded by "Your" we then have a "Plasma Desktop" belonging to two subjects which is not easy to express in Danish (at least not when we are talking of different kinds of belonging).

It would be possible to read "KDE Plasma Desktop" simply as one single concept, but I don't think, that this fits well with the way we use KDE elsewhere. Would "Plasma Desktop" not suffice? I believe that the association with KDE should be clear enough from context.

The other phrase that gave me problems was about community software being "not shipped nor directly supported by the KDE SC". It seems odd, that a collection of software should have the ability to do or not do anything. We might say "not shipped with (or as part of) KDE SC", but then the bit about support is lost.

On the other hand we could say "KDE community" instead of KDE SC, but then the sentence contradicts itself, unless we begin to distinguish between community in a narrow and a broader sense, and I don't think we want that. My best bet is to lose the bit about support and go with SC. Claus chr 15:36, 13 December 2009 (UTC)

Overall, I think it is a good direction - generally making it much clearer whether we are talking about the community or the software. However, I have found that in some cases I was not completely happy with the replacement text, so don't hesitate to change anything that simply doesn't work for translators
As far as I'm concerned, I concur that in this context (the Plasma Desktop) the KDE part is easily enough inferred, so if you need to drop it, I'd be happy enough. If there are any repercussions we'll deal with that when it happens.
As for the community software, I always have problems there. As a user I don't find it easy to know when software is SC or community. It simply isn't obvious to users (and probably shouldn't be).
With the move to the Translation extension in mind, we do need to keep consistency in the translation, or it will cause problems later. Whenever any application is labelled as Community Software there is a footnote saying that support comes from that project, not from the KDE community. With that in mind, I think it is safe to drop it here. Please take it out of the English page, before editing your translation :-) I trust your judgement.--annew 11:12, 14 December 2009 (UTC)
  • Plasma/FAQ/4.3This page is currently for discussion of the entry or Plasma 4.3. Talk for 4.1 and 4.2 can be accessed from the linksbelow.
   Talk:Plasma/FAQ/4.1
   Talk:Plasma/FAQ/4.2

The Plasma/FAQ contains several references to the Dashboard, but no explanation of it, which is a bit confusing. It would be great, if someone could write a bit about it, either on the Plasma page or here, where ever it seem more appropriate, and perhaps also a short definition in Glossary with a link. --Claus chr 3 August 2009 -->

Find all templates using a given template

<DPL>
  namespace = Template
  include = *
  includematch = /{{Icon/
  includemaxlength = 0
  format = ,\n* [[%PAGE%|%TITLE%]],,
  resultsheader = There are %TOTALPAGES% templates using the Icon template\n
</DPL>


Find discussion threads contributed by a user

Perhaps more talk namespaces needs to be searched.

<DPL>
  namespace = Talk | Thread
  createdby = AmirHP
</DPL>


All English manual pages

<DPL>
  titlematch = %/Manual%
  nottitleregexp = .*((/[a-z][a-z](.|-..)?)|([ _][(][a-z][a-z](...)?[)]))$
  namespace = Main | User | Draft
  resultsheader = Manual Pages:
  format = ,\n* [[%PAGE%|%TITLE%]]\n,,
</DPL>


All English pages linking to a given page

{{LinksTo|Plasma/Panels}}


Kopete Subpages in 3 columns

<DPL>
  titlematch = Kopete/%
  notnamespace = Translations
  columns = 3
  format = ,\n* [[%PAGE%|%TITLE%]],,
</DPL>

Akonadi Subpages in Danish

<DPL>
  titlematch = Akonadi%/da
  notnamespace = Translations
  format = ,\n* [[%PAGE%|%TITLE%]],,
</DPL>

Archived pages

<DPL>
  titlematch = %
  namespace = Archive
  columns = 2
  format = ,\n* [[%PAGE%|%TITLE%]],,
  resultsheader = There are %TOTALPAGES% pages in the Archive namespace. These are:\n
</DPL>

NoIndexed pages

<DPL>
  titlematch = %
  category = Noindexed_pages
  columns = 2
  format = ,\n* [[%PAGE%|%TITLE%]],,
  resultsheader = There are %TOTALPAGES% pages in the Archive namespace. These are:\n
</DPL>

Ignoring Deleted Pages

"As for DPL. If you hit a page with ?action=purge attached to the URL (i.e. http://en.wikinews.org/wiki/Template:Latest_news?action=purge ), it will dump all the removed pages."

Remaining old-style translations

<DPL>
  titlematch = %_(%)
  notcategory = Template
  notnamespace = Thread
  notnamespace = Summary
  columns = 2
  format = ,\n* [[%PAGE%|%TITLE%]],,
  resultsheader = There are %TOTALPAGES% pages (partly) remaining in old-style translations. These are:\n
</DPL>

Pages with old i18n bar

<DPL>
  titlematch = %
  namespace = Main
  uses = Template:I18n/Language Navigation Bar
  columns = 3
  format = ,\n* [[%PAGE%|%TITLE%]],,
  resultsheader = There are %TOTALPAGES% pages that still display the old i18n language bar\n
</DPL>

Pages with old i18n bar but w/o old-way-translated ones

<DPL>
  nottitlematch = %_(%)
  namespace = Main
  uses = Template:I18n/Language Navigation Bar
  columns = 3
  format = ,\n* [[%PAGE%|%TITLE%]],,
  resultsheader = There are %TOTALPAGES% relevant pages that still display the old i18n language bar\n
</DPL>

Pages not updated since 1st July 2010

<DPL>
  namespace = Main
  lastrevisionbefore = 201007010000
  columns = 2
  ordermethod=lastedit
  format = ,\n* (%DATE%) [[%PAGE%|%TITLE%]],,
  resultsheader = There are %TOTALPAGES% pages without recent updates\n
</DPL>

Listing Non-Translation Pages

<DPL>
  nottitleregexp = .*((/[a-z][a-z](.|-..)?)|([ _][(][a-z][a-z](...)?[)]))$
  titlematch = Amarok%
  namespace = Main
  columns = 1
  format = ,\n* [[%PAGE%|%TITLE%]],,
  resultsheader = There are %TOTALPAGES% Amarok pages, not counting translations\n
</DPL>

List all pages in a specific namespace

<DPL>
  nottitleregexp = .*((/[a-z][a-z](.|-..)?)|([ _][(][a-z][a-z](...)?[)]))$
  namespace = MediaWiki
  columns = 3
  format = ,\n* [[%PAGE%|%TITLE%]],,
  resultsheader = These %TOTALPAGES% pages are in the Mediawiki namespace\n
</DPL>

To count translated pages in a specific language:

<DPL>
  titlematch = %/en
  notnamespace = Translations
  columns = 3
  format = ,\n* [[%PAGE%|%TITLE%]],,
  resultsheader = There are %TOTALPAGES% pages (partly) translated to English. These are:\n
</DPL>